JP2018051354A - Game management system - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game management system capable of enhancing the degree of freedom of a management mode of the variety of information on a game and performing a management reliably.SOLUTION: A game management system comprises: a Pachinko machine 10 (game machine); a card unit 200 (game device) connected in one-to-one with the Pachinko machine 10 and capable of communicating; a game parlor side management device 300 (game management device) connected in a communicating manner with the card unit 200; a third party management organization 320 (external management device) connected in a communicating manner with the management device 300; and a prize exchange device 240 (prize POS) connected in a communicating manner with the third party management organization 320. The card unit 200 is enabled to send and receive information to and from the Pachinko machine 10, and outputs predetermined information to the game parlor side management device 300 and the entire information to the third party management organization 320.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11

Description

  The present invention relates to a game management system that collects and manages information related to gaming machines output from gaming machines.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, an enclosed game machine that encloses a predetermined number of game balls and circulates the enclosed game balls to perform a game is known. In such a gaming machine, various game information is output to a card unit (ball lending machine) to be connected, and further, various game information is output from this card unit to a management device installed in the game store for management. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2012-34957 A

However, the system as described above has the following problems.
That is, for example, it is not possible to select only information required on the game store side from various information output from the card unit, and there is no flexibility in its management form.
Moreover, even if a large amount of information is collected uniformly, there is a possibility that the management will not be achieved.

  Therefore, the present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and can increase the degree of freedom of the management mode of various information related to games, and can perform management reliably. The purpose is to provide.

The gist of the present invention for achieving the above-described object resides in the following invention.
The invention described in claim 1
A gaming machine capable of giving a gaming value acquired by a player as a gaming score, a gaming device connected to the gaming machine in a one-to-one relationship and communicating with the gaming machine, and the gaming device; A game management system comprising: a game management device communicably connected; an external management device communicably connected to the game device; and a prize exchange device communicably connected to the external management device Because
The gaming device includes information output means capable of outputting information about the gaming machine received from the gaming machine to the gaming management device and the external management device,
The information output means includes
The game management device is configured to be capable of outputting predetermined information selected from information related to the gaming machine received from the gaming machine,
The external management device is configured to be able to output all the information related to the gaming machine received from the gaming machine,
The prize exchange device can output prize-related information relating to a prize exchange process for exchanging a game value acquired by the player to a predetermined prize to the external management apparatus.

As a result, the external management device accepts all the information related to the gaming machine, but the gaming management device can manage only the selected predetermined information.
Here, the game machine is capable of playing a game by launching a game ball guided to a predetermined launch position in a game area, for example, in a state where a game ball as a game medium is enclosed in the machine in advance, A sealed pachinko machine that circulates and uses the game ball by collecting the game ball that has passed through the game area and guiding it to the launch position again corresponds to this. In this circulation game, the game value acquired by the player due to winning or the like is provided as a game score without paying out game media (game balls, game medals, etc.).

  The game management device corresponds to a game machine and a game device that are installed in a facility such as a game store where the game machine or the like is installed, and directly manage the facility. The gaming management device may be installed anywhere as long as it is configured to be communicable with the gaming device. For example, it may be installed in the same facility as a gaming device, or may be installed outside the facility, such as an organization that manages a facility in which a gaming machine or gaming device is installed. .

  On the other hand, the external management device is communicably connected to the gaming device, and is basically installed outside the facility. In addition, the external management device is configured to be able to receive various types of information from the gaming device, and the external management device registers information regarding gaming machines installed at each facility from a gaming machine manufacturer or the like. The game machine-related registration information to be received is configured to be received in advance.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine applied to a present Example. It is a figure which shows a game board. It is a back view of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the circulation structure of an enclosure bulb | ball. It is a block diagram which shows the control system of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the connection board | substrate of a drawer connector. It is a figure explaining the structure of an operation display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structure of encryption communication and backup power supply. It is a figure explaining the output conditions of gaming machine ID. It is a figure which shows the detailed structure of a nighttime monitoring switch. It is a system configuration figure showing a game management system. It is a figure which shows the output information of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game state information transmission process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main control ID transmission process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the reception command determination process of the game control apparatus of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the payout command edit process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the payout command edit process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the payout command transmission process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the communication abnormality monitoring process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the LED edit process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize display LED edit process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the error / fraud monitoring process of a game control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main process of the payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the night monitoring information reception process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the payout control apparatus of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the switch monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the error / fraud monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the error cancellation switch monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the enclosed ball number monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the board surface ball number error monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the prize number abnormality monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the frame open | release error monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the frame switch abnormality monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the frame radio wave fraud monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the nighttime monitoring fraud monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main control command reception process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main control ID reception process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit command reception process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge control process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge permission condition setting process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the raising apparatus control process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-balls management process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the count switch monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the counting ball use monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the ball removal control processing of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment control process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment start monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment write completion monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the payment completion | finish monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the break control process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the break start monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the break end monitoring process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the LED edit process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the error LED edit process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-balls LED editing process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-balls display data setting process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the counting ball number LED edit process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the main control command transmission process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit command transmission process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the card unit command transmission process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the recovery response process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the recovery detailed response process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the communication start response process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the communication end response process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the status information response process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a card | curd insertion response process. It is a flowchart which shows the card | curd return response process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the break confirmation response process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the break start response process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the break end response process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the payment confirmation response process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment start response process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the payment completion response process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the count use response process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game machine ID transmission process of a payout control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the game stop signal edit process of a payout control apparatus. It is a figure which shows browsing of the registration information in a game store side management apparatus. It is a figure which shows the inquiry of the abnormal content in the game store side management apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display of the abnormality history in an operation agency. It is a figure which shows registration of the reception information in a game store side management apparatus. It is a figure which shows the output setting of the reception information in a game store side management apparatus. It is a figure which shows the display of the management instruction | indication from an operation agency company in a game store side management apparatus. It is a figure which shows the whole control action in a game system. It is a figure which shows the whole control action in a game system. It is a front view which shows the modification of a card unit. It is a table | surface which shows the list of the information regarding the gaming machine output from a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the whole control action in the game system at the time of applying the modification of a card unit. It is a block diagram which shows the flow of collation when the collation result of gaming machine ID at the time of gaming machine installation is NG. It is a block diagram which shows the flow of collation of game machine ID after a game machine installation. It is a block diagram which shows the flow of collation of game machine ID after a game machine installation. It is a system configuration figure showing a modification of game management system 1. It is a figure which shows the modification of a circulation path. It is a timing chart which shows the output of the magnetic sensor provided in the modification of the circulation path. It is a figure which expands and shows the communication part provided in the modification of the circulation path. It is a front view of the slot machine applied to a present Example. 2 is a system configuration diagram of a game management system including a control system of a slot machine. FIG. It is a system block diagram which shows the modification of the game management system containing the control system of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the setting analysis in the game store management means which manages a slot machine.

  The gaming management system 1 according to the present embodiment collects and manages information about gaming machines output from gaming machines installed in a gaming store, and communicates by connecting the gaming machines to the gaming machines on a one-to-one basis. Gaming device (card unit 200), gaming management device (game store side management device 300) connected to the gaming device for communication, the gaming device and a predetermined medium (third party management) An external management device (third-party management organization 320) that is communicably connected via an institution relay device 310) and a gaming facility management means (operation agency 330) capable of managing gaming facilities are provided. Hereinafter, a case where the gaming machine is applied to the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the drawings.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
The pachinko machine 10 is generally called an enclosed game machine, and a card unit (CR unit) 200 that also serves as a ball lending machine in a state in which a predetermined number of game balls as game media are enclosed in the machine in advance. Based on the number of possessed balls (game value) corresponding to the input valuable value information (number of ball lending), a game ball is launched to play a game. In the pachinko machine 10, card units 200, which are gaming devices, are installed in a one-to-one correspondence. The card units 200 will be described later.

  In such a pachinko machine 10, a game ball guided to a predetermined launch position can be launched into a game area 22 to be described later, and a game ball that has passed through the game area 22 can be collected and the launched. By guiding it again to the position, the game ball is circulated and used. In the process of dropping a game area 22 described later, the launched game balls are collected as safe balls if they win various winning holes, and are collected as out balls if they don't win any winning holes.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 includes a machine frame 11 that is fixed to a gaming machine island (not shown) installed in the game store, and the inner frame 12 has one end on the machine frame 11. It is attached so as to be openable and closable as the center of rotation. A game board 20 shown in FIG. 2 is attached to the inner frame 12, and a glass frame 13 is attached to be openable and closable so as to cover the front front of the game board 20.

  The game area 22 of the game board 20 can be viewed from the front through a glass plate (which may be a transparent synthetic resin plate) held by the glass frame 13. The glass frame 13 is pivotally supported and attached to the inner frame 12 at one end portion thereof. That is, the glass frame 13 including the glass plate opens the front surface of the game board 20 from a normal use state (closed state) covering the front surface of the game board 20 (front surface including the game area 22) with a slight gap. It can be opened and closed in the open state.

  In the open state of the glass frame 13, for example, an operator can insert a hand into the front of the game board 20 to release a clogged ball in the game area 22 or throw in a missing game ball. It has become. Here, in addition to the glass frame 13, the inner frame 12 is attached to the machine frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. The inner frame 12 is also referred to as a game frame or a front frame, and the glass frame 13 is sometimes referred to as a front frame. In the present embodiment, the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 will be described.

  The inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 are opened and closed manually by an operator (employee at a game shop, etc.). An opening / closing mechanism for automatically opening and closing the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 (Driving means: an opening / closing solenoid or the like) is provided, and the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 based on an operation of a remote controller (not shown) of an operator (an amusement shop employee, etc.) on an IR light emitting unit 204 of the card unit 200 described later The opening / closing mechanism may be operated by inputting an opening / closing signal, so that the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 can be opened / closed.

Further, a lower panel 30 is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 13, and a ball count indicator 50 and an operation display device 60 are disposed on the lower panel 30.
The number-of-balls display 50 displays the number of balls that the player has acquired. For example, a plurality of 7-segment LEDs are arranged in a horizontal row so that a digital numerical value (number of balls) can be displayed. It is configured. Such a number-of-balls display 50 displays the game value of the player under the management of the pachinko machine 10 (specifically, the payout control device 80). In addition, you may comprise so that a number of balls may be displayed on a part of screen of the operation display apparatus 60 mentioned later, without providing the number-of-balls display 50 separately.

  Further, the lower panel 30 is provided with a production operation switch 32, a counting switch 36, and a counting ball display 37. The production operation switch 32 can be involved in the production within a certain range and is operated by the player. The production operation switch 32 has a push button type switch (button P) in the center, and is arranged vertically and horizontally corresponding to a cross key. There are four switches. The push button type switch at the center can be involved in the production within a certain range when pressed by the player, and numbers and symbols appearing on the screen of the display device 41, for example, by pressing four switches arranged vertically and horizontally Etc. can be selected.

  The counting switch 36 is turned on (or switched on / off) by an operation that the player presses. The counting ball indicator 37 is turned on if there is a counting ball. When the counting switch 36 is operated when the player wants to count the number of balls, the counting of the number of balls is started. A count switch LED is provided inside the count switch 36, and the count switch LED is configured to light up when the count switch 36 is pressed.

  In addition, on the lower panel 30, on the right side of the operation display device 60 described later, a firing operation handle 18 is provided for allowing the player to perform a game ball firing operation. The firing operation handle 18 is configured to be able to fix the firing volume 171 (see FIG. 5). That is, when the player touches the launch operation handle 18 and fixes the launch volume 171 at a desired position, the launch intensity of the game ball can be adjusted.

  In the lower panel 30, a key insertion portion 17 of a locking device (not shown) for the inner frame 12 and the glass frame 13 is formed at a side end portion that is an opening / closing side (right side in FIG. 1) of the inner frame 12. A lower speaker 16a for outputting sound effects and the ashtray 19 are provided below the operation display device 60. Further, a pair of left and right moving lights 15 are provided on the upper front surface of the glass frame 13. Furthermore, a pair of left and right lower speakers 16b, 16b are provided on the lower front surface of the glass frame 13.

  In addition, a decorative lamp 14 having an LED as a light source is provided on the upper front surface of the glass frame 13, and the moving lights 15 and 15 disposed on both the left and right sides of the decorative lamp 14 include an LED as a light source, A motor as a drive source and a speaker corresponding to the upper speaker are provided. Here, the decorative lamp 14 and the moving lights 15 and 15 constitute a decorative display LED (frame) 142 shown in FIG. The moving lights 15 and 15 change the light emission mode of the LED in accordance with the progress of the game to raise the player's expectation, or when a situation advantageous to the player occurs, the motor described above It is possible to move (rotate) and enhance the production effect.

  The operation display device 60 is not arranged in advance on the lower panel 30 of the pachinko machine 10, and belongs to the configuration on the card unit 200 side described below with respect to the pachinko machine 10 after being installed in the amusement store ( The operation display device 60 (supported by the card unit) is attached to the lower panel 30. Here, the operation display device 60 is a part of the configuration of the card unit 200, is controlled by the card unit 200, is controlled by the card unit 200, and is connected to the card unit 200 via the connecting unit 31. The When the pachinko machine 10 is installed, the operation display device 60 connected to the card unit 200 via the connecting portion 31 is attached to the lower side of the ball holding number display 50 by the lower panel 30 of the pachinko machine 10.

  The operation display device 60 is composed of a touch panel type liquid crystal display. As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIG. 7A, a ball rental rate display 61, a remaining amount display 62, and a ball rental button 63. A return button 64, a storage / replay button 65, a message / operation area 66, a switching button 67, a break button 68, and a holding ball display button 69 are arranged. The counting ball use button 66a is set to be displayed in the message / operation area 66 when there are counting balls.

  Although not illustrated, a level meter left and a level meter right as variable display devices may be provided on the left and right sides of the game board 20, respectively. These level meter left and level meter right each have a display unit that can be moved mechanically up and down, and one of the level meters is used for production, and the other level meter is used as a counting display device. You can also

For example, an effect level meter can normally perform an effect indicating a big hit reliability by moving up and down as a reliability meter related to a big hit (for example, an effect that increases as the degree of expectation for a big hit increases). In addition, the count display level meter can produce an effect of displaying the counting ball number in an analog manner.
The analog display of the number of counting balls here means that the display moves up and down according to the number of counting balls, stops when the number of counting balls is small, stops at a low position, and moves to a high position when the number of counting balls increases. It is an effect that informs the player of the approximate number of counted balls in analog form. That is, the display unit is configured to rise as the number of counting balls increases, so that the player can sensuously grasp the approximate number of counting balls.

  Further, a decorative ball display device may be provided on the lower panel. This decorative ball display device is composed of, for example, an upper decorative ball display device and a lower decorative ball display device, and the upper decorative ball display device is designed to create an image of a so-called upper plate and is operated and displayed. The lower decorative ball display device is designed to create an image of a so-called ball box, and is arranged on the lower side of the ball number display 50 (further below the operation display device 7 described later). It is conceivable that each of them is composed of a large number of LEDs.

  In the upper decorative ball display device, for example, when the number of balls held by the player is 100 or more, all LEDs are lit or blinking, and when the number of balls held is 50 or less, half of all LEDs are The decoration is controlled so that it is turned off. Further, the lower decorative ball display device, for example, when the number of counted balls = 0, all the LEDs are turned off, and the lower decorative ball display device that images the ball box from the upper decorative ball display device while counting the number of balls held. The decoration is controlled so that the LED moves and blinks so that the sphere moves toward. Then, LEDs are turned on in order from the lower part of the lower decorative ball display device, which is an image of a ball box, according to the number of counted balls. You may be made to be.

Next, the front structure of the game board 20 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 20 is made of a plate-like base material, and a guide rail 21 that divides a substantially circular game area 22 is provided on the front surface of the game board 20. Along the game area 22 is guided along. 2 is a device that is installed in a frame portion (for example, the machine casing 11) and is capable of launching a game ball from the upper part of the game board 20 toward the game area 22, which is a so-called upper launch type. It has a launching mechanism.

  In the game area 22, in addition to a large number of game nails (not shown) that change the falling path of the game ball, the general winning ports 27a to 27d, the first starting winning port 25, the second starting winning port 26, the center case 24, a display device 41, a variable winning device 29, a general start gate 28, an out-ball inlet 23, and the like are provided. In addition, the 2nd start winning opening 26 is also called a normal electric accessory (common electric power), and is corresponded to a normal variable winning apparatus.

  The game area 22 is an area for performing a safe or out determination (determination of whether or not a prize has been won) while the launched game ball falls from above, and the game ball is awarded a safe ball by winning various winning holes. In this case, data of a predetermined number of game balls set in advance according to the type of winning opening is added to the number of balls held by the player as a prize ball. A collective display device 70 is provided outside the game area 22 of the game board 20 (details will be described later). Hereinafter, main components on the game area 22 will be sequentially described in detail.

  Each of the start winning ports 25 and 26 is a winning port that functions as a start winning port for a special figure (special symbol) to be described later. In this embodiment, the start winning ports 25 and 26 are arranged side by side as shown in FIG. The upper first start winning opening 25 is always open, but the lower second start winning opening 26 is configured to be openable and closable. Here, the second start winning opening 26 includes a pair of left and right opening / closing members 26a, 26a, and when each opening / closing member 26a is opened on both sides, it is possible to win, and when it is in the closed state shown in FIG. . Each start winning opening 25, 26 is disposed below the center portion of the center case 24. Note that the two start winning ports 25 and 26 may have a single inlet, and the first and second distributions may be performed internally.

  The center case 24 is a member surrounding the front periphery of the display device 41 attached to the back side of the game board 20. The center case 24 is provided with a stage effect device 35 that enhances the stage effect in cooperation with the stage display on the display unit 41. The effect accessory device 35 is an accessory having a movable part that is operated by a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. In addition, you may make it the structure which includes a small-sized liquid crystal display device in a part of the production | presentation actor apparatus 35, or provides a small-sized liquid crystal display device separately, performs a presentation, and has the number of possession balls, the number of acquired balls, and a game. Related information may be displayed. Furthermore, a small liquid crystal display device may be further cooperated with the effect display on the display device 41 and the effect agent device 35 to further enhance the effect. In addition, this small liquid crystal display device may be configured to be movable so as to increase the expectation of the game or enhance the effect.

  The game board 20 (including the center case 24) is provided with lamps for production or decoration, and these lamps are decoration display LEDs (boards) 141 on the game board 20 side (see FIG. 5). Configure. Further, the game board 20 (including the center case 24) is provided with a speaker 16c (see FIG. 5) on the game board 20 side, in addition to the upper and lower speakers 15, 16a, 16b on the frame side.

  Next, the display device 41 includes, for example, an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display), and includes a display screen 41 a surrounded by the center case 24. The display screen 41a displays various images including identification information (referred to as special figures) such as numbers and characters related to the variable display game. The display device 41 is not limited to the LCD (liquid crystal display) and may be any device that can display various images. For example, a CRT (cathode ray tube) display, an organic EL display display, or the like is adopted. You can configure it.

  The variable display game is started based on the winning of game balls at the start winning ports 25 and 26, and is basically identified on the display screen 41a of the display device 41, for example, in the left, right, center, and horizontal three rows. The special decoration figure which is information is displayed, the special figure scrolls and changes for each column, and when a predetermined time elapses, one arbitrary special decoration figure is stopped and confirmed for each column. During the execution of the variable display game, a character image, a background image, and the like are appropriately displayed on the display device 41 in accordance with the variable display of the decorative special drawing. Note that the special figure to be displayed in a variable manner is not limited to the horizontal three columns. For example, a plurality of special figures may be arranged in a vertical and horizontal manner and displayed in a matrix.

  With respect to the variation display game, a plurality of types of variation patterns having different variation times and display contents are prepared in advance in the effect display mode from the start to the determination of the display result. Each variation pattern is set so that the reliability with respect to the determination of the special result mode corresponding to the big hit is different as the display result of the variation display game. Each variation pattern is set such that display control is performed by the effect control device 53 based on a control command transmitted from the game control device 54 shown in FIG.

  For any variation pattern of the effect display mode, the decoration special figure stopped and confirmed as the display result of the variation display game is a predetermined combination (for example, a state where all the same types as “333” etc. are aligned). The case where it becomes is defined as “special result mode (atari)”. In addition, before the special result mode is determined, among the combinations of special figures that become the special result mode, the other special charts except for one special map become the special result mode, and the one special map has not yet been determined. This state corresponds to the “reach display mode”.

  When the display result of the variable display game is finally determined to be in the special result mode, a special gaming state in which a special winning opening 29a described later is repeatedly opened and closed a predetermined number of times is set to occur. On the other hand, if the display result of the variable display game is not finally determined as the special result mode, it corresponds to the “out-of-range display result (losing)”, and the special game state does not occur. Note that the special figure used in the variable display game is not limited to simple symbols such as numbers and symbols, and for example, a figure imitating a specific character may be used.

  In addition, the display results of the variable display game are all of the same type in any of the probable symbols (eg, odd symbols “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”, “9”). When the special result mode (probability big hit) is confirmed, a special gaming state with a high probability state is generated. In other words, when the special result mode (probability variation jackpot) arranged with probability variation symbols is confirmed, the display result of the variable display game is special until the next special game state occurs after the special game state generated based on this is completed. The jackpot probability determined in the result mode changes to a high probability.

  As described above, the game state having a higher probability of winning the big hit determined in the special result mode is higher than the normal game state (low probability state) in the high probability state (also referred to as “probability change state” or “probability change mode”). is there. The high probability state may be ended up to a predetermined number of times (so-called ST), and every time the variable display game in the high probability state started after the end of the special gaming state is executed. It may be determined whether the high probability state ends (so-called falling lottery).

  Further, during the high probability state, a time reduction state (or also referred to as “time reduction state” or “time reduction mode”) in which the change time of the variable display game on the display device 41 is reduced is also set to occur. Yes. In the time shortening state in the present embodiment, for example, the probability that the display result of the normal map variation display becomes a predetermined hit mode is high, and the variation time of the general map variation display described later is shortened. 26, the time for the pair of opening / closing members 26a to be opened is extended (the time for opening the second start winning opening is extended, the number of times the second starting winning opening is opened, etc.) It is possible to set to

  On the other hand, the display result of the variable display game is the same type in any of the non-probable symbols (for example, even symbols “0”, “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) among the special graphics. When it is determined to be a special result mode (non-probability fluctuation jackpot) that matches, a special gaming state without a high probability state occurs.

  When the special result mode (non-probability variation jackpot) arranged with non-probable variation symbols is confirmed, after the special gaming state generated based on this is completed, the above-mentioned time shortening state is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). (Or “short-time state” or “short-time mode”) is set to occur.

  When a game ball is won at each start winning opening 25, 26 during execution of the variable display game or the occurrence of the special game state, the right to execute the variable display game is acquired as a hold and is currently in progress. After the change display game or the like ends, the held rights are sequentially digested. The number of hold of the variable display game is set to 4 at the maximum, for example, and the actual number of hold is displayed on the collective display device 70 and the display screen 41a described later so that the player can visually confirm. Note that an upper limit may not be set for the number of reservations.

  In this embodiment, for example, two kinds of special chart start memory (special figure start memory) are displayed (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display), and two kinds of special figure variable display games are displayed. The first variation display game (first variation display game and second variation display game) is executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening 25 occurs, the display device 41 plays the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1. When a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the second start prize opening 26 is generated, a second variation display game based on the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41.

  Further, the display device 41 is configured to display an image related to a general drawing (ordinary symbol) separately from the special drawing, and the display device 41 corresponds to a general drawing display device. Specifically, when a game ball passes through the general figure starting gate 28, a general figure fluctuation display, which is a fluctuation figure of the normal figure, is performed on a part of the display screen 41a of the display device 41, and the display result of this normal figure fluctuation display If is applicable to the predetermined hit mode, a privilege referred to as a hit per map is granted. In other words, when the normal figure is reached, the pair of opening / closing members 26a of the second start winning opening 26 operate until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls are won from the normal closed state to the open state described above. . Therefore, it becomes easier for the game ball to win the start winning opening, and accordingly, the number of executions of the special variable display game increases.

  If a game ball further passes through the normal symbol start gate 28 during execution of the normal symbol display, the right to acquire the normal symbol display is put on hold, but after the normal symbol display currently in progress is terminated, The reserved rights will be digested in sequence. The number of reserved symbols for normal symbol display is set to, for example, a maximum of four, and the actual number of reserved symbols is displayed by the collective display device 70 described below so that the player can visually confirm. The normal symbol display may be displayed by a universal display device provided separately from the display device 41. Note that an upper limit may not be set for the number of reservations.

  The collective display device 70 displays the display of the number of holds and the display of the game state in addition to the display of the special drawing and the general drawing that are the basis of the display of the decorative special drawing displayed on the display device 41 and the normal drawing fluctuation display. Is to do. As shown in FIG. 2, the collective display device 70 includes a special figure 1 display 71a, a special figure 2 display 71b, a special figure 1 hold LED 72a, a special figure 2 hold LED 72b, a winning display LED 73, a universal figure LED 74, and a universal figure hold LED 75. , A round display LED 76 and a status display LED 77, and these elements are integrally formed on the substrate of the collective display device 70. What is displayed on the collective display device 70 is called a special figure or a general figure (formal special figure or universal figure), whereas a special figure or a common figure on the display device 41 is displayed. This is a dummy display for directing for the player.

The special figure 1 indicator 71a is composed of 7-segment LEDs, and displays the special figure 1 (including fluctuation display and stop state display). Various display modes are adopted depending on which segment is lit (or blinks) among the seven-segment LEDs. The various display modes are, for example, “outside” stop, “big hit” stop, “being fluctuated”, etc., for Special Figure 1.
Similarly, the special figure 2 display 71b is composed of 7-segment LEDs, and displays the special figure 2 (including fluctuation display, stop state display, etc.). Various display modes are adopted depending on which segment is lit (or blinks) among the seven-segment LEDs. The various display modes are, for example, “Fluctuating”, “Out of” stop, “Big hit” stop (the lighting mode of the segment corresponds to the big hit type), etc. for the special figure 2.

  It should be noted that the variable display game according to FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is a display device 41 when a special figure start prize (first start prize) is generated by the game ball entering the first start prize opening 25. When the first variation display game by the variation display of the decorative special figure 1 is performed and the special ball start winning (second starting prize) is generated by the game ball entering the second starting winning opening 26, the display device 41 is displayed. The second variation display game by the variation display of the decoration special figure 2 is performed, but it is not the decoration special figure but the display of the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed collectively. They are the special figure 1 display 71a and the special figure 2 display 71b which are arrange | positioned at the apparatus 70. FIG.

The special figure 1 hold LED 72a displays the hold number of the special figure 1. The hold number of the special figure 1 is the special figure start prize (first start) when the game ball enters the first start winning opening 25. This is the number of suspensions stored with an upper limit of 4 when a (winning) occurs. Here, for example, when the upper limit of the number of holdings in FIG. 1 is four, the number of holdings = 1: one LED on the left end is lit, and the number of holdings = 2: one LED on the second from the left is lit. , The number of hold = 3: one third LED from the left end is lit, and the number of hold = 4: all three LEDs may be lit (may be blinking, not lit), However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured to light up or blink so that the player can recognize the number of holds (hereinafter the same).
Similarly, the special figure 2 holding LED 72b displays the number of holdings of the special figure 2, and the number of holdings of the special figure 2 is the special figure starting prize (when the game ball enters the second starting prize opening 26 ( This is the number of suspensions stored with an upper limit of 4 when a second start prize is generated.

The winning display LED 73 displays the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the winning opening, and corresponds to a winning display device. Here, winning a prize opening means all winning a prize outlets with a winning ball discharge (a process of actually paying out a ball or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). 25, 26, the big winning opening 29a of the variable winning apparatus 29, and the general winning openings 27a-27d.
In the case of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is an enclosed ball type gaming machine, so that a winning ball corresponding to winning in a winning opening is added to the number of balls held. On the other hand, in a normal gaming machine, the winning ball corresponding to the winning at the winning opening is actually discharged (paid out) to the upper plate.

The winning display LED 73 includes two 7-segment LEDs, and can display a 2-digit number as the number of winning balls.
The general-purpose LED 74 is a single LED, and performs the normal-state display (including change display and stop state display). As the display mode, for example, “out of contact” stop = light-off, “hit” stop = light on, “during change” = blinking.

  The multi-purpose hold LED 75 displays the number of general-purpose holds. The general-purpose hold number indicates that when the game ball passes the multi-purpose start gate 28, the general-purpose LED 74 of the collective display device 70 is activated. The normal display status display is performed, and at the same time, the general display change display game is performed by the display change of the normal display on the display screen 41a as the decoration general display status display. In this way, the game ball passes the general display start gate 28. In this case, the number of suspensions stored with an upper limit of four.

The round display LED 76 displays the number of rounds when a big hit is generated due to the start winning of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 and the big hit game is executed. For example, four LEDs can display three types of rounds. It is the composition. For example, 2 rounds are displayed when the leftmost LED emits light, 4 rounds are displayed when the second LED from the left emits light, 11 rounds are displayed when the third LED from the left emits light, and 16 rounds are displayed when the rightmost LED emits light. It can be configured as follows. Also, in this embodiment, four LEDs are used with 2, 4, 11, 16 rounds as the big hit, but it differs depending on the gaming machine. In this case, the number of round display LEDs can be changed, or the collective display device This can be done by sticking a round number changing sticker or the like so that each round number corresponding LED is visible from the front side.
The state display LED 77 displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and is composed of two LEDs. As the display of the gaming state, for example, it is indicated by lighting (or blinking) of two LEDs that the state is “probability variation state”, “time-short state”, “power-on probability variation state”, or the like.

  The variable winning device 29 is generally called an attacker and includes a large winning port 29a. The large winning port 29a is configured to open and close by a door tilting forward with the lower end as a swing center. The variable winning device 29 is controlled to open and close so as to generate a special game state when the display result of the variable display game is in a special result mode. Here, the special game state is an open state in which the door of the grand prize opening 29a is opened and the game ball is easy to win, and the door is passed by a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10). This is a state in which the closed state that is difficult to win due to being closed is repeated up to a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds).

Next, a game ball that is a game medium used in the pachinko machine 10 will be described.
The game ball of the present embodiment is a sphere made of a nonmagnetic material in order to prevent fraud due to magnets. Here, the nonmagnetic material may be stainless steel, aluminum, ceramic, or the like, but a nonmagnetic metal material such as stainless steel is suitable as a material that can be detected by a proximity switch for detecting a winning that will be described later. In particular, stainless steel is excellent in wear resistance and corrosion resistance.

  Conventional game balls are generally made of steel, but in a game ball made of a magnetic material such as steel, a magnet that illegally wins by guiding the flow of game balls launched into the game area 22 by a magnet. There was a risk of fraud. Therefore, by constituting the game ball with a non-magnetic material, it is possible to prevent improper magnets. However, there is a possibility that a game ball made of a non-magnetic material is replaced with a game ball made of a magnetic material by opening the glass frame 13 or the like. Therefore, in this embodiment, a magnetic sensor 133 (see FIG. 5) for monitoring magnet fraud is provided along with a radio wave sensor 134 for monitoring fraud, which will be described later.

  Further, the surface of the game ball made of a non-magnetic material may be covered with a thin film of another material. Here, the other material is a non-magnetic material similar to a game ball, and a material having high hardness and excellent lubricity, wear resistance and slipperiness is suitable. For example, diamond-like carbon, titanium nitride, nitride The surface of the game ball may be covered with a thin film of aluminum titanium. In this way, by covering the surface of the game ball with a thin film of another material, even if the game ball is repeatedly used in an enclosed game machine, the surface of the game ball is prevented from being deteriorated and dirt is prevented as much as possible. be able to.

Next, the back mechanism of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 3, the main parts of the back mechanism in the pachinko machine 10 include a card unit connection terminal plate 52, an effect control device 53, a game control device 54, a payout control device 80, a power supply device 55, a security plate 33, There are a drawer connector section 90, a production relay board 56, a glass frame opening switch 125, an inner frame opening switch 126, and the like.

  In addition, a lifting device 402, a polishing device 406, a launching device 34, and the like are also provided as back mechanisms, but these are not shown in FIG. 3, and will be described later with reference to FIG. In addition, since the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is an enclosed ball type gaming machine, there is no component corresponding to a conventional storage tank (upper tank) or a safe unit (non-enclosed ball type).

  The card unit connection terminal plate 52 is a board for wiring connection between the pachinko machine 10 side and the card unit 200 side, and not only transmits information from the payout control device 80 on the pachinko machine 10 side to the card unit 200 side. This is a board for wiring connection that allows input from the card unit 200 side to the payout control device 80 on the pachinko machine 10 side. That is, it is a board for wiring connection that can transmit information from both the pachinko machine 10 and the card unit 200.

  Further, since the operation display device 60 is under the control of the card unit 200 and is controlled by the card unit 200 as described above, the operation display device 60 is directly connected to the card unit 200 by, for example, a harness. Has been. Therefore, the card unit 200 can input and output information, signals, and the like with the operation display device 60 via a directly connected harness.

  The production control device 53 is based on the control command output from the game control device 54, and the display device 41, the decoration display LED (board) 141, the production effect device 35, the decoration display LED (frame) 142, and the upper and lower speakers 15, 16a. , 16b, etc., and a circuit board for realizing this control function is housed in a predetermined case.

  The game control device 54 is a main control device that manages a variable display game such as a special figure, and various switches, solenoids, lamps, and the like disposed on the game board 20 in relation to the progress of the game such as the special figure. In addition to electrically controlling the electrical parts (electrical accessories), the control information is sent to other control devices, and the progress of the game is comprehensively managed and controlled. The formed circuit board is housed in a case 54a having a security structure that is difficult to open. Further, on the back side of the game control device 54, an inspection device connection terminal 114 and a test firing test terminal 115 for the inspection device are arranged.

  The payout control device 80 is a device for managing encapsulated balls and managing the number of balls held (payout control board), and a circuit board on which a circuit including a microcomputer that performs the control is formed has a security structure that is difficult to open. Housed in 80a. On the back side of the dispensing control device 80, an inspection device connection terminal 84 to which a cable for the inspection of the pachinko machine 10 by the authorities is connected, a test fire test terminal 85 to which a cable for a test fire test is connected, a predetermined Error display LED 88 that lights (or flashes) in the event of an abnormality, error release switch 87 for releasing the error, RAM clear switch 181 that clears the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80 and the RAM 113 of the game control device 54, and the enclosed ball is pulled out. A ball removal switch 182 is arranged.

  The power supply device 55 uses a commercial AC power supply (for example, AC 100V) as an input power supply, and supplies necessary power to each control device and each electronic component of the pachinko machine 10 from this input power supply. Note that the commercial AC power supply is not limited to AC 100 V, and for example, AC 24 V may be supplied to each gaming machine in units of islands, and AC 24 V may be used as an input power source. The power supply device 55 is provided with a power switch 191 for turning on / off the AC power supplied to the power supply device 55.

  The drawer connector 90 has a drawer connector structure, and stores a main connection board 91 and a payout connection board 92, a board effect connection board 93, and a frame effect connection board 94 shown in FIG. is there. Here, the main connection board 91 and the payout connection board 92 connect the game control device 54 on the board side (game board 20 side) and the payout control device 80 on the frame side (side of the machine frame 11 or the like). In addition, the board effect connection board 93 and the frame effect connection board 94 include an effect control device 53 which is a board side member, a decoration display LED 142 which is a frame side member, and the effect relay board 56 (see FIG. 5). Connect through. Details of the drawer connector will be described later.

  Here, the production relay board 56 relays between various equipment such as the inner frame 12 on the frame side and the production control device 53, and between the various equipment on the frame side and the production connection board 94 for the frame. Is arranged. The frame effect connection board 94 is connected to the board effect connection board 93 via a drawer connector, which will be described later, and the board effect connection board 93 is connected to the effect control device 53 via a cable. Details will be described later with reference to FIG.

The glass frame opening switch 125 is a sensor that detects that the glass frame 13 has been opened. The inner frame opening switch 126 monitors the opening of the inner frame 12 and also monitors the removal of the game control device 54. The glass frame opening switch 125 and the inner frame opening switch 126 will be described in detail later.
The security plate 33 is a plate-shaped metal plate that is disposed on the back side of the machine casing 11 in the pachinko machine 10 and prevents fraud. The security plate 33 fills a gap between the card unit 200 and the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view showing a circulation path and the like of the game ball in a state where the effect control device 53 and the like are removed from the back mechanism of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. 4, the circulation path includes a lower passage 401, a lifting device 402, an upper passage 403, a bypass passage 404, a ball passage 405 provided on the lower side of the bypass passage 404, and the like.

  The lower passage 401 is inclined to such an extent that the game balls collected by flowing down the game area flow down by their own weight. A polishing device 406 is disposed below the lower passage 401. The polishing device 406 polishes the encapsulated sphere. When the lower passage conversion member 410 in the middle of the lower passage 401 is opened by the lower passage conversion solenoid 410S, the lower passage conversion member 410 is moved from the lower passage 401 to the lower passage conversion member 410. The ball that has flowed into the polishing inlet passage 419 as indicated by an arrow through the wheel is polished by the polishing member 414 (for example, polishing cloth) disposed inside while being conveyed by the conveying screw 420 by the power of the polishing motor 412, It is configured to discharge from the lower outlet 415. The sphere discharged from the lower outlet 415 is set so as to go to the inlet of the lifting device 402 through the lower passage 401.

  In the polishing device 406, a polishing inlet switch 421 for detecting a sphere flowing into the polishing device 406, a polishing motor switch 422 for detecting the operation of the polishing motor 412, and a polishing cloth motor for winding a polishing member 414 (for example, polishing cloth). 423, a polishing pad unit switch 424 for detecting attachment of the polishing pad unit is disposed. When the polishing pad motor 423 is operated, the polishing member 414 is wound around the polishing pad unit, and the polishing member 414 can be replaced by replacing the polishing pad unit. Note that the polishing member 414 is contaminated by the polishing of the encapsulated sphere, and is therefore replaced after a certain period.

  In addition, the lower passage converting member 410 described above is disposed in the middle of the lower passage 401, and after the game area 22 is generated and a game result is generated, a ball (recovered from the game board 20) is collected. The out passage 431 is opened so as to face the lower passage conversion member 410 so that the out (including out) balls and the safe balls (the number of hits) can flow down, and is opposed to the out passage 431. A polishing inlet passage 419 is disposed at a position where the polishing is performed.

  In this embodiment, the game ball launching device 34 is arranged on the upper side (left side of the board) of the game board 20, and the ball is launched directly from the launching device 34 toward the game area 22. Therefore, there is no foul ball that has been launched but does not reach the game board 20 (game area 22) and becomes a foul, and the foul ball does not pass through the out passage 431 as a collection ball.

  Further, in this embodiment, the ball is removed from the encapsulated ball by the upper passage conversion member 436 and the upper passage conversion solenoid 436S arranged at the firing standby position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a similar switching valve and switching solenoid are provided between the end of the polishing device 406 and the inlet of the lifting device 402, and have passed through the polishing device 406. The game balls (or the game balls collected and passed through the lower passage 401) may be discharged out of the machine. As a result, the path through which the game ball to be removed flows and passes is short, and the space for the ball removal mechanism can be saved.

  Then, neither the sphere that has passed through the lower passage 401 as it is without flowing into the polishing device 406 or the sphere that has flowed into the polishing device 406 and finished polishing and discharged from the lower outlet 415 is the inlet of the lifting device 402. Head for. Here, the lifting device 402 includes a lifting inlet switch 432 for detecting a ball flowing into the device, and a lifting motor for lifting the ball that has passed through the lifting inlet switch 432 to the upper passage 403 as indicated by an arrow. 433, a lifting motor switch 435 that detects the operation of the lifting motor 433, a lifting outlet switch 434 that detects a ball discharged from the lifting device 402, and the like.

  The ball discharged to the upper passage 403 through the lifting outlet switch 434 flows through the upper passage 403 and is blocked by the upper passage conversion member 436 when the upper passage conversion member 436 is in a closed state, and stays there. 34 is configured to be able to supply a sphere. Here, the launching device 34 launches a game ball from the upper part of the game board 20 toward the game area 22. Further, the upper passage 403 has a structure that is gently inclined by a predetermined angle so that the downward flow is reduced, and the sphere flows down the upper passage 403 by its own weight.

  A replenishment box portion 443 is connected to the upper passage 403 between the lifting outlet switch 434 and the second enclosed ball detection switch 165. Here, the replenishment box portion 443 is capable of replenishing a new game ball to the upper passage 403 after removing the encapsulated ball used or when the number of encapsulated balls has decreased due to some event. It is. The supply method is not limited to this, and for example, the inner frame 12 (glass frame 11) may be opened and a game ball may be supplied from the out-ball inlet 23 (see FIG. 2). . Thereby, replenishment work becomes easy. Further, when the game ball is replenished from the out ball inflow port 23, the lower passage conversion solenoid 410S is operated in accordance with the replenishment timing, and the game ball flowing down the out passage 431 is polished through the polishing inlet passage 419. If the game balls are polished by flowing into the apparatus, the supplied game balls can be polished once before being used for games.

  Here, a ball that has been lifted by the lifting device 402 and discharged to the upper passage 403 via the lifting outlet switch 434 (or a ball replenished from the supply box 443 and discharged to the upper passage 403) The first enclosing ball detection switch 164 (enclosed ball detection 1SW) provided on the downstream side of the upper passage 403 and the second enclosing ball provided on the upstream side flow down the passage 403 and are aligned toward the launching device 34. It is detected by the detection switch 165 (encapsulated sphere detection 2SW). The number of game balls enclosed can be managed based on the detection results of the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 (encapsulated ball detection 1SW) and the second enclosed ball detection switch 165 (encapsulated ball detection 2SW). It becomes possible. Note that a mark may be formed near the upper passage 403 so that an accurate determination can be made as to whether or not the number of encapsulated balls is appropriate by visual confirmation, for example.

  The game balls flowing down the upper passage 403 are blocked by the upper passage converting member 436 that is closed during normal times (when the ball is not removed), and are guided toward the launching device 34 to be launched. To the top of the game board 20. The upper passage conversion member 436 includes an upper passage conversion solenoid 436S. When the upper passage conversion solenoid 436S is off, the conversion member of the upper passage conversion member 436 does not slide, and the conversion member is urged by a spring. Thus, the end of the upper passage 403 (the communication portion with the bypass passage 404) is closed to prevent the sphere from flowing into the bypass passage 404. At this time, the sphere is guided from the upper passage 403 toward the launching device 34 and is prevented from flowing into the bypass passage 404.

  On the other hand, when the upper passage conversion solenoid 436S is turned on, the conversion member of the upper passage conversion member 436 is sucked and slid by the upper passage conversion solenoid 436S, and the end of the upper passage 403 (the communication portion with the bypass passage 404) is opened. The sphere in the upper passage 403 is operated to flow into the bypass passage 404 by gravity. Thereby, the sphere of the upper passage 403 is guided to the bypass passage 404 by gravity and is not supplied to the launching device 34. The operation of the upper passage conversion solenoid 436S is performed by operating the ball removal switch 182 of the payout control device 80. When the ball removal switch 182 is turned on, the upper passage conversion solenoid 436S is turned on. An end of the upper passage 403 is opened so that the ball of the upper passage 403 flows into the bypass passage 404.

  When the ball removal switch 182 is turned on, the upper passage conversion solenoid 436S is also turned on. This is because when the ball of the enclosed ball is removed, when an employee of the game shop turns on the ball removal switch 182, the upper passage conversion solenoid 436S is turned on, and the upper passage conversion solenoid 436S is turned on so that the upper passage 403 is turned on. This means that the sphere flows into the bypass passage 404 and is collected in the collection box 445 via the ball removal passage 405. For example, when replacing a long-used encapsulated ball, the employee operates the deball switch 182 so that the encapsulated ball is collected from the upper passage 403 via the bypass passage 404 and through the deball passage 405 as described above. Collected in box 445.

Next, the collection of a ball that has finished a game on the game board 20 will be described.
In FIG. 4, in the launching device 34, the balls supplied from the upper passage 403 are sent one by one to the firing position by the ball feed solenoid 172 (see FIG. 5), and the launch solenoid 173 (see FIG. 5) is sent from the upper part of the game board 20. ) To the game area 22. In addition, since the launching device 34 launches a ball directly from the upper part of the game board 20 toward the game area 22, no foul ball is generated.

  The ball fired on the game area 22 passes through the game area 22 to generate a game result, and from the out ball inlet 23 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 20 to the outside (here, outside the board (out) here). To be recovered. At this time, the ball that has won the first start winning opening 25 is detected by the first start opening switch 120, and the ball that has won the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 121. The ball that has won the winning opening 29a is detected by the count switch 124, and the balls that have won the general winning openings 27a to 27d are detected by the winning opening switches 123a to 123d (hereinafter collectively referred to as 123). The switches 120, 121, 123, and 124 are disposed on the back side of the game board 20.

  Further, on the left and right frame portions on the back side of the game board 20, there are a first safe ball detection switch 162 and a second safe ball detection switch 163 for detecting only safe balls of the game board 20 (not detecting out balls). Arranged on the left and right sides of the back side of the game board 20. However, the safe ball of which winning prize is detected differs depending on the behavior of the sphere because the first safe sphere detection switch 162 and the second safe sphere detection switch 163 are arranged on the left and right, but the first safe sphere detection The sum of the spheres detected by the switch 162 and the second safe sphere detection switch 163 matches the total sum of the safe spheres.

  On the other hand, a ball that is out of the game result and is out (out ball that flows into the out ball inlet 23 of the game board 20) is detected by the out ball detection switch 161 and flows into the out passage 431. Similarly, the out ball detection switch 161 is arranged on the back side of the game board 20. Then, the safe balls and the out balls that have ended the game on the game board 22 are collected in the out passage 431 as the collected balls and discharged to the lower passage 401. Therefore, the spheres collected in the out passage 431 are calculated by the total number (collected spheres) obtained by the three sensors “out sphere detection switch 161 + first safe sphere detection switch 162 + second safe sphere detection switch 163”. .

  The collected balls (out balls, safe balls) collected in this way normally flow into the polishing device 406 from the lower passage 401 and are polished, and then are pumped up by the lifting device 402, It passes through the upper passage 403 and returns to the launcher 34. Further, when the polishing device 406 is abnormal, the lower passage conversion solenoid 410S of the lower passage conversion member 410 does not operate, and the lower passage conversion member 410 closes the polishing inlet passage 419 so that the balls do not flow into the polishing device 406. The collected ball passes through the lower passage 401 as it is toward the inlet of the lifting device 402 and does not flow into the polishing device 406.

Next, an appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls will be described.
As shown in FIG. 4, among the circulation paths through which the encapsulated sphere circulates, the upper passage 403 is inclined downward or descending toward the vicinity of the launch position as shown in FIG. 4 with the vicinity of the launch position of the launch device 34 being the lowest position. doing. The first encapsulated sphere detection switch 164 is provided so as to detect a sphere located at a first position lower than the second encapsulated sphere detection switch 165 on the relatively downstream side of the upper passage 403. On the other hand, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 is at a second position higher than the first encapsulated ball detection switch 164 on the relatively upstream side of the upper passage 403 (upstream side of the first enclosed ball detection switch 164). It is provided to detect a certain sphere.

  The first enclosed ball detection switch 164 is a sensor that detects the lower limit of the number of balls enclosed as a game ball, and the second enclosed ball detection switch 165 sets the upper limit of the number of balls enclosed as a game ball. It is a sensor to detect. This is because the encapsulated spheres need to be encapsulated in the pachinko machine 10 without excess or deficiency, and the current number of encapsulated spheres is checked to be at least the minimum and below the maximum, respectively. It is provided to confirm that there are encapsulated balls.

  Further, in the upper passage 403, the first position is the most upstream game when the number of game balls accumulated in the upper passage 403 is the lowest number within the appropriate range of the number of enclosed balls (the number of enclosed game balls). The sphere is set at a position where the first enclosing sphere detection switch 164 detects it. In addition, the second position is such that when the number of game balls exceeding the appropriate range of the number of encapsulated balls accumulates in the upper passage 403, the second encapsulated ball detection switch 165 detects the game ball, When game balls are accumulated in the upper passage 403 by the number of values, the second enclosed ball detection switch 165 is set to a position where no game ball is detected.

  In addition, the above-mentioned upper passage 403 in the flow path of the enclosing enclosed sphere is made of a transparent or translucent member, or has an internal viewing opening (a thin slit or a plurality of minute sized openings) that does not flow out of the sphere. In this configuration, at least a part (preferably the whole) of the game ball can be seen from the outside (at least from the back side of the pachinko machine 10). ing.

  In the configuration of FIG. 4 described above, the state in which the encapsulated ball is dropped into the game area 22 but does not flow into the polishing apparatus 406 is the upper passage 403, the firing device 34, the game area 22, the out passage 431, the lower passage 401, The enclosed ball circulates through the path of the device 402 and the upper passage 403 to play a game. The state in which the encapsulated ball falls while playing a game game and circulates through the path without polishing the encapsulated ball is referred to as “in encapsulated ball game circulation”.

  On the other hand, when the encapsulated sphere is polished during the game with the encapsulated sphere, the encapsulated sphere is dropped into the game area 22 and flows into the polishing device 406 to polish the ball. 403, the launching device 34, the game area 22, the out passage 431, the lower passage 401, the encapsulated sphere flows into the polishing device 406 from the lower passage 401 through the lower passage conversion member 410, and then the sphere is polished. Then, the route passes through the lower passage 401 by the lifting device 402 and reaches the upper passage 403, and while the encapsulated sphere is being polished, the game is played in a circulating manner. The state in which the encapsulated ball falls while playing the game game and circulates through the path while polishing the encapsulated ball is referred to as “encapsulated ball polishing game circulation”.

  The reason for polishing the encapsulated sphere even when the power is turned on is to polish the encapsulated sphere once a day even on a stand that is not in operation. That is, in this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the discharge control device automatically activates the launch device 34 (launch solenoid) (automatic launch state), and the encapsulated ball passes through the game area 22 to the polishing device 406. When the sphere is circulated by flowing in, the encapsulated sphere is passed through the upper passage 403, the launching device 34, the game area 22, the out passage 431, the lower passage 401, and from the lower passage 401 through the lower passage conversion member 410 to the polishing device 406. Then, the ball is polished, and then the encapsulated sphere circulates through a path that passes through the lower passage 401 and is transported by the lifting device 402 to the upper passage 403. The state where the encapsulated sphere does not play a game game and circulates the above path while polishing the encapsulated sphere is called “encapsulated sphere polishing / circulating”. The difference from the above-mentioned “in the enclosed ball game circulation” is the configuration of whether the player is in a firing state by operating the launching operation handle or in an automatic firing state by the control of the payout control device.

Next, the card unit 200 attached to the pachinko machine 10 will be described.
Here, the card unit 200 is connected to each pachinko machine 10 on a one-to-one basis, and corresponds to a “game device” that can communicate with the corresponding pachinko machine 10.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the card unit 200, a game card (game value storage medium) is inserted into the card slot 201, and the player operates the ball lending button 63 (see FIG. 7) of the operation display device 60. By doing so, a predetermined number of balls can be lent (increased number of balls) within the range of valuable value information (for example, the number of balls lent) recorded on the game card.

  In addition, the card unit 200 is provided with a cash slot 202. The cash input port 202 is capable of inputting cash, and by inserting a predetermined banknote (for example, 1000 yen, 5000 yen, 10,000 yen) into this, within the range of the ball lending number corresponding to the amount of the inserted banknote. Lending of game balls (ie, lending balls; increasing the number of balls held) is performed. At this time, a prepaid card (a visitor card described below) corresponding to the inserted cash is issued inside the card unit 200.

  As game cards that can be used in the card unit 200, there are prepaid cards (hereinafter referred to as visitor cards) that can be used by general players other than members and member cards unique to game stores called house cards. The membership card is issued after registering as a member, and the number of ball lending (corresponding to the amount of ball lending), the number of balls held, and the number of balls stored can be registered. When a member card is inserted into the card slot 201, the ball is stored on the condition that the member's PIN is input on the screen of the message / operation area 66 (see FIG. 7A) of the operation display device 60. Can be used.

  Here, the visitor card is stocked in the card unit 200 and is issued when cash is inserted into the card unit 200 as described above. This visitor card can register the number of balls lending and the number of balls held, but not the number of balls stored. In addition, the number of balls held is valid only on that day, and the number of balls stored can be used by changing to the number of balls held at a later date.

  Further, the card unit 200 is provided with an error notification LED 203 and an IR light emitting unit 204. The error notification LED 203 notifies of an error that has occurred in the card unit 200. The IR light emitting unit 204 is a unit for performing infrared communication, has a function of receiving an infrared signal, converting it into an electronic signal and outputting it, and wireless communication between a remote controller used by a game shop employee and the card unit 200. Infrared interface unit used in Further, the card unit 200 includes an operation display device 60 as a part of its configuration, and the display of the operation display device 60 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the control system of the pachinko machine 10 described above will be described with reference to FIG.
In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch, and “SOL” means a solenoid. Also, in the drawings, when the name of a member is long, it is difficult to show the name, and therefore it may be written (illustrated) with an appropriately short name.
The pachinko machine 10 includes a game control device 54, an effect control device 53, a power supply device 55, and a payout control device 80 as main components of the control system. Necessary power is supplied from the power supply 55 to each of these devices and each electronic component shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a device for controlling the progress of a game (a conventional game) is controlled by a device (payout control device) that performs encapsulated ball control (control of the number of encapsulated balls and control of addition / subtraction processing of the number of held balls). The control device is separated from the control device. By separating in this way, the program of each control device is simplified, and the control burden is reduced. Note that the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, a device in which such a payout control device 80 and the game control device 54 are integrated may be provided as the game control device 54. In this case, signals and commands sent from the game control device to the payout control device become unnecessary, and the control burden is reduced, and space and power can be saved.

  First, the configuration of the game control device 54 of the pachinko machine 10 and the devices connected to the game control device 54 will be described. The game control device 54 is a main control device that manages a game such as a special drawing, and includes a CPU 111, a ROM 112, a RAM 113, an inspection device connection terminal 114 for an inspection device, and a test firing test terminal 115.

  The CPU 111 executes a game program for managing a game such as a special figure and performs arithmetic processing necessary for game control. The ROM 112 stores a game program, and the RAM 113 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the game program. The CPU 111, the ROM 112, and the RAM 113 correspond to a gaming microcomputer as a gaming arithmetic processing device, and are manufactured as, for example, an IC for an amusement chip. The amusement chip IC stores a manufacturer code and a product code in addition to a chip code as individual identification information for individually identifying the IC chip, and can output these codes as a gaming machine ID. is there.

  The RAM 113 is supplied with a backup power source that supplies power even when a power failure occurs (not shown, for example, comprising a large-capacity capacitor), and even if there is a power failure, the necessary power continues to be supplied. The data is held for a predetermined time (predetermined number of days), so that the game control can be performed from the state when the power failure occurs even when the power failure is restored.

The inspection device connection terminal 114 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 10 is connected after the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game shop.
The test firing test terminal 115 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various game information obtained from the CPU 111 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 115 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted in the game control device 54 used in the game store.

  The game control device 54 includes a first starting port switch 120 (starting port 1SW in FIG. 5) for detecting one winning ball at each of the first starting winning ports 25, and the second starting prize. A second starting port switch 121 (starting port 2SW in FIG. 5) for detecting winning balls one by one that detects winning game balls in the mouth 26, and detecting one gaming ball passing through the normal starting gate 28 one by one. A gate switch 122, which is provided for each of the general winning ports 27a to 27d, detects a game ball won in each of the general winning ports 27a to 27d one by one, and a large winning port 29a of the variable winning device 29. Detection signals from the count switch 124, the magnetic sensor 133, the radio wave sensor (board) 134, and the vibration sensor 135 that detect the game balls won in the game are input.

As shown in FIG. 4 described above, in this embodiment, since there are four general winning ports (general winning ports 27a to 27d), four sensors are provided, and the balls that win the general winning ports 27a to 287d are It is detected by the prize opening switches 123a to 123d. These winning opening switches 123a to 123d are collectively referred to as winning opening switch 123 in FIG.
Instead of providing one sensor for each general winning opening, one sensor may be provided for a plurality of general winning openings.
Further, two count switches 124 may be provided, and the game ball that has flowed into the big winning opening of the variable winning device 27 may be detected by any of the count switches 124. By providing a plurality of count switches 124 in this way, it is possible to quickly detect game balls that have flowed into the special winning opening.

  The sensors 120, 121, 122, 123, and 124 for detecting these game balls are proximity switches in this embodiment, and output a negative logic detection signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V. The circuit is configured.

  In addition, when there is a winning at the winning opening, the game control device 54 sends a winning ball number command corresponding to the winning to the payout control device 80. The payout control device 80 performs a process of adding the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning to the number of held balls based on the winning ball number command corresponding to the winning sent from the game control device 54. Further, the game control device 54 performs a process of displaying the number of winning balls corresponding to winning on the winning display device 73 of the collective display device 70 (see FIG. 2) when there is a winning at the winning opening. The information regarding the number of winning balls is also output to the card unit 200 at a predetermined timing, and is output from the card unit 200 to the game store management device 300 for management.

Here, winning a prize opening means all winning a prize outlets with a winning ball discharge (a process of actually paying out a ball or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). , 26, a large winning opening 29a of the variable winning apparatus 29, and general winning openings 27a to 27d.
In the game control device 54, for example, the number of winning balls associated with winning is set as follows. Grand prize opening 29a = 13 pieces. First start winning opening 25 = 3. 2nd start prize opening 26 (Fuden) = 1. General winning ports 27a-27d = 10. Note that the number of winning balls associated with each winning is not limited to this, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the gaming machine.
Specifically, when the game control device 54 has won a winning opening, it determines the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning set as described above, and adds the number of winning balls to the number of possessed balls. A process of transmitting a prize ball number command to the payout control device 80 is performed.

  The magnetic sensor 133 is a sensor that detects that a magnet has approached the pachinko machine 10, and is used to detect fraud caused by the magnet. The radio wave sensor (board) 134 is a sensor that detects the transmission of radio waves related to the game board 20 in particular. For example, a radio wave sensor (board) 134 is used to detect that an illegal radio wave is transmitted to the pachinko machine 10 using a radio wave oscillator or the like. Is. The vibration sensor 135 is a sensor that detects that vibration has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, and is particularly for detecting unauthorized vibration such as shaking the table (or hitting it abnormally).

  The game control device 54 determines fraud based on detection signals from the magnetic sensor 133, the radio wave sensor 134, and the vibration sensor 135, and transmits a fraud occurrence command or the like to the effect control device 53 when it is determined to be fraudulent. Then, processing such as causing the display device 41 to display an error under the control of the effect control device 53 is performed. In addition, the game control device 54 transmits the fraud information to the payout control device 80, and the payout control device 80 transmits the fraud information to the game store management device 300 via the card unit 200.

  Next, the game control device 54 includes, as a necessary device for the progress and production of the game, in addition to the production control device 53, a general electric solenoid 131 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 26 a of the second start winning opening 26, and the variable prize winning device 29. The large winning opening solenoid 132 and the collective display device 70 for opening and closing the opening / closing member 29b are connected.

  The game control device 54 outputs necessary control signals to the ordinary electric solenoid 131, the special prize opening solenoid 132, and the collective display device 70, respectively. Further, data (for example, an effect control command) is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication (or parallel communication).

  Further, from the game control device 54, data (for example, commands required for managing the enclosed balls (for example, prize ball number command)) are serially communicated to the payout control device 80 via the main connection board 91 and the payout connection board 92. Etc.) is transmitted. Here, the main connection board 91 is a board connected to the game control device 54 on the board side (game board 20 side), and is constituted by a drawer connector. The payout connection board 92 is a board connected to the payout control device 80 on the frame side (machine frame 11 side), and is constituted by a drawer connector.

  Next, the configuration of the payout control device 80 and devices connected to the payout control device 80 will be described. The payout control device 80 mainly manages the enclosed balls and the number of balls held, and includes a CPU 81, a ROM 82, a RAM 83, an inspection device connection terminal 84 for the inspection device, a test firing test terminal 85, a launch control circuit 86, An error release switch (error release SW) 87 and an error display LED 88 are provided.

  Such a payout control device 80 is configured to perform control for paying out a prize ball in accordance with a signal (payout control command) from the game control device 54. The payout control device 80 is configured to be communicable with the card unit 200, as will be described in detail later, and thereby configured to transmit information regarding the gaming machine to the card unit 200.

  The CPU 81 executes a predetermined program to perform calculation processing necessary for enclosing ball control, game ball payout (prize ball payout or ball payout) and management of the number of balls held. The ROM 82 stores the program, and the RAM 83 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the program.

  The RAM 83 stores the number of balls possessed as a game value, and more specifically, stores a change in the game value of the player. In this RAM 83, the number of balls held by the player is updated and stored in real time by repeatedly subtracting the launched balls and adding the number of prize balls. Since the subtraction of the fired balls and the addition of the number of prize balls are performed by processing based on the program, the RAM 83 stores real-time changes in the number of balls held.

  In addition, the RAM 83 is supplied with a backup power supply that supplies power even when a power failure occurs (not shown, for example, a capacitor having a large capacity), so that even if there is a power failure, the necessary power continues to be supplied. The data in the RAM 83 is configured to be held for a predetermined time (a predetermined number of days), so that the game control can be performed from the state when the power failure occurs even when the power failure is restored. Note that a nonvolatile memory may be used as the RAM 83 instead of the backup power supply.

  In addition, the payout control device 80 performs processing from launching and collection of the encapsulated ball mainly as control necessary for the encapsulated ball game, and the number of balls held according to the award ball number command from the game control device 54. An addition process, a ball lending control (ball lending addition process), a count of the number of balls, and the like are also performed, and the update result is displayed on the operation display device 60.

  In addition, when the payout control device 80 has won a winning opening, the payout control device 80 adds the number of winning balls to the number of balls held based on the number-of-balls command corresponding to the winning transmitted from the game control device 54. (As described above), for example, when the number of balls held by the player (game value) is continuously changed, the storage of the number of balls held in the RAM 83 is immediately updated. When the number of balls held by the person is displayed, the number of balls held is controlled to be updated at intervals of a predetermined period (for example, 0.3 seconds).

The test firing test terminal 85 is a terminal to which a cable for transmitting various types of information in the control of the enclosed ball and the game ball payout control obtained from the CPU 81 to the inspection device is connected. Note that the test firing test terminal 85 and related parts are used in the test institution and are removed at the time of shipment, and are not mounted on the payout control device 80 used in the amusement store.
The inspection device connection terminal 84 is a terminal to which a cable for the authorities to inspect the pachinko machine 10 is connected after the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game shop.

  The launch control circuit 86 is built in the payout control device 80, and is supplied with necessary power from the payout control device 80 and receives a fire permission signal. The launch control circuit 86 is a game at the launch position in accordance with the operation of the launch volume 171 (see FIG. 1) (that is, the rotational operation of the launch operation handle 18) on condition that the on-data of the launch permission signal is received. A firing solenoid 173 that fires the sphere is controlled. The firing drive source may be constituted by a motor instead of the solenoid. In that case, an origin sensor for detecting the rotational position of the motor is attached.

  In addition, the payout control device 80 receives signals from the touch sensor 174 and the firing stop switch 175. Here, the touch sensor 174 detects whether or not the player is touching the firing operation handle 18 for operating the firing volume 171, and the firing stop switch 175 temporarily stops the firing of the game ball. It is operated by the player. Note that the ball feed solenoid 172 that sends the game ball to the launch position is directly controlled by the payout control device 80. For the control process, a signal from the touch sensor 174 is input to the payout control device 80.

  A device that includes the firing solenoid 173 and launches a game ball at a launch position (not shown) to the game area 22 is referred to as a launch device 34 (see FIG. 3). This launching device 34 is controlled by a payout control device 80 including a launch control circuit 86, and a state where launching of a game ball is permitted by a control process of these control devices (a state where on data of a launch permission signal is set) ) Can only launch game balls.

  In the state where the launch of the game ball is prohibited (the state where the off data of the launch permission signal is set), the game ball is fired even if there is a game ball at the launch position and the player operates the launch operation handle 18 Not. In addition, the launching device 34 has a member called a spear for hitting a game ball in order to launch, and the tip of this spear (the tip) has a launch position.

The error cancel switch (error cancel SW) 87 outputs a signal for canceling the error when operated when there is an error in the payout control process and the process is stopped.
The error display LED 88 lights a specific number according to the content of the error when there is an error in the payout control process.
The RAM clear switch 181 initializes the RAM 113 inside the game control device 54, the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80, and the like.

  The ball removal switch 182 is a switch operated when the ball enclosed in the pachinko machine 10 is extracted to the outside. When the ball removal switch 182 is turned on, the above-described upper passage conversion solenoid 436S is turned on, and the upper passage conversion member 436 opens the upper portion of the bypass passage 404 as shown in FIG. The encapsulated sphere is collected into the collection box 445 through the ball extraction passage 405.

  Next, the payout control device 80 is connected to the number-of-balls display 50, the count switch 36, and the count-ball display 37 in relation to the devices arranged on the lower panel 30, and a detection signal is transmitted between them. An input and a control signal are output. Specifically, for example, in order to display the number of balls to be displayed on the number-of-balls display 50, a drive signal for driving the LED of the number-of-balls display 50 is output and Outputs a signal for lighting the counting ball when it is present.

Here, the information regarding the number of balls is defined as follows.
・ Number of balls: Number of balls that can be fired ・ Number of balls to be counted: Number of stored balls moved from the number of balls held (stored balls that cannot be temporarily fired)
Total number of balls: The total number of balls held by the player, which is represented by the number of balls held + the number of balls counted = the total number of balls held.
-Updated number of balls: Changed number of balls from previous number of balls-Updated number of counted balls: Number of changed balls from the previous number of counted balls. The use of the counting sphere is to use the sphere by moving from the counting sphere number to the holding ball number.
・ Number of stored balls: This is the number of balls that can be replayed after the game on the pachinko machine 10 is completed and the player has stored the total number of balls stored on the membership card. It can be replayed using the number of balls, or prizes can be exchanged. If you move the table, you will play again using the current day's storage, but if you are a guest member, you will not be able to store the ball but simply use the stored ball data recorded on the game card to replay it on another table. Will play. In the case of payment, the total number of balls is written in the game card. At this time, the total number of balls is sent to the card unit 200, and the card unit 200 performs a settlement process.

  In the present embodiment, the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are configured to be managed by the payout control device 80, and these data are stored and held in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80. These data are also sent to the card unit 200 and displayed on the message / operation area 66 (see FIG. 7) of the operation display device 60 under the management of the card unit 200. However, although the number of balls held and the number of balls counted are displayed on the operation display device 60, the payout control device 80 only controls the increase / decrease in the number of balls held and the management of the counting balls stored after counting and moving from the number of balls held. Control. The card unit 200 periodically receives data from the payout control device 80, and displays details of the number of balls held and the number of counted balls on the operation display device 60 based on the received data.

  The number-of-balls display 50 controlled by the payout control device 80 can display six-digit values (number of balls) by arranging six 7-segment LEDs, and the number of balls acquired by the player. The display mode is controlled as follows (details will be described later in the flowchart and explanation of operation). When the number of balls held is zero before the game (before the game card or cash is inserted), the ball number display 50 is turned off. Further, when the number of balls possessed during the game is generated, the number of balls possessed is digitally lit and displayed.

  When the player starts the checkout (when the return button 64 of the operation display device 60 is touched for the end of the game), the checkout process is started and the process of recording the total number of balls in the game card is started. The display on the ball number display 50 moves and blinks. When the recording to the gaming card (writing of the total number of balls) is completed, the display on the number-of-balls display 50 flashes at the same time, and when the gaming card is ejected from the card unit 200, the predetermined time has elapsed. Thus, the number-of-balls display 50 is turned off.

  Note that the display data of the number-of-balls display 50 is backed up by the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80 even during a power failure, and if a power failure occurs while writing the total number of balls to the game card, Based on the backed up data, the display of the number-of-balls display 50 moves and blinks to notify the player that the game card is being written.

  When the writing to the game card is completed, the display on the number-of-balls display 50 blinks simultaneously, and the game card is discharged. In addition, when the power failure occurs when the total number of balls to be written on the game card is completed and the number-of-balls display 50 is flashing simultaneously, recording on the game card has already been completed. Even if it recovers from a power failure, the number of balls held is not displayed and the number of balls held indicator 50 is turned off.

  In the present embodiment, the display device 41 is rendered as follows under the control of the performance control device 53. That is, during the normal game, the display device 41 produces a variation display game with a special decoration. In the event of a power failure during the game, the number-of-balls data, counting ball data, etc. are backed up by the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80 even during the power failure, and the effect data by the display device 41 is also backed up by the RAM 83. ing. In the process of recovering from a power failure, the display device 41 displays an effect “currently recovering from a power failure”. Thereafter, when the power failure recovery is completed, the display device 41 returns to the gaming state before the power failure based on the backup data. Even when the production data is not backed up, the display device 41 displays the production “power failure is being restored” based on the fact that predetermined information is transmitted from the payout control device when the power failure is restored. You may make it do.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the payout control device 80 is configured to control illegal winnings as follows. In other words, the winning balls that have won the winning holes 25, 26, 29a, 27a to 27d of the game board 20 are detected by the first starting port switch 120, the second starting port switch 121, the count switch 124, and the winning port switches 123a to 123d. These detection outputs are managed by the game control device 54.

  Further, the safe ball is detected by a first safe ball detection switch (safe ball detection 1SW) 162 and a second safe ball detection switch (safe ball detection 2SW) 163 arranged in the frame on the back side of the game board 20, These detection outputs are managed by the payout control device 80. Here, the total number of winning balls is the total of the winning numbers detected by the switches 120 to 123a to 123d and 124, and the total number of safe balls is the first safe ball detection switch 162 and the second safe ball detection switch 163. Is the sum of the number of safes detected by, so that the two sums are the same.

  The payout control device 80 receives the winning numbers detected by the respective switches 120 to 123a to 123d and 124 in the information of the winning ball command and transmits them, so that the payout control device 80 receives the received winning numbers. And the total of the winning numbers and the total of the safe numbers detected by the first safe ball detection switch 162 and the second safe ball detection switch 163 are compared, and the difference is a predetermined number (for example, five). If it is above, it will be set as the 1st error mode and processing corresponding to the 1st error mode will be performed.

  The payout control device 80 further sets the second error mode when the difference between the total number of winnings and the total number of safes exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 5) for a predetermined period, Processing corresponding to the error mode is performed. Note that the predetermined number as a reference value for determining the difference between the total number of winnings and the total number of safes is changed to, for example, 10 when a big hit. As a result, it is possible to accurately determine an error and avoid a trouble with a player even in a big hit when the difference between the total number of winnings and the total number of safes is considered to be large.

  Here, as the basis of the error mode processing, the processing corresponding to the first error mode is only error notification, and the processing corresponding to the second error mode is stopping error notification + prize ball addition. Specifically, in the process corresponding to the first error mode, for example, error information is sent from the payout control device 80 to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and the display device 41 or the decoration display LED (board). In 141, an error is displayed. In this way, the player or employee is notified that there is a possibility of fraud.

  Further, error information is sent from the payout control device 80 to the game store management device 300 via the card unit 200. The pachinko machine 10 may not perform error notification, but may perform error notification that can be understood only by the game store in the game store management device 300. As a result, when the employee sees an illegal winning detection by a fishing ball or an error notification (directly confirms the gaming machine in which the error has occurred), the player can deal with the fraud without realizing it.

  Next, in the process corresponding to the second error mode, for example, in addition to error notification, a process of stopping the prize ball addition is performed. Even if there is an illegal prize such as a fishing ball due to the stop of the prize ball addition, the prize ball is not added (that is, the number of possessed balls does not increase), thus preventing fraud. Further, in addition to the error notification process corresponding to the second error mode, that is, the error notification that can be understood only at the gaming store by the gaming store management device 300 as described above, the error notification to the player is also performed. (For example, error information is sent from the payout control device 80 to the effect control device 53 via the game control device 54, and an error is displayed on the screen of the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53, or the decoration display LED (board) 141 is used. Error display). As a result, error notification can be performed quickly and trouble with the player can be avoided.

  Further, the payout control device 80 is connected to the card unit 200 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 so that bidirectional information can be transmitted to the card unit 200. That is, the pachinko machine 10 (game machine) and the card unit 200 (game device) are configured to be able to transmit and receive information related to the game machine. The payout control device 80 controls the number of balls to be displayed on the number-of-balls display 50 or counts the number of balls by the operation of the counting switch 36 and shifts it to the number of counted balls (concept of moving to a so-called ball box). Etc. can also be performed.

  In addition, when the number of balls held is counted and transferred to the counting ball number, the payout control device 80 performs control to turn on the counting ball display 37 by determining that the counting ball number is present. Further, when the counting ball is generated, the payout control device 80 displays a counting ball use button 66a (see FIG. 7) in the message / operation area 66 of the operation display device 60, and the counting ball use button 66a is operated. In this case, the control unit is also configured to perform a control of moving a predetermined amount (for example, 100 balls) from the number of counted balls to the number of held balls by one operation based on a counting ball use command from the card unit 200.

  Here, the transmission of information will be described. As described above, the payout control device 80 is connected to the card unit 200 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and from the card unit 200 at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms). In response to the transmitted information transmission request, the payout control device 80 responds with information (various information from the game control device 54 and various information in the enclosed ball game (various numbers including the number of balls and count balls). Information)) is transmitted at predetermined intervals (for example, 200 ms). The number of balls held and the number of counting balls are configured to transmit the change, and measures against data loss are taken. Further, the various information may be transmitted from the game control device 54 to the card unit 200 instead of from the payout control device 80.

  Furthermore, the card unit 200 is connected to a third-party management institution relay device 310 and a prize exchange device (premium POS) 240 shown in FIG. Therefore, the card unit connection terminal board 52 is used for transmitting information from the payout control device 80 on the pachinko machine 10 side to the amusement store side management device 300, the third party management organization relay device 310, etc. via the card unit 200. Also used. Specifically, various types of information from the game control device 54, control of the enclosed ball, and the control of the enclosed ball via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 from the payout control device 80 and the game store side management device 300 via the card unit 200 While various types of information in the game ball payout control are output, the payout control device 80 passes the card unit connection terminal plate 52, the card unit 200, and the third party management organization relay device 310, to the outside. Various information from the game control device 54 and various information in the control of the enclosed ball and the payout control of the game ball are output to the three-party management organization 320 (corresponding to an external management device).

  Here, as various information (game information in a narrow sense), for example, a signal that informs the signal input to the game control device 54 to the outside, a jackpot signal that informs the jackpot that occurs in the course of the game progress, A starting port signal that informs a winning to the starting port that is a condition, a symbol starts to fluctuate, or a symbol fixed number signal that notifies symbol variation triggered by a symbol fluctuating stop, and the gaming state is in a state advantageous to the player ( There is a privilege state signal or the like indicating a so-called probability variation state or short time state). Information regarding these gaming machines will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, from the information related to these gaming machines (hereinafter also referred to as various information, (in the narrow sense) gaming information as appropriate), the predetermined information to be managed by the gaming store side (the gaming store side management device 300) is selected. It is possible to set. Furthermore, all of these various types of information are also transmitted to an external third party management organization 320 (corresponding to an external management device) via a third party management organization relay device 310 (corresponding to an external management device). The third party management organization 320 performs overall management based on the various information transmitted, and further transmits the received game information to the operation agency 330 (corresponding to the game facility management means) as necessary. Configured to do. The selection or flow of these information will be described later in detail.

  Further, the payout control device 80 outputs information on the number of balls (game value information) and the like to the card unit 200 via the card unit connection terminal plate 52, and information on the number of balls held (game value information) and the like. As one piece of information relating to the gaming machine, the information is also output from the card unit 200 to the external third party management organization 320 via the game store management device 300 and the third party management organization relay device 310.

  Although details of the card unit 200 will be described later, the production assistance information such as the character introduction stored in the image input personal computer 241 (see FIG. 7B) is transmitted to the card unit 200, and the character introduction etc. When the presentation auxiliary information is read and the above-described switching button 67 is operated (touched), presentation auxiliary information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 200 to the operation display device 60 and displayed on the operation display device 60. It is configured.

Next, as a signal from various switches necessary for encapsulated ball control or the like, the payout control device 80 detects one ball at a time that is launched into the game area 22 by operating a launch volume 171 (details will be described later). Specifically, an out-ball detecting switch 160 that detects a ball sent to the launch position), and an out-ball (out) that does not win any winning opening as a result of the game in the game area 22 is detected. Sphere detection switch 161, the first safe sphere detection switch (safe sphere detection 1SW in FIG. 5) 162 and the second safe sphere detection switch (safe sphere detection 2SW in FIG. 5) 163 are arranged in the upper passage 403 as described above. (See FIG. 4) A first enclosing sphere detection switch 164 (in FIG. 5, enclosing sphere detection 1SW) and a second enclosing sphere detection switch 165 (in FIG. 5) for checking the number of encapsulated spheres. Detection signals from inclusion ball detection 2SW) is input. Note that there is no foul ball detection switch.
As a result of the game in the game area 22, the balls collected in the out passage 431 include both out balls and safe balls.

  The payout control device 80 receives detection signals from the switches 160 to 165 and performs processing such as monitoring the behavior of the sphere from launching to collection of the enclosed sphere, checking the maximum and minimum number of encapsulated spheres, and the like. At the same time, control is performed such as processing to add to the number of balls held based on the ball lending information (ball number command) sent from the card unit 200. There is no monitoring of foul balls.

  Further, the payout control device 80 monitors the opening of the glass frame opening switch (glass frame opening SW in FIG. 5) 125 for detecting that the glass frame 13 is opened, the opening of the inner frame 12, and the game control device 54. An inner frame opening switch 126 (inner frame opening SW in FIG. 5) for monitoring the removal of the frame, and a radio wave sensor (frame) 127 for detecting the transmission of radio waves particularly on the frame side of the pachinko machine 10 are connected.

  The inner frame opening switch 126 is configured to hold information that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and at night when requested by the dispensing control device 80 when the main power is turned on. This is a configuration for outputting monitoring information to the outside, and is also referred to as a night monitoring switch. The detailed configuration of the inner frame opening switch 126 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The radio wave sensor (frame) 127 is a sensor that detects unauthorized radio waves to, for example, the payout control device 80 and various sensors installed in the frame. The radio wave sensor (frame) 127 may be one that detects other unauthorized radio waves.

  Next, in relation to the circulation / polishing of the encapsulated sphere and the control of removing the ball, the payout control device 80 polishes the encapsulating sphere (refer to FIG. 4), and the polishing that detects the sphere flowing into the polishing device 406. The inlet switch 421, the polishing motor switch 422 that detects the operation of the polishing motor 412, the lifting device 402 (see FIG. 4), the lifting inlet switch 432, the lifting outlet switch 434, and the like are connected. Although not shown in FIG. 5, the dispensing control device 80 includes a lower passage conversion solenoid 410S of the lower passage conversion member 410 and an upper passage conversion solenoid 436S of the upper passage conversion member 436 shown in FIG. It is connected.

  The detailed configuration of the polishing apparatus 406 is as described in FIG. Although not shown in FIG. 5, the dispensing control device 80 is connected to the polishing cloth motor 423 and the polishing cloth unit switch 424 shown in FIG.

  The lifting device 402 lifts the ball in the lower passage 401 upward, and discharges it to the upper passage 403 via the lifting outlet switch 434. The lifting inlet switch 432 detects a sphere flowing into the lifting device 402. The lifting outlet switch 434 is disposed on the outlet side of the lifting device 402 and detects a sphere discharged from the lifting device 402. Although not shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 80 is connected to the lifting motor 433 and the lifting motor switch 435 shown in FIG. 4 in addition to the components of the lifting device 402.

  Next, the configuration of the effect control device 53 and devices connected to the effect control device 53 will be described. The effect control device 53 includes a main control microcomputer, a video control microcomputer that performs video control exclusively under the control of the main control microcomputer, a VDP as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41, It has a sound source LSI that controls the output of various melody and sound effects, etc., but its detailed configuration is omitted.

  For the control on the board side (game board 20 side), the effect control device 53 analyzes the control command from the CPU 111 of the game control device 54, determines the effect contents, and controls the content of the output video of the display device 41. In addition, control such as driving control of the decoration display LED (panel) 142 described above is executed, and the rendering operation of the rendering agent device 35 is controlled. On the other hand, the production control device 53 controls the frame side (the inner frame 12 and the like) by controlling the drive of the equipment described later via the board production connection board 93 and the frame production connection board 94 having a drawer connector structure. Do.

  Here, the board production connection board 93 is a board connected to the board side (game board 20 side) production control device 53, and is constituted by a drawer connector. Also, the frame effect connection board 94 is a board connected to various devices on the frame side (side of the inner frame 12 or the like), and is constituted by a drawer connector.

  The various devices connected to the frame effect connection board 94 will be described. The frame effect connection board 94 includes the effect operation switch 32, the upper and lower speakers 15, 16a, 16b, and the decoration display LED (via the effect relay board 56 described above. Panel) 141 or the like. Further, as described above, the effect control device main power from the power supply device 55 is supplied to the frame effect connection board 94 via the effect relay board 56, and the effect control device main power supply is a frame having a drawer connector structure. It is the structure supplied to the production | presentation control apparatus 53 through the production connection board 94 for board | substrates, and the production connection board 93 for board | substrates.

  The effect control device 53 analyzes the control command from the CPU 111 of the game control device 54, determines the contents of the effect, instructs the sound source LSI to reproduce the sound, and produces the board effect connection board 93 and the frame effect connection board 94. The upper and lower speakers 15, 16 a, 16 b are driven via the sound to produce sound effects, etc., and the above-described processing such as drive control of the decoration display LED 142 is performed, and the content of the effect is determined according to the signal from the effect operation switch 32 And control the production.

Next, the configuration of the power supply device 55 will be described.
The power supply device 55 generates DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V from the AC power supply, and supplies necessary power to the game control device 54, the effect control device 53, the payout control device 80, and each electronic component shown in FIG. In addition, a power switch 191 is provided. Here, as described above, the power supplied from the power supply device 55 in the pachinko machine 10 during normal time (when power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10) is referred to as a main power supply, and the main power supply includes the game control device 54. The power supply currently supplied to each apparatus of the machine 10, an electronic device, a sensor, etc. is pointed out.

Further, in this embodiment, since each control device 54, 80, etc. has a backup power supply, no backup power is supplied from the power supply 55, but each control device does not have a backup power supply, and the power supply 55 You may comprise so that it may supply from.
The power switch 191 turns on / off the AC power supplied to the power supply device 55 and is used to start and stop the power supply device 55.

Next, the detailed structure of the drawer connector will be described with reference to FIG.
As described above, the main connection board 91 and the payout connection board 92, the board effect connection board 93, and the frame effect connection board 94 are each electrically connected by a drawer connector structure.

  FIG. 6A is a diagram showing the arrangement of the main connection board 91 and the board effect connection board 93 having a drawer connector structure on the back side of the game board 20. 6 (a) and 6 (b), on the back side of the game board 20, as shown in the figure, an effect control device 53 is arranged on the upper side, and a game control device 54 is arranged on the lower side (FIG. 3). reference). A main connection board 91 having a drawer connector structure and a board effect connection board 93 are arranged side by side on the lower side of the game control device 54.

  The main connection board 91 is connected to the game control device 54 via the cable 105, and the concave drawer connector 95 of the main connection board 91 is fitted and connected to the convex drawer connector 92 a of the payout connection board 92. The payout connection board 92 is connected to the payout control device 80. Therefore, the main connection board 91 is connected to the payout control device 80 via the payout connection board 92 as the frame side board. Thereby, the game control device 53 and the payout control device 80 are connected via the main connection board 91 and the payout connection board 92 having a drawer connector structure.

  On the other hand, the board production connection board 93 is connected to the production control device 53 via the cable 106, and the concave drawer connector 93a of the board production connection board 93 is a frame production connection board 94 as a frame side board. The frame effect connection board 94 is connected to the effect relay board 56 by being fitted to and connected to the convex drawer connector 94a. Therefore, the board effect connection board 93 is connected to the effect relay board 56 via the frame effect connection board 94 as the frame side board. Thereby, the effect control device 54 and the effect relay board 56 are connected via the board effect connection board 93 and the frame effect connection board 94 having a drawer connector structure.

  Next, FIG. 6B is a diagram showing the front shape of the drawer connector structure of the main connection board 91 and the payout connection board 92, the board effect connection board 93 and the frame effect connection board 94. In FIG. 6B, the main connection board 91 as the game board side board is provided with a concave drawer connector 91a and a connector 91b. Here, the connector 91b is connected to the game control device 54 via the cable 105 (see FIG. 6A). On the other hand, the payout connection board 92 as the frame side board is provided with a convex drawer connector 92a and a connector 92b. The connector 92b is connected to the payout control device 80 via the cable 105a (see FIG. 6A).

  Further, a board-side effect connection board 93 as a game board side board is provided with a concave drawer connector 93a and a connector 93b. The connector 93b is connected to the effect control device 53 via the cable 106 (see FIG. 6A). On the other hand, on the frame effect connection board 94 as the frame side board, a convex drawer connector 94a and a connector 94b are arranged. The connector 94b is connected to the effect relay board 56 via a cable 106a (see FIG. 6A). For example, a right angle type connector is used as the connector 91b to the connector 94b.

  Specifically, the game board 20 is inserted into the frame side, and is set at a predetermined position so that the side opposite to the insertion side is pressed against the frame side. By doing so, the convex drawer connector of the payout connection board 92 and the concave drawer connector of the main connection board 91 are fitted, and the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 are connected. The same applies to the connection between the board effect connection board 93 and the frame effect connection board 94.

  That is, if the game board 20 is inserted into the frame side and set at a predetermined position so as to press the opposite side to the frame side, the convex drawer connector 94a of the frame effect connection board 94 as the frame side board The board side effect connection board 93 as the game board side board is engaged with the concave side drawer connector 93a, and the board side effect control device 53 and the frame side effect relay board 56 are connected.

  Further, when removing the game board, if the game board 20 is removed from a predetermined position of the frame, the connection between the convex drawer connector of the payout connection board 92 and the concave drawer connector of the main connection board 91 is released. At the same time, the connection between the convex drawer connector of the frame effect connection board 94 and the concave drawer connector of the board effect connection board 93 is released.

  That is, if the game board 20 is removed from a predetermined position of the frame, the convex drawer connector 94a of the frame effect connection board 94 as the frame side board and the concave side drawer connector of the board effect connection board 93 as the game board side board. The fitting with 93a is released, and the connection between the board-side effect control device 53 and the frame-side effect relay board 56 can be automatically disconnected. In this case, since power from the backup power supply 116 (that is, backup power) is supplied to the RAM 113 of the game control device 54, the stored data in the RAM 113 is retained even when the game board 20 is removed, and there is a possibility that the data may be lost. Absent.

Next, the positional relationship between the main connection board 91 and the board effect connection board 93 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 6 (a), the game control device 54 on the board side and the payout control device 80 on the frame side are connected via a main connection board 91 and a payout connection board 92 having a drawer connector structure. The effect control device 53 and the effect relay board 56 on the frame side are configured to be connected via a board effect connection board 93 and a frame effect connection board 94 having a drawer connector structure. Various devices on the side (for example, the production operation switch 32, the upper and lower speakers 15, 16a, 16b, the decoration display LED 142, and the cable from the power supply device 55 (the cable for supplying the production control device main power to the production control device 53) are connected. It is the composition which is done.

  Further, the disconnection monitoring power source from the inner frame opening switch 126 for monitoring the removal of the game control device 54 is supplied from the payout control device 80 to the game control device 54 via the payout connection board 92 and the main connection board 91 of the drawer connector structure. The game control device 54 is configured to return to the payout control device 80 via the main connection board 91 and the payout connection board 92 having a drawer connector structure.

  Here, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6A, an effect control device 53 is arranged on the upper side of the back surface of the game board 20, and a game control device 54 is arranged on the lower side thereof, and the game board. The main connection board 91 of the drawer connector structure as the side board and the board effect connection board 93 of the drawer connector structure as the game board side board are arranged close to each other and arranged below the game control device 54 in the vertical direction. And the main connection board 91 is configured to be disposed above the board effect connection board 93.

  The main connection board 91 and the game control device 54 are connected by a cable 105, and the connection form on the game control device 54 side of the cable 105 is the main connection board 91 in the connector group 107 of the game control device 564. It is configured to be connected to the connector 107a arranged at the closest position. Therefore, the wiring (cable 105) between the game control device 54 and the main connection board 91 can be shortened, and the wiring cost in the game board 20 can be reduced.

Next, details of the operation display device 60 will be described.
The operation display device 60 is configured by a liquid crystal display with a touch panel that can be operated by a player touching the touch panel with a finger, and is directly connected to the card unit 200 by a harness. As shown in FIG. 7A, on the screen of the operation display device 60, a ball rental rate display 61 for displaying the ball rental rate, and a remaining amount display 62 for displaying the remaining amount of a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card). , A ball lending button 63, a return button 64, a storage / replay button 65, a message / operation area 66, a switching button 67, a break button 68, and a holding ball display button 69 are arranged.

  Here, the ball lending rate display 61 displays a ball lending rate when lending game balls from the card unit 200. For example, when lending one ball for 4 yen, the display “ball lending: 4 yen for one ball” is displayed. In addition, when lending a ball for 1 yen, the display “ball lending: 1 yen per ball” is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to lend a ball at a rate of 4 yen per ball or 1 yen per ball.

  The remaining amount display device 62 displays the remaining amount of a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card). For example, the remaining amount is displayed in units of 1 yen such as “5000 yen” as the remaining amount. The ball lending button 63 is operated when the player desires a predetermined number of ball lending. Further, the return button 64 is operated when the player simply returns a game card (including a prepaid card (for example, a visitor card)) before the game, and when he / she returns the card after settlement (game end).

The store / replay button 65 stores a ball acquired by a player using a member card unique to a game store called a house card, or uses a ball stored in a member card. In addition to replaying, the number of balls that have moved on the table (which is handled in the same way as the number of stored balls) is used.
The message / operation area 66 displays the details of the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls, in addition to the member having a membership card entering a password or displaying a business message when storing and replaying balls. For example, it is configured to be capable of performing analog display using a figure that looks like a ball box.

  The switch button 67 is operated when switching information to be displayed on the message / operation area 66 of the operation display device 60. Based on this operation (touch), presentation assistance information such as character introduction is transmitted from the card unit 200 to the operation display device 60 and displayed on the operation display device 60. When the switching button 67 is not operated (touched), a normal operation screen based on the operation of the ball lending button 63, the return button 64, the storage / replay button 65, and the like is displayed.

  The break button 68 is operated when the player desires a break. When the break button 68 is pressed, the total number of balls (the number of balls held + the number of balls counted) is displayed in the message / operation area 66. The ball holding button 69 is operated when the player desires to display the number of balls, and lights up when the number of balls can be displayed.

  The counting ball use button 66a is operated when the player desires to move the ball from the counting ball number to the holding ball number. When the counting ball use button 66a is operated once, movement of a ball (for example, a predetermined amount = 100 balls) from the counting ball number to the number of possessed balls is started. In other words, the counting ball use button 66a corresponds to the concept of a switch used for starting an operation such as moving a ball from a ball box to an upper plate. The counting ball use button 66a lights up when the ball can be moved from the counting ball number to the holding ball number.

  When the number of balls is adjusted by the operation display device 60 described above, the operation is started by operating the return button 64. That is, when the player presses the return button 64, the card unit 200 transmits a payment instruction to the payout control device 80 in order to start the payment. When the payout control device 80 receives the payment instruction, it sends the total number of balls (number of balls held + number of balls counted) data to the card unit 200, and the card unit 200 stores the total number of balls data in the game card. Record and discharge.

  Next, when the card unit 200 finishes recording the total number-of-balls data for the game card, the card unit 200 notifies the payout control device 80 to that effect, and the payout control device 80 stores it (for example, stores it in a predetermined area of the RAM 83). Clear the data such as the number of holding balls, the number of counting balls, etc., the settlement ends, and the game card is returned.

  The card unit 200 records the total number of balls data on the game card, but the payout control device 80 stores data such as the number of balls held and the number of balls counted until the game card is recorded. Therefore, the management of the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls is not transferred to the card unit 200. The operation display device 60 is arranged on the pachinko machine 10, but ball rental, storage, settlement (recording processing to the above-mentioned card), replay, return of a game card, etc. are controlled and performed by the card unit 200. Managed.

  Next, a case controlled and managed by the card unit 200 will be described. For example, when starting a game, when a player lends a ball with cash, first, the player inserts a 1000 yen banknote into the cash slot 202 of the card unit 200. Then, in the card unit 200, a cash insertion of 1000 yen = a prepaid card issuance of 1000 yen is made, and the ball lending number corresponding to the amount of the inserted banknote is displayed in the message / operation area 66. Thereafter, when the player operates the ball lending button 63, a ball lending addition process is performed within the range of the ball lending degree displayed in the message / operation area 66, and the increased lending as a result of this ball lending addition process is performed. The number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 50.

  In this case, from the operation display device 60 installed on the gaming machine side, ball rental button operation information is sent to the card unit 200 via the harness, and in response to this, the card unit 200 sends the pachinko machine 10 (payout control device 80). ) Ball lending instruction (addition instruction to the number of balls held). Further, when the addition process by the ball lending operation is completed, the payout control device 80 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card based on a signal output from the card unit 200 via the harness.

  On the other hand, if the player wishes to lend a ball within the frequency range of a game card (including a prepaid card (eg, a visitor card)), the player inserts the game card into the card slot 201 of the card unit 200. The number of ball lending remaining on the game card is displayed in the message / operation area 66. Next, when the player operates the ball lending button 63 of the message / operation area 66, the ball lending (increase in the number of balls held) of a predetermined frequency within the range of the valuable value information (ball lending number) recorded on the game card. ) Is performed, and the number of balls lending is displayed on the number-of-balls display 50. In this case, not only the number of balls lent is displayed on the number-of-balls display 50, but the number of balls lent is added to the number of balls held before, and the total number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 50. Is displayed. Therefore, when the previous number of balls held = 0, only the number of balls lent is displayed on the number of balls held display 50.

  Further, when the player desires to use the stored ball within the range of the number of stored balls recorded on the game card, the player inserts the game card into the card slot 201 of the card unit 200, and the message / operation area section When the member's personal identification number is entered on the screen 66, the number of stored balls remaining in the game card is displayed in the message / operation area 66. Next, when the player operates the storage / replay button 65 of the message / operation area 66, within the range of the number of stored balls recorded on the game card, Increase) and the number of used balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 50. In this case, the total number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 50 so that the number of used balls from the stored ball is added to the previous number of balls.

  Further, when the game is to be ended, the settlement process is performed by touching the return button 64 as described above, and the game card in which the total number of balls is recorded is ejected from the card unit 200. Therefore, the player holds the discharged game card and inserts it into the prize exchange device 240, so that the player can pay for the prize exchange device 240 (for example, the prize exchange receipt is discharged and can be exchanged for a prize at the counter in the hall). . When the break button 68 is pressed, the game card is ejected, and the gaming machine is in a state where it cannot play. At this time, the break button 68 is lit to inform that the break is possible.

Next, the control system of the card unit 200 will be described with reference to FIG.
In FIG. 7B, an image input personal computer 241 is connected to the card unit 200, and the image input personal computer 241 includes a USB memory terminal and a DVD device (not shown). The production assistance information such as the character introduction is stored in a storage medium such as a USB memory, and these storage media are attached to the image input personal computer 241 to be accessible. Then, the attached storage medium is accessed, and the production assistance information is read by the image input personal computer 241 and temporarily stored in the internal RAM or the like. When the storage of the production assistance information is completed, the storage medium such as the USB memory is removed from the image input personal computer 241.

  The production assistance information stored in the image input personal computer 241 can be transmitted to the card unit 200. When the model of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the image input personal computer 241 is connected to the card unit 200 and the card unit 200 inputs the image. This is done by reading production assistance information stored in the personal computer 241. The read production assistance information is stored in the card unit 200. In addition, the card unit 200 can retain the saved production assistance information even when the power is turned off when the amusement store is closed or when a power failure occurs. In FIG.7 (b), the flow of the data in the case of storing production assistance information in the card unit 200 is shown by the arrow of display data.

  The card unit 200 is directly connected to the operation display device 60 via a harness, and display data (including production assistance information in addition to various data such as ball lending relationship, storage / replay, etc.) is displayed from the card unit 200. It is transmitted to the operation display device 60. From the operation display device 60, switching information based on touch information of various buttons and operation of the switching button 67 is transmitted to the card unit 200. When the switching button 67 is operated (touched), the production assistance information is transmitted from the card unit 200 to the operation display device 60 and displayed on the operation display device 60.

  On the other hand, the production control device 53 is connected to the display device 41, and the display data is output from the production control device 53 to the display device 41. The display device 41 displays the production of the special game based on the display data. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the production control device 53 is not connected to the operation display device 60, and there is no switching circuit for switching the connection between the production control device 53 and the operation display device 60. Therefore, all the production assistance information is transmitted to the operation display device 60 via the card unit 200.

  For example, when the player touches the switching button 67, the production assistance information is transmitted from the card unit 200 to the operation display device 60 and displayed on the operation display device 60. Specifically, when the player touches the switching button 67, the model name of the pachinko machine 10 and the game description are displayed in the message / operation area 66 of the operation display device 60. For example, “CRXXXXX” is displayed as the model name, and “High probability until hitting 100 special charts after big hit” is displayed as the game description.

  In this state, when the switching button 67 is touched again, the switching button 67 is configured to switch only display / non-display (non-display) of the production auxiliary information on the operation display device 60. Therefore, from the display screen of the production auxiliary information Return to normal screen display again. In addition, when switching to the screen for model name and game description, all screens may be used for introduction of model name and game description, but display of ball rental relationship may be necessary during game, Even if the screen is switched to a screen for explaining the model name or the game description, a configuration for leaving a ball rental display on a part of the screen may be used. In addition, when there is no need for a big hit middle ball rental, the ball rental relationship display may be turned off.

  Next, the configuration of encrypted communication and backup power supply between the payout control device 80, the game control device 54, and the card unit 200 will be described with reference to FIG. The configuration shown in FIG. 8 does not represent all the circuits as shown in FIG. 5 described above, but only the components related to encrypted communication and backup power supply. As shown in FIG. 8, the power supply device 55 includes a main power supply generation circuit 192, a power failure monitoring circuit 193, and the power switch 191 described above.

  Here, the main power supply generation circuit 192 generates a main power supply, uses a commercial AC power supply (for example, AC100V) as an input power supply, generates a DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V, etc. from this input power supply, and performs payout control. In addition to being supplied to the device 80, main power is supplied to the game control device 54 via the payout control device 80. On the other hand, power necessary for the effect control device 53 and each electronic component other than the game control device 54 is supplied from the power supply device 55.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 193 monitors whether or not a commercial AC power supply (for example, AC 100V) has dropped below a predetermined voltage. When the power supply monitoring circuit 193 drops below a predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 193 determines that a power failure has occurred and outputs a power failure detection signal. Output to. The power switch 191 is as described above.

  The payout control device 80 includes a backup power source 183 and a RAM clear switch 181, and the backup power source 183 is composed of a large capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source 183 is supplied to the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80 so that the data stored in the RAM 83 is retained even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. In the payout control device 80, for example, a nonvolatile memory may be used as the RAM 83 instead of the backup power source 183.

  In the payout control device 80, when the RAM clear switch 181 is turned on (in actual operation, the power switch 191 is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 181), the RAM 83 in the payout control device 80 is initialized. At the same time, a RAM clear signal is output to the game control device 54. The payout control device 80 is supplied with main power from the power supply device 55, and this main power supply is used for each part of the circuit of the payout control device 80 and also supplied to the game control device 54.

  Furthermore, when a power failure detection signal is input from the power supply device 55, the payout control device 80 determines that a power failure has occurred and performs processing necessary for the power failure (for example, data storage). Further, the payout control device 80 outputs the input power failure monitoring signal to the game control device 54. In addition, the payout control device 80 outputs a game stop signal to the game control device 54 when a communication abnormality such as disconnection of communication with the game control device or with the card unit 200 occurs. Based on this, the game control device performs a process of stopping the game. On the other hand, when the communication is restored, the payout control device 80 recovers data that could not be communicated by the recovery process.

  Also, the payout control device 80 is supplied with the disconnection monitoring power from the backup power supply 151 of the inner frame opening switch 126 as described above, and this disconnection monitoring power supply passes through the payout control device 80 and the game control device. 54. Then, a route in which the current from the disconnection monitoring power source supplied from the backup power supply 151 is loop-connected as the payout control device 80 → the game control device 54 → the payout control device 80 → the inner frame opening switch 126 (that is, the disconnection monitoring route) ), It is determined that the route is not disconnected, and the inner frame opening switch 126 does not count the number of disconnections (including removal of the game control device 54), and the disconnection count storage means 155 (described later) The disconnection count is not stored according to FIG.

  On the other hand, when the current from the disconnection monitoring power source supplied from the backup power source 151 does not flow through the disconnection monitoring route, it is determined that the route is disconnected, and the inner frame opening switch 126 is disconnected (the game control device 54). The number of disconnections is stored by the disconnection number storage means 155.

  The game control device 54 includes a backup power source 116, and the backup power source 116 is configured by a large capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source 116 is mounted on the same board as the board on which the CPU 111 of the game control device 54 is mounted. The power from the backup power source 116 is supplied to the RAM 113 of the game control device 54, and the data stored in the RAM 113 is retained even during a power failure or after the power is shut off.

  In addition, when the RAM clear signal is input from the payout control device 80, the game control device 54 performs processing for initializing the RAM 113 and the like. Furthermore, when a power failure detection signal is input from the payout control device 80, the game control device 54 determines that a power failure has occurred and performs processing necessary for the power failure (for example, data storage).

  Here, in this embodiment, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 are connected via the main connection board 91 and the payout connection board 92 having a drawer connector structure. Main power from the power supply device 55 is supplied from the payout control device 80 to the game control device 54 through the payout connection board 92, and a power failure detection signal, a RAM clear signal, and a game stop signal are sent from the payout control device 80 to the game control device 54. Sent.

  Note that the encrypted communication described later has a different configuration from the two-way communication, but the above-described main power supply, power failure detection signal, RAM clear signal, and game stop signal transmission are indicated by arrows in FIG. , In a single direction (a direction in which the payout control device 80 transmits the game control device 54). Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the main power supply, power failure detection signal, RAM clear signal, and game stop signal transmission are routed differently from encrypted communication (two-way encrypted communication) described later (for example, And a separate communication (including supply) route for each main power supply, power failure detection signal, RAM clear signal, and game stop signal.

  Therefore, even if a communication abnormality occurs in the bidirectional encrypted communication between the payout control device 80 and the game control device 54, the supply of the main power, the power failure detection signal, the RAM clear signal, and the game stop signal are all bidirectional. Transmission (including supply) can be performed from the payout control device 80 to the game control device 54 through a route different from the encrypted communication.

  In addition, information by bidirectional encrypted communication is transmitted between the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 via the main connection board 91 and the payout connection board 92 having the drawer connector structure, and the disconnection monitoring power supply Are connected in a loop that flows from the payout control device 80 through the game control device 54 to the payout control device 80 again.

  Here, the disconnection monitoring power supply is a loop in which the current of the backup power supply 151 in the inner frame opening switch 126 is as follows: the payout control device 80 → the game control device 54 → the payout control device 80 → the inner frame open switch 126. It is a power source for determining whether or not the game control device 54 is removed by determining whether or not the route is connected. When the current of the backup power supply 151 does not flow through this route, it is detected that the game control device 54 is removed because the route is disconnected.

  The card unit 200 includes a backup power source 251 and an RTC (real time clock) 252. Here, the backup power source 371 is constituted by a large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply 371 is supplied to a RAM or the like inside the card unit 200, and the data stored in the RAM or the like is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The RTC 372 counts real time and provides information such as date and time. The card unit 200 performs real time such as ball lending with a gaming card and storage processing of the number of balls based on information from the RTC 252. Processing such as recording is performed.

Furthermore, the detail of the structure relevant to the game stop at the time of communication abnormality is demonstrated.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, the payout control device 80 periodically performs bidirectional encrypted communication with the game control device 54, and also periodically with the card unit 200. This is a configuration for performing two-way encrypted communication. In addition, when the payout control device 80 detects an abnormality in bidirectional encrypted communication with the game control device 54 or the card unit 200, the payout control device 80 immediately performs a process of stopping the launch of the game ball, and the bidirectional encryption described above. A game stop signal is transmitted to the game control device 54 by a single direction communication other than the communication to instruct the game stop.

  The game control device 54 is configured to stop winning prize monitoring, special game, and ordinary game processing after a predetermined period from the reception of the game stop signal. Therefore, even if the bi-directional encrypted communication with the game control device 54 and the card unit 200 is abnormal, the payout control device 80 performs the game control device by unidirectional communication different from the bi-directional encrypted communication. Since the game stop signal can be transmitted to 54 to instruct the game stop, the security can be increased.

  In addition, when the payout control device 80 detects a communication abnormality in the two-way encrypted communication with the game control device 54 and the card unit 200, the payout control device 54 immediately stops the launch of the game ball. Since the winning monitoring, special game, and ordinary game processing are stopped after a predetermined period from the reception of the game, the floating ball winning can be relieved. Further, when the game control device 54 receives the game stop signal from the payout control device 80, the game control device 54 stops winning prize monitoring, special figure game, and ordinary game processing, but other processing is continuously executed, so communication is abnormal. Even so, security can be increased because the frame opening and other errors can be monitored.

  Next, the output conditions of the gaming machine ID will be described based on FIG. Regarding the output of the gaming machine ID, it is desirable to provide the following output conditions. As described above, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 of the pachinko machine 10 have a main control ID and a payout control ID that can individually identify each IC chip. The main control ID is shown in the figure. The main ID and the payout control ID are abbreviated as payout IDs in the figure. In addition, the main control ID and the payout control ID may be collectively referred to as a gaming machine ID.

  FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an output condition of the gaming machine ID, and FIG. 9A shows a block configuration in the case of outputting the main control ID (in the figure, the main ID; the same applies hereinafter) from the game control device 54. FIG. When the main control ID is output from the game control device 54, the main ID is output only when requested from the payout control device 80 by predetermined encrypted communication. Here, the encrypted communication is encrypted communication using the encryption key A and the encryption key X, which will be described later. The encryption key A is provided in advance in each device (the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80), and the encryption key X is set as a different encryption key for each stand after the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game store. Is done.

As shown in the upper part of FIG. 9A, when the ID request is output from the payout control device 80 to the game control device 54 by encrypted communication, the game control device 54 sends the main ID to the payout control device by encrypted communication. Output to 80.
On the other hand, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 9A, when the ID request is output from the payout control device 80 to the game control device 54 in plain text, the game control device 54 does not output the main ID to the payout control device 80. . Even if the ID request is not plaintext and the ID request is made by encrypted communication using an unknown encryption key other than the specified encryption keys A and X, the game control device 54 issues the main ID. Do not output to 80.

  As described above, as an output condition of the ID from the game control device 54, the game control device 54 receives an ID from the payout control device 80 by encrypted communication using the predetermined encryption key A or encryption key X. ID is output, but ID is not output when requested by other communication (plaintext or the like). Therefore, security can be improved.

Next, conditions for outputting an ID from the payout control device 80 will be described.
FIG. 9B is a diagram showing a block configuration when an ID (in this case, a main ID and a payout ID) is output from the payout control device 80. Here, when outputting the ID (main ID and payout ID) from the payout control device 80, first, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 9B, the payout control device 80 is connected to the game control device 54. It is a prerequisite.

  As other conditions, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 9B, when an ID request is output from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 by predetermined encrypted communication, the payout control device 80 determines the main ID. The payout ID is output to the card unit 200 by encrypted communication. On the other hand, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 9B, if the payout control device 80 is not connected to the game control device 54, an ID request is sent from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 by a predetermined encrypted communication. Even if it is output, the payout control device 80 does not output the main ID and the payout ID to the card unit 200.

  Similarly, as shown in FIG. 9C, even when the payout control device 80 is connected to the game control device 54, the ID request from the card unit 200 is not in encrypted communication but in plain text. Even in the case of a plain text ID request, the payout control device 80 does not output the main ID and the payout ID to the card unit 200. Even when the ID request is not plaintext and the ID request is made by encrypted communication using an unknown encryption key other than the specified encryption keys A and X, the payout control device 80 sets the main ID and the payout ID. Does not output to the card unit 200.

  In this way, as an output condition of the ID from the payout control device 80, the payout control device 80 satisfies the condition for connection with the game control device 54, and the payout control device 80 determines a predetermined encryption from the card unit 200. When an ID is requested by encrypted communication using the key A or the encryption key X, an ID (main ID and payout ID) is output. When requested by other communication (plain text or the like), an ID (main ID) is output. And payout ID) are not output. Therefore, security can be improved. In particular, since the payout control device 80 does not output the gaming machine ID unless it is connected to the gaming control device 54, for example, when the gaming control device 54 is illegally removed, the gaming machine ID is not output, and the game Unauthorized removal of the control device 54 can also be handled.

  Next, a detailed configuration of the inner frame opening switch 126 (denoted as inner frame opening SW in FIG. 10) will be described based on FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the inner frame opening switch 126 includes a backup power source 151, a frame opening detecting unit 152, a disconnection detecting unit 153, a frame opening number storage unit 154, a disconnection number storage unit 155, and an output unit 156.

  Here, the main power to the inner frame opening switch 126 is supplied from the dispensing control device 80, and the inner frame opening switch 126 is normally operated by the main power. On the other hand, the inner frame opening switch 126 is provided with a backup power supply 151 and is operated by the backup power supply 151 when the supply of the main power supply is cut off. As the backup power source 151, for example, a primary battery is used. The primary battery is a battery that can only discharge DC power, and is a battery other than the secondary battery. For example, a dry battery is used.

The backup power supply 151 supplies power to the frame opening detection unit 152, the disconnection detection unit 153, the frame opening number storage unit 154, and the disconnection number storage unit 155 when the main power is off.
In addition, the backup power supply 151 is configured to flow a current through a route connected in a loop such as the payout control device 80 → the game control device 54 → the payout control device 80 → the inner frame opening switch 126. When the disconnection of the route is detected by the disconnection detection means 153, it is possible to detect that the game control device 54 has been removed.

  The monitoring function of the inner frame opening switch 126 is as follows. First, as monitoring of the opening of the inner frame 12, the frame opening detecting means 152 outputs information (frame opening information) indicating whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 has been detected. Next, as a monitoring of the removal of the game control device 54, the disconnection detection means 153 is connected in a loop so that the current of the backup power supply 151 is a payout control device 80 → the game control device 54 → the payout control device 80 → the inner frame opening switch 126. If the route is flowing, it is detected that the route is not disconnected and the game control device 54 is not removed. On the other hand, when the current of the backup power supply 151 does not flow through this route, it is detected that the game control device 54 has been removed because the route is disconnected.

  The disconnection state detected by the disconnection detecting means 153 includes the route when the route is disconnected (when the game control device 54 is disconnected) and when the game control device 54 is disconnected. There are two cases in which a disconnection occurs, and the disconnection detection means 153 can detect both of these two states, but does not distinguish between them. Therefore, the disconnection information detected by the disconnection detection means 153 includes the removal state of the game control device 54.

  Thus, the disconnection detecting means 153 determines whether the game control device 54 has been removed by detecting whether or not the route is disconnected, and monitors the removal of the game control device 54. . The detection information of the disconnection detecting means 153 is game control device monitoring information as described above, and this is information indicating whether or not the main frame (game control device 54) has been detected by the inner frame opening switch 126. The disconnection detecting means 153 can monitor the removal of the game control device 54 when the main power is supplied and when the main power is off.

  The frame opening number storage means 154 stores and holds monitoring information (frame opening information) of the inner frame 12 by the frame opening detection means 152. As storage information of the frame opening number storage means 154, opening information of the inner frame 12 and the number of times the inner frame 12 has been opened are stored. In particular, the frame opening number storage means 154 is supplied with backup power from the backup power supply 151 when the main power is off, so that the stored information can be held when the main power is off.

  In addition, the disconnection count storage unit 155 stores and holds the disconnection information (including the removal state of the game control device 54) by the disconnection detection unit 153. As stored information of the disconnection count storage means 155, disconnection information (including the removal state of the game control device 54) and disconnection count (including the number of disconnections of the game control device 54) are stored. In particular, the disconnection count storage means 155 is supplied with backup power from the backup power supply 151 when the main power is off, so that the stored information can be held when the main power is off.

  The monitoring information (frame opening information) of the inner frame 12 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 by the disconnection detection means 153 are output without delay in normal time (when the main power is supplied), and each monitoring information is output immediately. This is a configuration that is output to the payout control device 80 by 156. On the other hand, when the main power is turned off at night or the like, each monitoring information is stored and held by the frame opening number storage means 154 and the disconnection number storage means 155, and each monitoring information stored when the main power is turned on such as when the amusement store is opened. Is configured to be output to the payout control device 80 by the output means 156 when there is a request for night monitoring information from the payout control device 80.

  Note that the monitoring information (frame opening information) of the inner frame 12 and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 are more specifically, the monitoring information (frame opening information) of the inner frame 12 is the presence / absence of the opening of the inner frame 12. It is a concept that includes the number of releases. Therefore, the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 includes a route in which the current of the backup power supply 151 is connected in a loop such as the payout control device 80 → the game control device 54 → the payout control device 80 → the inner frame opening switch 126 (hereinafter, disconnection). This is a concept including the presence / absence of disconnection of the route and the number of disconnections in the case of flowing through the monitoring route). For convenience of explanation, information including these detailed contents is used as monitoring information (frame Release information) and removal monitoring information of the game control device 54.

  The output form of each monitoring information is as follows. First, while the inner frame 12 is closed, the output of the frame opening detection means 152 is turned on. On the other hand, while the inner frame 12 is open, the output of the frame open detection means 152 is off. For example, “on” means an H level signal, and “off” means an L level signal.

  When the disconnection monitoring route is not disconnected (including a state where the game control device 54 is not removed), the output of the disconnection detecting means 153 is turned on. On the other hand, when the disconnection monitoring route is disconnected (including the state in which the game control device 54 is removed), the output of the disconnection detecting means 153 is turned off. For example, “on” means an H level signal, and “off” means an L level signal. The frame opening detection means 152 detects not only the opening of the inner frame 12 but also the opening of the glass frame 13, for example, and detects opening information of the glass frame 13 (information including opening and non-opening). You may make it memorize | store in the frame open frequency storage means 154. FIG.

  The output unit 156 outputs the information monitored by the frame opening detection unit 152 and the disconnection detection unit 153 in the inner frame opening switch 126 to the dispensing control device 80 without delay at normal time (when the main power is supplied). On the other hand, the output means 156 receives the frame opening information and disconnection information monitored by the inner frame opening switch 126 at night when the main power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, that is, night monitoring information from the payout control device 80. Only when there is a request for night monitoring information to the inner frame opening switch 126, in response to this request, the night monitoring information stored in the frame opening number storage means 154 and the disconnection number storage means 155 is sent out. Output to 80.

  The payout control device 80 determines the unauthorized level from the night monitoring information, and outputs the determined unauthorized level to the card unit 200. Here, as the contents of the illegal level, for example, a plurality of levels are determined in advance depending on combinations of whether the inner frame 12 is opened, whether there is a disconnection due to the removal of the game control device 54, and how many times the inner frame 12 is opened. It is what Here, the night monitoring information is included in the aforementioned “information regarding gaming machines”.

  As the night monitoring information output timing, for example, the payout control device 80 outputs a night monitoring information request to the inner frame opening switch 126 when the main power is turned on (when turned on), and responds to this request. When the night monitoring information is received from the inner frame opening switch 126, the unauthorized level is determined from the received information, the determined unauthorized level is stored in the RAM 83, and then transmitted to the card unit 200. Then, when receiving the release information from the inner frame release switch 126, the payout control device 80 stores the release information in the RAM 83 and then transmits it to the card unit 200.

  Next, an overall outline of the game management system 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 shows a system configuration applied to an amusement shop where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of this embodiment are installed. As shown in FIG. 11, the game management system 1 is constructed so as to include an in-store network in a game store. In addition to a plurality of pachinko machines 10 and card units 200, the game store manages these games. Management device (hall computer) 300, which is a management device for a game, a third party management institution relay device 310 corresponding to a predetermined medium for communicating with an external management device, a prize exchange device (in FIG. 11, a prize POS) ) 240 is installed. In addition, a third party management organization 320 corresponding to an external management device, an operation agency company 330 corresponding to a gaming facility management means, and a gaming machine manufacturer 340 exist outside the gaming store.

  The card unit 200 can communicate with an external third-party management organization 320 via a third-party management organization relay device 310 via a communication line such as a telephone line (for example, a digital line such as ISDN) or the Internet. It is connected to the. Further, the third party management organization 320 is connected so as to be able to receive information from the gaming machine manufacturer 340 and is connected so as to be able to transmit information to the operation agency 330. Furthermore, the game store management device 300 is connected so as to be able to receive information from the operation agency 330. The overall system configuration is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 11. For example, a card management device and a ball management device are installed in the game store separately from the game store management device 300. Also good.

  In the game store, the pachinko machines 10 are connected to the corresponding card units 200 on a one-to-one basis, and the card units 200 are periodically provided from the pachinko machines 10 that form a pair, and the number of balls and the various game information described above. In addition, it is configured to receive information related to the gaming machine including the frame opening information and the like (hereinafter referred to as “various game information” for convenience). The card unit 200 is connected to the game store management device 300 via a communication line constructed in the game store, and the game information selected at the game store is used as a predetermined signal, as will be described in detail later. The data is converted and output to the game store management device 300.

  In addition, the card unit 200 is configured to output various game information from the pachinko machine 10 to the third party management institution relay device 310 connected to the third party management institution 320. Here, all the game information is output from the card unit 200 to the third party management organization relay device 310 (third party management organization 320). It may be set to output only information. In short, the amusement store side selects and transmits predetermined information when it wishes to perform operation management, or transmits only information instructed by the third party management organization 320 or the operation agency 330. It is conceivable.

The game store management device 300 is generally installed in a game room management room, connected to each card unit 200 via an information transmission path, and from each pachinko machine 10 via each card unit 200. Are connected to a prize exchange device 240 via an information transmission path, collect prize related information from the prize exchange device 240, organize these data, and manage the sales of the game shop. Is.
In addition, the game store management device 300 receives necessary data from the operation agency 330 and organizes data corresponding to various gaming states, displays the organized data on a display display, and stores data necessary for sales. It is configured to perform arithmetic processing.

  The third party management organization relay device 310 outputs all the various game information output from the card unit 200 to the external third party management organization 320. Here, when the third party management organization relay device 310 is configured as a mere relay, the card unit 200 is set to output as encrypted information at the time of outputting various game information. In the case where information collected by the institution relay device 310 is stored and managed, the third party management institution relay device 310 is set so that the information is encrypted again and output to the third party management institution.

  The prize exchange device 240 performs processing for exchanging with a prize desired by the player based on the number of balls held by the game card. For example, an employee of the game shop operates the prize exchange device 240 to play the player. Give the gift to. In the gift exchange device 240, in the case of a membership card, it is also possible to perform storage processing in which the number of balls held is exchanged and recorded. The prize related information here may also be included in the information related to the gaming machine in a broad sense.

  When a prize is exchanged by the prize exchange device 240, or when the prize is stored, the prize exchange device 240 transmits the card ID of the game card and the number of balls stored in the game card to the game store management device 300. The game store side management device 300 collates the received card ID and the number of balls possessed with the card ID and the number of balls possessed stored in the number-of-balls-for-cards file. If the game store management device 300 sends the result of collation to the prize exchange device 240 as correct / incorrect information, the received prize exchange device 240 can know the correctness of the number of balls stored in the game card.

The third party management organization 320 is installed outside the amusement store, and the third party management organization management apparatus 321 (see FIG. 12) installed in the third party management organization 320 relays the third party management organization. In addition to receiving various game information from the apparatus 310, it also receives various prize-related information from the prize exchange apparatus 240 and outputs various necessary information to the operation agency 330.
The gaming machine manufacturer 340 is a manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 10. The management server installed in this gaming machine manufacturer 91 has a function of outputting predetermined information (such as a main control ID described later) regarding the pachinko machine 10.

  The management agency 330 manages the amusement store based on various information (game related, prize related, etc.) from the third party management organization 320 (third party management organization management device 321), and further requests from the amusement store. Various processes corresponding to the above are performed. If the management by the operation agency 330 is not required at the amusement store, the management at the third party management organization 320 is mainly executed, and the amusement store side management device 300 selects the necessary information. Is obtained from the card unit 200. Here, the game store management apparatus 300 can select or set which information is acquired in advance as appropriate.

  When management by the operation agency 330 is required in the amusement store, the operation agency 330 manages or operates the amusement store based on various game information from the third party management organization 320. For example, appropriate advice or the like is output for the minimum information to be grasped at an amusement store, for the management of employees, and for information related to appropriate prizes. As a result, at the amusement store, even if details about the management or operation of the pachinko machine 10 cannot be grasped, the management agency 330 can be left with basic management.

  Next, information output from the card unit 200 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 shows an outline of the flow of various information output from the card unit 200. The card unit 200 is connected to the payout control device 80 on the pachinko machine 10 side via the card unit connection terminal plate 52 (see FIG. 5) described above, and controls various game information and the enclosed ball from the game control device 54. Various information from the pachinko machine 10 side, such as various information in the payout control of the game ball, various information in the control of the enclosed ball from the payout control device 80 and the payout control of the game ball and information on the number of possessed balls (game value information) It is configured to receive information.

The card unit 200 includes a CU control unit 210 (card unit control board), a communication control unit 211, an external information terminal board 212, a display control unit 213, and a security board 214 as main components of the control system. These constituent elements are supplied with necessary power from a power supply device 55 (see FIG. 5).
The CU control unit 210 executes programs for various operations of the card unit 200 (including game information and game value information management), and performs necessary arithmetic processing. A RAM, an input / output interface, and the like are provided.

  Here, the CU control unit 210 also controls display contents for various operations on the operation display device 60 via a display control unit 213 to be described later, for example, for selecting predetermined information from various game information. The display control is also executed. Therefore, the CU control unit 210 constitutes “game device side selection means” that can select the predetermined information on the card unit 200 side, but the means for actual operation is the operation display device 60 (or later described). 87 is a display input device 205) shown in FIG. Therefore, the CU control unit 210 and the operation display device 60 correspond to “game device side selection means”.

  The RAM (not shown) in the CU control unit 210 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the program, and in particular, is common to all information received from the pachinko machine 10 side. A storage area for storing game information and a storage area for storing predetermined game information selected from the common game information based on an operation by the game device selection means are also included. The RAM is provided with a backup power supply (not shown, for example, consisting of a large-capacitance capacitor) that supplies power even in the event of a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure within the continuous time, the RAM data is retained.

The CU control unit 210 is connected to the third party management institution relay device 310 via the communication control unit 211, and is connected to the game store side management device 300 via the external information terminal board 212.
The communication control unit 211 connects the card unit 200 to the third party management organization relay device 310 in the amusement store, and sends various information from the pachinko machine 10 side via the card unit 200 to the third party management organization. It is used for outputting to the relay device 310 by serial communication or the like. Here, various information includes game ball number information, fraud information, authentication related information, game state information, and the like, which will be described in detail later.

The external information terminal board 212 connects the card unit 200 to the game store management device 300 in the game store, and manages various information from the pachinko machine 10 side via the card unit 200. It is used for outputting to the apparatus 300 by serial communication or the like. Here, various information includes predetermined game information, authentication result information, and the like selected on the basis of an operation by the gaming apparatus side selection means, which will be described in detail later.
The external information terminal board 212 constitutes, together with the communication control unit 211, “information output means” that outputs information related to the gaming machine.

  The display control unit 213 controls various display contents on the operation display device 60 based on a control command output from the CU control unit 210. As described above, the operation display device 60 is a part of the configuration of the card unit 200. However, a touch panel display input device 205 (see FIG. 88), and a similar operation can be realized by a touch operation on the display input device. The display contents of the operation display device 60 based on the control of the display control unit 213 will be described in detail later.

  The security board 214 is used for authentication of the card unit 200, and includes a communication control IC 215 and a security chip 216. The communication control IC 215 controls communication for outputting information stored in the security chip 216 to the CU control unit 210. The security chip 216 stores a manufacturer code and a product code in addition to a chip code as individual identification information capable of individually identifying the chip, and these codes can be output by the communication control IC 215 as a card unit ID. ing.

  The game store management device 300 collects predetermined game information and authentication result information selected from all information received by the card unit 200 from the pachinko machine 10 as described above. Also, as described above, the amusement store management device 300 is managed at the amusement store according to the management or response from the external management agency 330 (providing management information of the pachinko machine 10, employee management information, etc.). It performs the necessary management. Although not shown, the amusement store management device 300 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input / output interface and the like, a display for displaying various information, an input means such as a keyboard for performing various input operations, A printer for printing output is connected.

Here, the CPU of the game store side management device 300 constitutes “management device side selection means” for selecting predetermined game information from all the information received by the card unit 200, but it is actually operated. The means is the keyboard. Therefore, the CPU and keyboard of the game shop management device 300 correspond to “management device selection means”.
That is, the selection of game information can be operated not only on the card unit 200 side but also on the game store management device 300.

In addition, the storage means such as RAM included in the game store management device 300 includes the storage area for storing common game information, which is all information received from the pachinko machine 10 side, and the common game information. It also includes a storage area for storing predetermined game information selected based on the operation by the management device side selection means in association with the card unit No (ID).
The storage means included in the amusement store management apparatus 300 is also provided with a backup power source that supplies power even in the event of a power failure, and the time during which this backup power source can continue to supply the necessary power even if there is a power failure. If the power is restored from the power failure, the data in the storage means is retained.

As described above, the third-party management organization relay device 310 outputs all game information output from the card unit 200 to the external third-party management organization 320. As a main component of the control system, A control processing unit 311, an input port 312, and a network communication port 313 are provided.
The input port 312 inputs all game information output from the communication control unit 211 of the card unit 200.

The control processing unit 311 executes various processes relating to the input game information. For example, when the information collected by the third party management organization relay device 310 is stored and managed, the control processing unit 311 includes a storage area for that purpose. In addition, a process for re-encrypting the information is executed.
The network communication port 313 is connected to a third party management organization management apparatus 321 of the third party management organization 320 outside via a communication line, and the information processed by the control processing unit 210 as needed is stored in the network communication port 313. This is transmitted to the three-party management organization management device 321.

The third-party management organization management device 321 receives all game information transmitted from the network communication port 230 and receives information related to the gaming machine transmitted from the gaming machine maker 340 (management server) side. is there. The third party management organization management device 321 performs monitoring related to the pachinko machine 10 or the amusement shop based on the collected information.
Further, the third party management organization management device 321 is configured to transmit game information, authentication-related information, etc. in a narrow sense, which will be described later, among the collected information to the operation agency 330.

  The management agency 330 executes management or response for the game store based on the game information, the authentication related information, etc. transmitted from the third party management organization management device 321. Specifically, for example, the management information of the pachinko machine 10 and the employee management information that are required in the amusement store are transmitted to the amusement store side management device 300. In the amusement shop, information provided from the operation agency 330 can be referred to as needed on a display or the like in the management apparatus 90 on the shop side.

  Therefore, the operation agency 330 (the management server in the management agency) includes a CPU that receives information from the third party management organization management device 321, stores and displays it, and performs analysis (calculation) based on the information. Furthermore, it is configured to include a transmission means for transmitting these analysis results to the game store management device 300.

  In addition, the management agency 330 obtains information on fraud (such as opening a frame) from the card unit 200 via the third-party management organization 320, obtains employee information, correlates and confirms them, As an instruction means, employee management may be performed so that employees who act illegally can be detected.

  Next, an outline of the game performed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment and the flow of the game will be described. The pachinko machine 10 is in a customer waiting state (during demonstration) at the beginning of the game (or before the game starts), and a command for instructing the display of the customer waiting screen is sent from the game control device 54 to the effect control device. 53, and the display screen 41a of the display device 41 displays a customer waiting screen (moving image or still image).

  When the player inserts, for example, a game card into the card unit 200 and performs a ball lending operation with a predetermined unit frequency (for example, pressing the ball lending button 63 of the operation display device 60 once), a predetermined number of balls The number (for example, 125) is added and displayed on the ball holding number display 50 of the lower panel 30. At this time, the ball lending number data (valuable value information) of the game card is reduced by the predetermined number (for example, five degrees corresponding to 500 yen). As described above, the number of balls possessed corresponds to the game value that is the profit of the player, and the data on the number of balls possessed is stored in the RAM 83 in the payout control device 80, for example.

  2, when the player operates the firing operation handle 18 in FIG. 2, the game ball at the firing position is thrown into the game area 22 via the guide rail 21 and is thrown. When the game ball wins the special drawing start winning opening 25 or 26 (that is, when there is a special drawing start winning), the collective display device 70 displays the variation of the special drawing 1 or the special drawing 2 as shown in FIG. Then, a command for instructing the variable display of the decoration special figure is transmitted from the game control apparatus 54 to the effect control apparatus 53, and the decoration special figure (consisting of numbers, characters, symbols, patterns, etc.) changes (for example, scrolling) on the display screen 41a. ) Display (so-called fluctuation display) is performed, and a special figure fluctuation display game (hereinafter referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game) is performed.

  In addition, the ball that has been removed without winning a prize flows into the out-ball inlet 23. The ball that has fallen on the game area 22 becomes out or safe. After passing through the game area 22, it flows down the out path 431 of the circulation path shown in FIG. It will be lifted and circulated and will be guided to the launch position again. In this manner, the pachinko game is performed by circulating the enclosed game balls.

  If the stop result mode (a combination of special maps derived by the variable display) described above is a special result mode (for example, “3, 3, 3”, etc.), a privilege called a big hit is given. It is given to the player. In terms of control, for example, a value such as a big hit random number is extracted and stored on the condition that there has been a start prize, and this extracted and stored random number value is compared with a predetermined determination value at the time of determination. Based on the comparison determination result, whether or not to make a big hit is determined in advance, and the variable display game is started in response to this determination.

  Further, if the stop result mode of the variable display game is a specific mode of the special result mode (for example, “7, 7, 7”), it will be the big hit and after the big hit game (a special prize period to be described later) Later, the game state shifts from the normal mode to the probability change mode. In this probability variation mode, control is performed to increase the probability that the special figure will be a big hit (hereinafter referred to as the special figure big hit probability). In some cases, the above-described time-short state control is also performed.

  When the jackpot is reached and the jackpot state is reached, a fanfare period (a period in which an output of a sound effect that produces a jackpot is executed) is passed, and the jackpot of the variable prize winning device 29 is set for a specified time (for example, Within a range not exceeding (30 seconds), for example, an opening operation (a big hit round) that is temporarily opened for a period of up to 10 winnings is performed. This release operation is repeated for a specified number of rounds. In this jackpot state, a command for instructing display of a jackpot screen for directing the jackpot state or informing the player of the number of rounds of jackpot is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 for display. On the screen 41a, such a big hit display is executed.

  The period in which the jackpot is in effect (the fanfare period, the period of the jackpot round in which the jackpot is open, the interval period between the jackpot round and the next jackpot round, and the ending period) are the special prize period. It corresponds to. Here, as the number of big hits, for example, a big hit of 15 rounds is usually the main big hit, but a configuration of generating a 16R big hit as a premier or other configurations may be used. Further, there may be a two-round big hit or the like as a so-called surprise (a sudden probability change in which the big hit probability changes via a big hit with a small number of balls).

Further, when a game ball is further won in the start winning opening 25 or 26 during the special figure variation display game or a big hit, the special display start memory is suspended on the display screen 41a or the like, for example, up to four. After the special figure fluctuation display game or the big hit state is stored, the special figure fluctuation display game is repeated or returned to the customer waiting state based on the start memory.
In other words, if the variable display game ends with a big hit, the game shifts to a big hit state, and if the variable display game ends with a start and the start memory is stored, the variable display game is executed again, and the variable display game ends with a start and no start memory is stored. If the big hit ends and there is a start memory, the variable display game is executed again. If the big hit ends and there is no start memory, the flow returns to the customer wait state.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the special figure start memory (special figure start memory) is displayed in two types (special figure 1 hold display and special figure 2 hold display). Two types of variation display games (a first variation display game and a second variation display game) are executed. That is, when a special figure start prize (first start prize) due to the game ball entering the first start prize opening 25 occurs, the display device 41 plays the first variation display game by the variation display of the special figure 1. When a game ball wins the first start winning opening 25 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one first start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 1 hold display) is stored. Thus, after the special figure fluctuation display game is finished, the first fluctuation display game by the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed on the display device 41.

  When a special figure start prize (second start prize) due to the game ball entering the second start prize opening 26 is generated, a second variation display game based on the variation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41. Then, when a game ball wins the second start winning opening 26 during any special figure variation display game or the like, one second start memory (start memory corresponding to the special figure 2 hold display) is stored. Thus, after the special figure fluctuation display game is finished, the second fluctuation display game by the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is performed on the display device 41.

When both the first start memory and the second start memory are present, either the first variation display game or the second variation display game is executed first in accordance with a preset rule. For example, a mode in which the second variable display game corresponding to the second start winning opening 26 is preferentially performed (that is, a mode in which the second start memory is preferentially consumed), or two types of variable display games are alternately displayed. There may be a mode or the like to be performed.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the usual figure starting gate 28 during the game, the above-mentioned usual figure variation display game is performed. Since this ordinary map display game has been described above, the description thereof is omitted here.

  Here, when it is determined that the game ball is safe and the number of balls held by the player is increased, the ball enters the winning opening (including the general winning holes 27a to 27d and the starting winning holes 25, 26, etc.). In addition, when a big hit occurs and shifts to the big win state, the bonus winning port 29a of the variable winning device 29 is temporarily limited to, for example, 10 winnings within a range not exceeding a specified time (for example, 30 seconds). The player wins a large number of winnings by repeating the jackpot round that is released at a predetermined number of rounds.

  In this case, all the winning balls associated with winning are displayed by the winning display LED 73 in the collective display device 70. The winning here is all winnings that involve winning ball discharge (a process of actually paying out a ball or adding to the number of balls in the case of an enclosed ball type). , 26, a large winning opening 29a of the variable winning apparatus 29, and general winning openings 27a to 27d. Even if a game ball wins in any of these winning holes, a predetermined time (1 second in the normal mode, 0.5 second in the special mode) is immediately displayed by the winning display LED 73 consisting of two 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the player can easily know where on the game board 20 the prize is won and how many winning balls are obtained. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that does not lower the interest of the game.

The player's number of balls can be determined by managing the payout control device 80 to display the number of balls held by the player, and the card unit 200 to display the number of balls held by the player. It can be displayed on both the message / operation area 66 of the display device 60.
In this case, various information (various information including the number of balls) of the pachinko machine 10 is periodically sent from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200 (for example, every 200 ms). The number of players' balls (game value) can also be displayed on the message / operation area 66 of the operation display device 60 under management. The number of balls held by the player is always digitally displayed on the number-of-balls display 50. Thereby, the player can grasp | ascertain the number of balls.

  On the other hand, the message / operation area portion 66 of the operation display device 60 is a liquid crystal display larger than the number-of-balls display 50, and the number of balls held in the message / operation area portion 66 is displayed in an analog form as a figure that looks like a ball box. The For example, if the number of balls held by the player increases as the big hits continue, the figure that looks like a ball box is displayed as an analog such as two boxes, three boxes,. As a result, when the player has a large number of balls, the player can display the number of balls in the message / operation area 66 in an analogy with a figure that looks like a ball box. Can be done.

Next, if the player wants to count the number of balls to be counted, that is, in the case of a game machine with a method of paying out with real balls, the acquired number of balls is outside the gaming machine. If you want to do the same thing electronically as the work of physically moving to the ball box, you can do it as follows.
When the player's number of balls is displayed on the number-of-balls display 50, when the count switch 36 disposed on the lower panel 30 of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed to sequentially count the number of balls, The counted number of held balls becomes the number of counted balls and is held and managed by the payout control device 80.

  However, the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are periodically sent from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200 (for example, every 200 ms), whereby the operation display device 60 under the management of the card unit 200 Displayed on the screen of the message / operation area 66 is a digital display (numerals) of the number of counting balls and an analog display (analog display using a figure that looks like a ball box). Similarly, the player's number of balls displayed on the number-of-balls display 50 is displayed on the screen of the message / operation area 66 of the operation display device 60 as an analog display (analog with a figure that looks like a ball box). Display) or an explanation of the number of balls held.

  In this embodiment, an inner frame opening switch 126 is provided, and the inner frame opening switch 126 can detect both that the inner frame 12 is opened and that the game control device 54 is removed ( Specifically, it includes the frame opening detection means 152 and the disconnection detection means 153) shown in FIG. 10, and the information that the opening of the inner frame 12 is detected is shown in a state where the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off by the frame opening number storage means 154. However, the information that the game control device 54 has been removed is held even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off by the disconnection count storage means 155. The operation of the glass frame opening switch 125 for detecting the opening of the glass frame 13 may be the same, and the operation of the inner frame opening switch 126 will be described below as a representative.

  The frame opening number storage unit 154 stores the opening information of the inner frame 12 and the number of times the inner frame 12 has been opened, and the disconnection number storage unit 155 stores the disconnection information (disconnection state of the game control device 54) by the disconnection detection unit 153. Is stored). Therefore, particularly when the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is opened at night when the amusement store is closed, the opening information of the inner frame 12 and the number of times the inner frame 12 is opened are stored in the frame opening number storage means 154. Is held by. The inner frame release switch 126 can detect both the state in which the inner frame 12 is opened and the state in which the inner frame 12 is not opened. As described above, the inner frame release switch 126 is detected by the inner frame 12. The detection signal monitored is referred to as frame opening information.

  In addition, when the game store is closed at night and the game control device 54 of the pachinko machine 10 is removed, the disconnection number storage means 155 holds information on the removal of the game control device 54 even at night. Yes. The inner frame opening switch 126 can detect both the state where the game control device 54 has been removed and the state where the game control device 54 has not been removed. As described above, the inner frame opening switch 126 can be detected. The detection signal for monitoring the removal of the game control device 54 is referred to as game control device monitoring information.

  For convenience of explanation, the output monitored to detect both the state in which the inner frame 12 is opened by the inner frame opening switch 126 and the state in which the inner frame 12 is not opened is called frame opening information. The output monitored to detect both the state where the game control device 54 is removed and the state where it is not removed by the frame opening switch 126 is referred to as game control device monitoring information (nighttime monitoring information).

  The next morning, when the pachinko machine 10 is activated by turning on the power (turning on the main power), the frame opening information that monitors whether the inner frame 12 is opened at night and the game control device that monitors whether the game control device 54 is removed The monitoring information is output to the payout control device 80 by the output means 156 of the inner frame opening switch 126 when there is a request for night monitoring information from the payout control device 80.

  At this time, the payout control device 80 takes in the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information by issuing a request for the night monitoring information to the inner frame opening switch 126 after the startup preparation period at the time of activation elapses. There is no fear that it will not occur, the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information can be surely captured, and security against fraud is improved. Then, the payout control device 80 determines an unauthorized level from the night monitoring information captured from the inner frame opening switch 126, outputs the determined unauthorized level to the card unit 200, and if there is an unauthorized operation, the card unit 200 reports an error. Is done.

  The payout control device 80 can determine the fraud level from the nighttime monitoring information fetched from the inner frame opening switch 126, so that the number of frame opening times and the number of disconnections can be grasped in detail, and security can be improved. Further, since the payout control device 80 determines the fraud level from the night monitoring information fetched from the inner frame opening switch 126 and outputs the fraud level to the card unit 200, the payout control device 80 starts from a stand with a high fraud level (a stand with a high possibility of fraud). It is possible to inspect preferentially and it is efficient.

  On the other hand, when an employee of the game store turns on the RAM clear switch 181 to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state in preparation for opening the store, the RAM 113 inside the game control device 54, the RAM 83 inside the payout control device 80, and the like. It will be initialized. In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 181 is turned on, the RAM 83 in the payout control device 80 is initialized and cleared, and then the frame opening information and game of the inner frame opening switch 126 are cleared. Control device monitoring information is taken into the payout control device 80 and stored in the RAM 83.

  Thereafter, the payout control device 80 determines the fraud level from the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information stored in the RAM 83, and the determined fraud level is output to the card unit 200. Therefore, there is no problem that the frame opening information and the game control device monitoring information in the RAM 83 are erased by turning on the RAM clear switch 181. The information stored in the RAM 83 is cleared only because the information before the frame opening information of the inner frame opening switch 126 and the game control device monitoring information are taken into the payout control device 80 are only stored.

  Thus, at night when the amusement store is closed, for example, when a suspicious person opens the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 and attaches an illegal board or the like, the inner frame opening switch 126 causes the inner frame 12 to be closed. Open state is detected, and the frame open information is retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. Even when the game control device 54 is removed at night, the state of the game control device 54 is detected by the inner frame opening switch 126, and the game control device monitoring information is displayed even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off. Is retained.

  The next morning, when the main power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the frame opening information for monitoring whether the inner frame 12 is opened at night and the game control device monitoring information for monitoring whether the game control device 54 is removed are the payout control device. When there is a request for night monitoring information from 80, it is output to the dispensing control device 80 by the output means 156 of the inner frame opening switch 126. The payout control device 80 determines an unauthorized level from the night monitoring information fetched from the inner frame opening switch 126, and the determined unauthorized level is output to the card unit 200.

In the card unit 200, an error notification is made based on the fraud level, or error information is output to the game store management device 300 (and ball lending may not be performed). Also, if the inner frame 12 is illegally released and frame opening information is generated, or the game control device 54 is removed and game control device monitoring information is generated, those error states are displayed on the display device 41. The
Therefore, when the employee sees the error notification of the display device 41 or the card unit 200, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected, and for example, an appropriate measure for the attachment of the illegal substrate or the like (for example, removal and normal inspection of the illegal substrate or the like) ) And security against fraud can be improved.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the polishing device 406 is operated to polish the encapsulated sphere with a predetermined period of time when the power is turned on, and the encapsulated sphere is polished. Polishing is also the basic control. This is because the encapsulated sphere is polished well, and therefore the encapsulated sphere is polished while being circulated during the game.

  Specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, when the encapsulated sphere flows into the polishing device 406 without circulating the game area 22 and circulates the ball, the upper passage 403, the bypass passage 404, the lower passage 401, The encapsulated sphere flows from the passage 401 through the lower passage converting member 410 through the polishing inlet passage 419 and flows into the polishing apparatus 406 to polish the sphere, and is then lifted by the lifting apparatus 402 through the lower passage 401. Then, the encapsulated sphere circulates along the path leading to the upper passage 403. Since the encapsulated sphere circulates while polishing the encapsulated sphere without performing a game game, this path is “in encapsulated sphere polishing and circulation”.

  On the other hand, when the encapsulated sphere is polished during the game with the encapsulated sphere, the encapsulated sphere is dropped into the game area 22 and flows into the polishing device 406 to polish the ball. Through the launching device 34, the game area 22, the out passage 431, and the lower passage 401, the encapsulated sphere flows from the lower passage 401 through the lower passage conversion member 410 and flows into the polishing device 406 through the polishing inlet passage 419. After that, the route passes through the lower passage 401 and is transported by the lifting device 402 to the upper passage 403, and the game is played in a circulating manner while the encapsulated sphere is being polished. . This path is “being encapsulated ball polishing game circulation” because the encapsulated ball falls while playing the game game and circulates while polishing the encapsulated ball.

  Further, in the present embodiment, control for illegal winning is performed. Specifically, the winning balls that have won the winning holes 25, 26, 29a, 27a to 27d of the game board 20 are the first starting port switch 120, the second starting port switch 121, the count switch 124, and the winning port switches 123a to 123a. These detection outputs are managed by the game control device 54. Further, the safe ball is detected by the first safe ball detection switch 162 and the second safe ball detection switch 163 arranged in the frame on the back side of the game board 20, and these detection outputs are managed by the payout control device 80. The

  Here, the safe ball means that when a game ball (that is, a winning ball) that has passed through each of the winning holes 25, 26, 29a, 27a to 27d becomes a safe ball and is discharged from the game board 20, It is a concept about a sphere detected as a safe sphere. The total number of winning balls is the total of the winning numbers detected by the switches 120 to 123a to 123d and 124. The total number of safe balls is determined by the first safe ball detection switch 162 and the second safe ball detection switch 163. This is the total number of safes detected.

Next, the control contents of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIGS.
With reference to FIG. 13, a description will be given of the main process that is started based on the fact that the CPU 111 (see FIG. 5) is forcibly reset in the game control device 54. After the power switch 191 (see FIG. 5) of the power supply device 55 is turned on and a reset signal is input from the power supply device 55 to the game control device 54, the CPU 111 is activated when the reset signal is released. After starting up the CPU 111, interrupts are prohibited (step A101), the peripheral circuits of the CPU 111 are initialized (step A102), off data is output to all output ports (step A103), and then access to the RAM 113 is permitted. (Step A104).

  Thereafter, the RAM clear switch 182 (see FIG. 5) provided in the payout control device 80 is operated to determine whether or not the RAM clear signal is on for the game control device 54 (step A105). . If the RAM clear signal is on (Y in step A105), the process jumps to step A113, and if not (N in step A105), the process proceeds to step A106.

  If the RAM clear signal is not on (N in Step A105), it is checked in Step A106 whether all the values in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 113 are normal check data (Step A106). If it is determined that the check result is not normal (N in Step A106), the process jumps to Step A113. On the other hand, if it is determined that the check result in step A106 is normal (Y in step A106), the process proceeds to subsequent step A107.

  In step A107, the checksum of the RAM 113 is calculated, and in step A108, it is checked whether it matches the checksum at the time of power-off, and it is determined whether the value matches, that is, whether it is normal. If the checksums do not match (if the data in the RAM 113 is not normal) (N in Step A108), the process proceeds to Step A113, and if the checksums match (if the data in the RAM 113 is normal), (Y in step A108), the process proceeds to step A109.

  In step A109, initial value setting for power failure recovery is executed. Areas to be initialized in this process (areas where initial values are saved) include, for example, power failure recovery inspection areas 1 and 2, test signal area gaming machine error status signal, power-off checksum area, error scan counter (internal Frame status monitoring scan counter), glass frame opening monitoring area, inner frame opening monitoring area, overflow monitoring area, payout abnormality monitoring area, switch 1 and 2 abnormality monitoring area, and in addition, a lower large prize opening illegal winning monitoring area, There are an upper prize winning fraud monitoring area, an electric power fraud monitoring area, a magnetic fraud monitoring area, an electric wave fraud monitoring area, an extra prize fraud monitoring information 1 and 2, an electric power fraud monitoring information, and the like.

  After step A109, it is determined in step A110 whether or not the gaming state at the time of power-off is a high probability state. If the probability is not high (N in Step A110), the process jumps to Step A117. If the probability is high (Y in step A110), a high probability notification flag is set in step A111, and a high probability notification LED (not shown) provided in the batch display device 70 is turned on (lit) in step A112. The data is saved in the segment area, the process proceeds to Step A117, and the processes after Step A117 are executed.

  On the other hand, when the process jumps from step A105, step A106, or step A108 to step A113, in step A113, a process for canceling the protection of the access prohibited area is performed to enable access. Next, after all the RAM areas are cleared to 0 in step A114, protection of the access prohibited area is set in step A115. Next, in step A116, initial values are set in areas where initial values need to be set.

In Step A114 here, the area that needs to be set to an initial value that is not the written value (0) (area to be initialized) is, for example, the setting of the customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo area and the production mode. An effect mode command area, an effect mode command, a next mode transition information area, a next mode transition information, and a special game mode information command in the relevant area.
In step A116, a main control ID transmission request flag is set as one of initial value settings.

  Then, after step A110, step A112, and step A116, the process proceeds to subsequent step A117. In step A117, it is determined whether authentication is completed. In this authentication work, both the main control ID and the payout control ID of the gaming machine ID are sent to the card unit 200 via the payout control device 80 and sent to the third party management organization 320 outside, where the preregistered authentication is made. It is checked against the list to determine whether or not the check result is OK (if the check is OK, authentication is completed).

  If the authentication is not completed (verification is OK) (N in step A117), the process waits for completion in step A117. If the authentication is not completed within a predetermined time, problems such as communication abnormality or error It is also possible to end the process on the assumption that this has occurred, or to perform a predetermined error occurrence process. If authentication is completed (verification is OK) (Y in step A117), the process proceeds to step A118. In step A118, it is determined whether or not recovery from communication abnormality or the like is completed. If the recovery is not completed (N in Step A118), the process returns to Step A117 to repeat the loop. If the recovery is completed (Y in Step A118), the process proceeds to Step A119.

When the process proceeds to step A119, a game state information transmission process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then the process proceeds to step A120, where the main control ID transmission process is performed.
Next, in step A121, it is determined whether the power failure has been recovered. If the power is not restored (that is, if the RAM is cleared) (N in Step A121), the process proceeds to Step A122, and the command at the time of RAM clear is transmitted to the effect control device 53. The effect control device 53 that has received this can cause the display device 41 to perform an effect such as a customer waiting demonstration. After step A122, the process proceeds to step A124.

  On the other hand, if the power failure is restored in step A121 (that is, if the RAM is not cleared) (Y in step A121), the process proceeds to step A123, and the power failure restoration command corresponding to the state of the pachinko machine 10 ( A power failure recovery command) is transmitted to the effect control device 53. After step A123, the process proceeds to step A124. Here, the command at the time of power failure recovery includes, for example, a model designation command indicating the type of the pachinko machine 10, a decorative special figure 1 holding number command and a decorative special figure 2 holding number command indicating the number of holdings of the special figures 1 and 2, probability Probability information command indicating the state of is included.

Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, for example, if the recovery screen command is waiting for the customer when the power is turned off A customer waiting demo command, a power-on command when initialized at power-on, a production mode information command indicating the state of the production mode depending on the model, and a short-time information command indicating the number of remaining games in the short-time state are included.
The presentation control device 53 that has received this performs initialization such as setting the operation position of the motor of the frame presentation device to the initial position, and displays on the display device 41 that the power failure is being restored.

  The command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the state at the time of power failure (game state, rest state, settlement state). For example, if there is a power outage during a break, the power outage recovery command includes information indicating that the user was taking a break (for example, the same command as the break start command) may be received at the time of power outage recovery. The effect control device 53 resumes the display on the display device 41 that notifies the break during the power failure, for example, after the power failure is restored.

  In addition, when there is a power failure during settlement, information indicating that settlement is in progress is included in this power failure recovery command, and the presentation control device 53 that has received this command at the time of power failure recovery, for example, executes at the time of power failure The display on the display device 41 for informing the settlement being performed is resumed as it is after the power failure recovery. Accordingly, the player can clearly recognize that the state at the time of the power failure is stored in the RAM 113 and the state is resumed at the time of the power failure recovery, and the player does not feel uneasy at the time of the power failure recovery.

  Further, the command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) includes error information in the case of a frame open error state, and the presentation control device 53 that received this command at the time of power failure recovery, for example, at the time of power failure The display on the display device 41 that reports the frame open error state that has been executed is resumed after the power failure is restored.

After proceeding to step A124 via step A122 and step A123, in step A124, after starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit which is a circuit for timer interruption, a process for starting and setting a random number generation circuit in step A125 is performed. Do.
Here, as the random numbers related to the special figure, the big hit random number (random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit), the big hit symbol random number 1, 2 (random number for determining the big hit stop symbol), the fluctuation pattern random number (reach) Random number for determining a fluctuation pattern including presence / absence of a stop pattern), stop symbol random number (random number for determining an outlier stop symbol), and the like.

  In addition, examples of random numbers related to ordinary maps include random numbers per ordinary figure (random numbers for determining whether or not per ordinary figure). Among these, the random numbers targeted in Steps A125 and 128 are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, and jackpot symbol random numbers 1 and 2. In addition, when there are two types of special drawings, the random numbers related to the special drawings may be common to the special drawings 1 and 2 or may be provided separately.

  Further, in the processing of step A125, for example, the bit arrangement (arrangement before the bit transposition in the upper stage) of the random numbers extracted from the hard random numbers (here, the big hit random numbers) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is determined in advance. A bit transposition pattern is also set that determines how to replace the bits when they are stored in the order of different bit arrangements (placement after the lower bit transposition).

  After step A125, in step A126, the value of, for example, the soft random number registers (1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) The initial value (start value) of the random number 1, the big hit symbol random number 2), and the random number (per random number) that determines the hit of the ordinary figure is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 113. Here, as types of random numbers, there are a hit initial value random number, a jackpot symbol initial value random number 1, and a jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 (these respectively use different soft random number register values).

  The random number generation circuit generates a part of each random number of special figures and ordinary figures in hardware. However, the initial values of these random numbers are set in software by the process of step A128 described later. The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111 used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as an initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. ), It is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Note that the random numbers related to the special figure include jackpot random numbers (random numbers for determining whether to win or not), jackpot symbol random numbers 1, 2 (random numbers for determining jackpot stop symbol), fluctuation pattern random numbers (reach of reach) Random number for determining a variation pattern including presence / absence), stop symbol random number (random number for determining outlier stop symbol), and the like. In addition, examples of random numbers related to ordinary maps include random numbers per ordinary figure (random numbers for determining whether or not per ordinary figure). Among these, the random numbers (hard random numbers) targeted in steps A 125 and 128 are, for example, jackpot random numbers, random numbers per common figure, and jackpot symbol random numbers 1 and 2. Note that the random numbers related to the special figure may be common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 when there are two types of special figures, or may be provided separately.

  Next, in step A127, an interrupt is permitted, and in the next step A128, an initial value random number update process is performed in order to update the initial value of the random number. Although the details are omitted, this initial value random number update process is for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. It becomes difficult to aim for big hits. Subsequently, when proceeding to Step A129, the power-off detection signal (power failure detection signal) input from the power supply device 55 is read through the port and the data bus, and the number of times of power-off detection signal check (for example, twice) is set. In step A130, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection signal is on.

  If the power interruption detection signal is on (Y in step A130), the process proceeds to step A131 for final determination of power failure, and if not (N in step A130), the process returns to step A128. That is, during normal operation, the initial value random number update process and the power-off detection signal check (loop process) are repeated, and steps A128 to A130 are repeated. That is, when the power-off detection signal is not on (N in Step A130), the process returns to Step A128.

  That is, when a power failure has not occurred, by permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step A128) (step A127), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is performed. It will be executed preferentially. In this way, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the interrupt process by waiting for the timer interrupt by the initial value random number update process.

  Then, when the process proceeds to step A131, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection signal is kept on for the number of checks. If this determination result is affirmative (Y in step A131), it is finally determined that a power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step A132. If negative (N in step A131), it is determined that a power failure has occurred and the process returns to step A130. . By checking multiple times in this way, when a power failure monitoring signal is temporarily and momentarily turned on due to noise or the like even though no power failure has actually occurred, it is not erroneously determined that a power failure has occurred. . Note that when the power-off detection signal is turned on, the power-off detection signal may be used as an NMI interrupt signal to interrupt the process being executed and forcibly execute the power-out process after step A132.

  Next, when proceeding to step A132, after interrupt is prohibited, all outputs are turned off in the next step A133 (off data is outputted to all output ports), and the power failure inspection area check data 1 described above is outputted in subsequent step A134. Is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 and the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2.

After step A134, after the process of calculating the checksum when the power of the RAM 113 is turned off is performed in the next step A135, in step A136, the calculated checksum is saved in a predetermined checksum area.
Next, after prohibiting access to the RAM 113 in step A137, the device waits for a reset. In addition, the power failure process of the above steps A132-A137 is performed before a power supply voltage falls below the operating voltage of CPU111 by a power failure.

  Next, the game state information transmission process (step A119) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step A141, a payout jackpot signal command for informing the jackpot information as game state information from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 80 is loaded. Next, the process proceeds to step A142, and the command loaded in step A141 is written in the gaming state transmission buffer. The command written in the game state transmission buffer is encrypted by serial communication at a predetermined timing and transmitted to the payout control device 80 (the same applies to the following transmission buffers).

Next, in step A143, after the game control device 54 loads a payout probability information command to inform the payout control device 80 of information relating to the jackpot probability and time reduction as game state information, the process proceeds to step A144, and is loaded in step A143. Write the command to the game state transmission buffer.
Next, in step A145, clear data for setting an initial state (a state in which no fraud has occurred) is set as a fraud information command.

  Next, in step A146, it is determined whether or not radio wave fraud is occurring, that is, whether or not radio wave fraud has been detected by the radio wave sensor 134. If radio wave fraud is occurring (Y in step A146), the radio wave fraud detection bit of the fraud information command is set in step A147, and the flow proceeds to step A148. On the other hand, if radio wave fraud has not occurred (N in step A146), the process jumps to step A147 and proceeds to step A148.

  In Step A148, it is determined whether or not a magnet fraud has occurred, that is, whether or not a magnet fraud has been detected by the magnetic sensor 133. If a magnet fraud has occurred (Y in step A148), the fraud detection bit of the fraud information command is set in step A149, and the flow proceeds to step A150. On the other hand, if the magnet fraud has not occurred (N in step A148), the process jumps to step A149 and proceeds to step A150.

In step A150, whether or not an illegal winning has occurred is detected, that is, whether or not an illegal winning has been detected as a result of monitoring an illegal winning in the error / unauthorized winning monitoring process other than when the large winning opening 29a and the power train 26 are open. It is determined whether or not an illegal winning is occurring (Y in step A150), and an illegal winning detection bit of the illegal information command is set in step A151.
Next, the process proceeds to step A152, where a firing stop payout firing command that stops the operation of the launching device 34 and stops the launch of the game ball is set, and the process proceeds to step A154.

On the other hand, if an illegal winning is not occurring (N in Step A150), the process branches to Step A153, and a firing command for launching permission for launching is set, in which the operation of the launching device 34 is permitted and the game ball is fired. Then, the process proceeds to Step A154.
In step A154, the unauthorized information command is written in the gaming state transmission buffer, and in step A155, the payout firing command is written in the gaming state transmission buffer. Further, a game state information setting completion command is set in step A156 and the process proceeds to step A157, and the command set in step A156 is written in the game state transmission buffer. After step A157, the process returns.

  Next, the main control ID transmission process (step A120) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step A161 whether or not there is a main control ID transmission request, that is, whether or not the main control ID transmission request flag is set in the initial setting in step A116 of FIG. Determine. If there is no transmission request for the main control ID (N in Step A161), the process returns. On the other hand, if there is a transmission request for the main control ID (Y in step A161), the process proceeds to step A162, and the main control ID transmission request flag is cleared to prepare for the next time.

  Next, in step A163, a start code for causing the payout control device 80 on the receiving side to specify that it is the start of serial communication is written in the payout serial transmission buffer. Next, in step A164, it is determined whether or not only the chip code (chip ID) of the main control chip is transmitted. This chip code (chip ID) is a part of the gaming machine ID (main control ID) of the game control device 54. Specifically, the individual identification information (IC chip identification information (CPU chip 111) in the gaming control device 54 ( It corresponds to a unique ID).

  If it is the transmission of only the chip code in step A164 (Y in step A164), the process jumps to step A169, and the chip identification code indicating that the chip code is to be transmitted is written in the dispensing serial transmission buffer. Here, the “XX identification code” is a code indicating which information (code) is to be transmitted from now on, and is not unique to a solid but a common code. After writing this code, the corresponding unique information is written.

  In the following step A170, the chip code of the IC chip constituting the CPU 111 in the game control device 54 is read and written in the payout serial transmission buffer. Each code written in the payout serial transmission buffer is encrypted by serial communication at a predetermined timing and transmitted to the payout control device 80 (the same applies to the following transmission buffers).

  On the other hand, if transmission of only the chip code is not performed in step A164 (N in step A164), the process proceeds to step A165, and the manufacturer code identification code of the main control chip is written in the dispensing serial transmission buffer. In the next step A166, the manufacturer code of the main control chip (code relating to the manufacturer name of the pachinko machine 10) is read and written into the payout serial transmission buffer. Next, in step A167, the product code identification code of the main control chip is written in the payout serial transmission buffer, and in step A168, the product code (model name code) of the main control chip is read out and written in the payout serial transmission buffer. The process proceeds to step A169.

  When the process proceeds from step A168 to step A169, or when the process proceeds from step A164 to step A169, as described above, the chip code identification code is written in the payout serial transmission buffer in step A169, and the chip code is entered in step A170. Read and write to the payout serial transmission buffer and return.

  Thus, when there is a request for transmission of the main control ID (for example, when the power is turned on, when the frame is opened, when a big hit occurs, etc.), in addition to the chip code of the game control device 54 as the main control ID, The code is also transmitted to the payout control device 80. When the power is turned on, for example, serial transmission is performed in the order of the manufacturer code, the product code, and the chip code. Each identification code includes information indicating the data type and data length of each code.

Next, the timer interrupt process of the game control device 54 will be described with reference to FIG. This timer interrupt process is started by the processes of steps A124 and A127 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt period.
In this timer interrupt process, first, in step A181, the saving of the register for transferring the value held in the predetermined register to the RAM 113 and the prohibition of interruption are executed as necessary.
Next, in step A182, input processing for reading the detection signals of each sensor (start port switches 120 and 121, gate switch 122, winning port switch 123, count switch 124, etc.) is executed.

Then, in step A183, output processing for setting and outputting the output data set in each step described later to the corresponding output port is executed. This is processing for performing drive control and the like of solenoids (large prize opening solenoid 132, general power solenoid 131) and the like based on output data set in various processes.
Next, random number update processing 1 is executed in step A184, and further random number update processing 2 is executed in step A185. Here, the soft random number related to the special drawing and the soft random number related to the general drawing are updated.

Subsequently, in step A186, the undetected error of each of the above-mentioned sensors, the excessive error of the prize ball discharge, the open state of the glass frame 13, and the illegal prize other than when the big prize opening 29a and the public power supply 26 are not being opened. An error / injustice monitoring process for monitoring, etc. is executed.
Next, in step A187, it is determined whether or not the game is stopped, that is, whether or not the game stop signal (not a command) output from the payout control device 80 is on for a predetermined period.

If the game is stopped (the game stop signal is on for a predetermined period of time) (Y in step A187), the process jumps to step A192, does not perform processing related to the game (steps A188 to A191), and others Processing related to the game is performed.
On the other hand, if the game is not stopped, that is, if the game stop signal is not turned on for a predetermined period (N in Step A187), the process proceeds to Step A188 to determine whether a communication abnormality is occurring, that is, a communication abnormality described later. It is determined whether or not a communication abnormality flag is set (monitored on the game control device 54 side), which is set when there is a communication abnormality in the monitoring process.

Here, if a communication abnormality is occurring (Y in Step A188), the process jumps to Step A192, and the processing related to the game (the processing of Step A189 to Step A191) is not performed, and the other processing related to the game is performed.
On the other hand, if no communication abnormality has occurred (N in step A187), the process proceeds to step A189.

In step A189, the input flags (start port switches 120 and 121, winning port switch 123, and count switch 124 in the special figure) set in the above-described input process are monitored, and a payout of a winning ball corresponding to the set input flag is monitored. The winning opening switch monitoring process is executed to execute preparations for requesting the payout control device 80.
Next, special game processing is performed in step A190. Although details of the special figure game process are omitted, overall control of the special figure variable display game is performed. That is, when the change start condition (start condition of the change display game) is satisfied, the determination of the big hit random number, the process of setting the combination of the special symbol stop pattern (result mode), and the process of setting the special figure change mode Is done.

Here, when the change start condition is satisfied, when the start-up prize is received in the waiting state and the change display game is started, the change display game ends and the start display is stored and the change display game is executed again. When the game is played, there are three types when the big hit ends, the start-up memory is stored, and the variable display game is executed again.
In this special figure game process, a process of setting various output data related to the special figure variable display game is also performed. That is, the content (command data) of a command to be transmitted to, for example, the effect control device 53 is set in accordance with the game state of the special display variable display game.

Next, in step A191, processing for the usual variable display game is performed. That is, general control of the usual variable display game is performed, and processing for setting the content of a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 53 and the like in accordance with the state of the variable display game of the normal figure is performed.
In step A192, the LED editing process is executed. This is the display of the special figure of the special display game 70 in the collective display device 70, the special figure decided in the special figure game process in step A190, the special figure decided in the general figure game process in step A191, and other information. Display (LED, 7-segment display) display processing, winning display LED editing processing, and the like.

  Next, if the communication control timer is not “0” in step A193, the timer is updated (-1) (decremented). Next, in step A194, it is determined whether or not the communication control timer is “0”. If the communication control timer is not “0”, the process jumps to step A199 to perform processing related to command determination, editing, transmission, and the like (step A195). To step A198). On the other hand, if the communication control timer is “0” in step A194, the process proceeds to step A195.

  In step A195, a received command determination process is performed (details will be described later). Next, a payout command editing process is performed in step A196. This edits a command sent to the payout control device 80 (details will be described later). Next, in step A197, payout command transmission processing is performed (details will be described later). Next, in step A198, an initial value is set in a communication control timer for controlling a communication period between the game control device 54 and another control device. For example, the initial value is set to 200 ms.

  Next, communication abnormality monitoring processing is performed in step A199 (details will be described later). This is to monitor an abnormality such as the communication between the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 being cut off. Next, in order to restart the main routine in step A200, the register saved in step A181 is restored, timer interrupt is permitted in step A201, and the process is interrupted (returned).

  Next, the received command determination process (step A195) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The received command determination process is an interrupt for receiving a command transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the game control device 54. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step A211 whether or not the gaming machine frame information is received in the gaming machine frame information reception buffer.

  If it is determined that the gaming machine frame information has been received (Y in step A211), the process proceeds to step A212, the error / illegal information command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer, and the process proceeds to step A213. In step A213, a production error / incorrect information command is prepared based on the read command, and production command setting processing is performed in subsequent step A214. The effect command setting process is a process of writing a command to be transmitted from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53 by serial communication in the effect serial command buffer. Thus, the prepared command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 (the same applies to the effect command setting process below).

  Next, in step A215, the frame opening information is read from the gaming machine frame information receiving buffer, and it is determined whether or not the frame opening information (open information of the inner frame 12) has changed. If the frame opening information has changed (Y in step A215), the process proceeds to step A216 to save the frame opening information, and in step A217, it is determined whether or not the inner frame 12 has changed to opening. If the inner frame 12 has changed to open, that is, if the inner frame 12 has changed to open from the previous closing to this time (Y in step A217), the main control ID transmission request flag is set in step A218. The process proceeds to step A219.

On the other hand, if the frame release information has not changed (N in Step A215), the process jumps to Step A219. If the inner frame 12 has not changed to open at step A217, the process jumps to step A219.
When the process proceeds from step A218, step A215, or step A217 to step A219, the card unit information command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer in step A219.

  Next, the process proceeds to step A220, where an effect card unit information command is prepared based on the read command, and an effect command setting process is performed in subsequent step A221. Thereby, in the production | presentation control apparatus 53, when the card unit information command for production | generation is received, production | presentation, such as displaying the unauthorized state of the card unit 200 on the display apparatus 41, is performed.

  Next, in step A222, the power saving information command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer. Next, the process proceeds to step A223, where an effect power saving information command is prepared based on the read command, and an effect command setting process is performed in the subsequent step A224. As a result, when the production control device 53 receives the production power-saving information command, the production control device 53 performs control such as reducing the power-saving mode by setting, for example, the customer waiting screen of the display device 41 to be in the energy-saving mode.

  Next, in step A225, the number-of-balls command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer. Next, the process proceeds to step A226, where an effect holding ball number command is prepared based on the read command, and an effect command setting process is performed in the subsequent step A227. Thereby, in the production | presentation control apparatus 53, control will be performed, such as displaying the number of balls held on the display apparatus 41, if the ball number command for productions is received. When the decorative ball display device as described above is provided, the decorative ball display device may perform decoration display corresponding to the number of balls held.

  Next, in step A228, the counting ball number command is read from the gaming machine frame information reception buffer. Next, the process proceeds to step A229, where an effect counting ball number command is prepared based on the read command, and an effect command setting process is performed in the subsequent step A230. Thereby, in the production | presentation control apparatus 53, when the count ball number command for production | generation is received, control, such as displaying a count sphere on the display apparatus 41, is performed. After step A230, the received command determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A211 that no gaming machine frame information has been received (N in step A211), the process branches to step A231 to receive the command from the payout control device 80 a specified number of times even in the normal state. It is determined whether or not the communication retry is repeated.
If communication is not being retried at step A231, for example, if a command is being received smoothly (N at step A231), the process proceeds to step A232, the communication retry flag is set, and the retry count is cleared to "0" at step A233. . This prepares for the next communication. After step A233, the received command determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if communication retry is being performed in step A231 (Y in step A231), the process branches to step A234 to update (increment) the number of retries by “+1”, and the number of retries is a predetermined number (for example, 2 times) or more in step A235 It is determined whether or not. If the number of retries does not exceed the specified number (N in step A235), the process returns and the routine is repeated. If the number of retries exceeds the specified number (YN in step A235), the process proceeds to step A236, the communication retry flag is cleared, and the received command determination process ends.

Next, the payout command editing process (step A196) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. The payout command editing process is a process of editing a payout command to be sent to the payout control device 80, such as adding the number of winning balls to the number of possessed balls corresponding to winning.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step A241 whether communication is being retried. If the communication retry is in progress (Y in step A241), the payout command editing process is terminated and the process returns.

  On the other hand, if the communication retry is not in progress (N in step A241), the process proceeds to step A242 to clear all the game information command areas and prepare for the payout command editing. Next, in step A243, the command setting counter that is updated by “+1” each time the command is set and saved in the game information command area is cleared. Further, in step A244, it is determined whether or not the start port 1 winning counter that counts the winning detection signal of the first start port switch 120 (that is, counts the winning to the first start winning port 25) is “0”. .

If the starting port 1 winning counter is “0” in step A244 (if there is no winning in the first starting winning port 25) (Y in step A244), it is determined that there is no winning in the first starting winning port 25. Then, jump to Step A250.
On the other hand, if the starting port 1 winning counter is not “0” (if there is a winning to the first starting winning port 25) (N in Step A244), the process proceeds to Step A245, and the type information corresponding to the starting port 1 winning counter. Set the command. “Type information” refers to, for example, a data type that distinguishes types such as no information, start opening, big prize opening, winning opening, number of symbol stops, etc., for example, no information, and a data number specified by a number from 1 to 15. And.

Next, in step A246, a winning ball information command corresponding to the start port 1 winning counter is set. “Prize ball information” is composed of the number of winning balls (no information and 1 to 15 winning ball data) and the number of winning balls (including no information), and is information relating to the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls.
Next, in step A247, the type information command and prize ball information command (indicated as type information / prize ball information command in FIG. 18; the same applies hereinafter) corresponding to the start port 1 winning counter are saved in the game information command area. In A248, the command setting counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. Further, in step A249, the start opening 1 winning counter is cleared to “0” to prepare for the next winning at the first starting winning opening 25, and the process proceeds to step A250.

When jumping from step A244 to step A250, or when proceeding to step A250 via step A249, the processing from step A250 to step A255 is the same as the above-mentioned starting port 1 winning counter. Execute on the counter.
That is, in step A250, it is determined whether or not the starting port 2 winning counter that counts the winning detection signal of the second starting port switch 121 (that is, counts the winning to the second starting port 26) is “0”. To do.

If the start opening 2 winning counter is “0” in step A250 (if there is no winning in the second starting winning opening 26) (Y in step A250), it is determined that there is no winning in the second starting winning opening 26. To jump to step A256.
On the other hand, if the starting port 2 winning counter is not “0” (if there is a winning at the second starting winning port 26) (N in Step A250), the process proceeds to Step A251 and the type information corresponding to the starting port 2 winning counter. Set the command. Next, in step A252, a winning ball information command corresponding to the start port 2 winning counter is set.

  Next, in step A253, the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the start port 2 winning counter are saved in the game information command area, and in step A254, the command setting counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. Further, in step A255, the start port 2 winning counter is cleared to “0” in order to prepare for the next winning at the second starting winning port 26, and the process proceeds to step A256.

When jumping from step A250 to step A256, or when proceeding to step A256 via step A255, the processing from step A256 to step A261 is the same as the start port 1 winning counter described above. Execute on the counter.
That is, in step A256, it is determined whether or not the big prize winning prize counter that counts the winning detection signal of the count switch 124 (that is, counts the prize winning to the big prize winning opening 29a) is “0”.

If the prize winning counter at the step A256 is “0” (if there is no prize winning at the prize winning opening 29a) (Y at step A256), it is determined that there is no prize winning at the prize winning opening 29a, and the process proceeds to step A262. Jump.
On the other hand, if the big prize opening prize counter is not “0” (if there is a prize at the big prize opening 29a) (N in step A256), the process proceeds to step A257, and the type information command corresponding to the big prize opening prize counter is set. Set. Next, in step A258, a prize ball information command corresponding to the big prize opening prize counter is set.

Next, in step A259, the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the big prize winning prize counter are saved in the game information command area, and the command setting counter is updated (incremented) by "+1" in step A260. Further, in step A261, in order to prepare for the next winning in the big winning opening 29a, the big winning opening winning counter is cleared to “0”, and the process proceeds to step A262 in FIG. In addition, when two prize winning openings are provided, the counter of the second prize winning opening (second prize winning opening) is set as a prize winning 2 winning counter. You may make it perform the process similar to each winning counter mentioned above. It should be noted that the second big winning opening may be opened on condition that a special hit state is reached even in the above-mentioned big hit, and the game ball may be controlled to be able to win. For example, when a big hit occurs, either one of the big winning opening 29 or the second big winning opening is opened, and which one is opened is determined by the result mode (special result) of the special figure variable display game. It is good to be configured. In addition, when different game values are set for the two big winning gates, and a big hit occurs, the game to be given to the player depending on which big winning gate the game ball has won (passed) The value may be determined. In this case, the player may be arranged at a distant position so that the player can easily divide (aim), or has a common inlet and can win at a predetermined timing by a sorting member or the like. You may make it switch a mouth.

When the process jumps from step A256 to step A262, or when the process proceeds to step A262 via step A261, the process from step A262 to step A267 shown in FIG. Execute for the other hole winning counter.
That is, the other hole winning counter that counts the winning detection signal of the winning opening switch 123 that has detected winning to the general winning openings 27a to 27d in step A262 (that is, counts winning to the general winning openings 27a to 27d). Is determined to be “0”.

If the other hole winning counter is “0” in step A262 (if there is no winning in the general winning opening 27a to 27d) (Y in step A262), it is determined that there is no winning in the general winning opening 27a to 27d. Jump to step A268.
On the other hand, if the other hole winning counter is not “0” (if there is a winning in the general winning ports 27a to 27d) (N in step A262), the process proceeds to step A263, and the type information command corresponding to the other hole winning counter is set. Set. Next, in step A264, a winning ball information command corresponding to the other hole winning counter is set.

  Next, in step A265, the type information command and the prize ball information command corresponding to the other hole winning counter are saved in the game information command area, and the command setting counter is updated (incremented) by "+1" in step A266. Further, in step A267, the other hole winning counter is cleared to “0”, and the process proceeds to step A268.

When the process jumps from step A262 to step A268, or when the process proceeds to step A268 through step A267, the process related to the symbol stop count counter is executed in the processes from step A268 to step A273.
That is, in step A268, it is determined whether or not the symbol stop count counter that counts the number of times the special figure (and the decorative special figure) starts to fluctuate and stops is “0”.

If the symbol stop count counter is “0” in step A268 (Y in step A268), the number of times the special figure (and the decorative special figure) starts and stops is “0”, that is, it has not changed. Judgment is made, the payout command editing process is terminated, and the process returns.
On the other hand, if the symbol stop count counter is not “0” (N in step A268), the number of stoppages of the special figure (and the decorative special figure) is not “0”, that is, the variable display game is played. If so, the process proceeds to step A269 to set a type information command corresponding to the symbol stop count counter.

  Next, in step A271, the type information command and prize ball information command corresponding to the symbol stop count counter are saved in the game information command area, and in step A272, the command setting counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. Furthermore, in step A273, the symbol stop count counter is cleared to “0” in order to prepare for counting the number of times the next special figure (and the decorative special figure) starts to fluctuate and stops. After step A273, the payout command editing process is terminated and the process returns.

  Next, the payout command transmission process (step A197) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The payout command transmission process is a process of sending a payout command or the like from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 80. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step A281 whether or not the above-mentioned command setting counter is “0”.

If the command setting counter is “0” (Y in step A281), the process branches to step A289 to set “no information” as the game information command, and proceed to step A290 to change the command set in step A289 to the game information. Write to the transmission buffer, and then proceed to Step A291.
On the other hand, if the command setting counter is not “0” in step A281 (N in step A281), the process proceeds to step A282, and the value of the command setting counter is copied as the command transmission number.

Next, in step A283, when a plurality of commands are set and saved in the game information command area, the start address of the game information command area is set so that the command is read (loaded) from the top. Set.
In step A284, a command is loaded from the game information command area. At this time, the command at the address set in step A283 is loaded from the game information command area. Next, the process proceeds to step A285, and the loaded command is written in the game information transmission buffer. As a result, the command written in the game information transmission buffer is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 80.

Subsequently, in step A286, the address of the game information command area is updated to the address of the next command (next command). This is to load a command at the next address when a plurality of commands are saved in the game information command area.
Next, in step A287, the command transmission count is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and in step A288, it is determined whether or not the command transmission count has become “0”.

  If it is not “0” in this determination (N in Step A288), the process returns to Step A284, and the loop of Step A284 to Step A288 is repeated. Then, when all of the plurality of commands saved in the game information command area are loaded and written into the game information transmission buffer, the determination result of step A288 becomes YES. When the number of command transmissions becomes “0” in the determination in step A288 (Y in step A288), the process proceeds to step A291.

  When the process proceeds from step A288 to step A291 or when the process proceeds from step A290 to step A291 as described above, the game state information transmission process (FIG. 14) is performed in step A291, and then the main control ID transmission process is performed in step A292. (FIG. 15), the payout command transmission process is terminated, and the process returns.

Next, the communication abnormality monitoring process (step A199) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The communication abnormality monitoring process is for monitoring an abnormality such as the communication between the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 being cut off.
When this routine is started, it is first determined in step A301 whether or not a communication abnormality has occurred, based on the state of a communication abnormality flag (set in step A311 described later).
This process will be described in five cases.

  First, in the normal route (a), if communication abnormality is not occurring in step A301 (N in step A301), the process proceeds to step A302, and it is determined whether or not the winning protection wait timer is “0”. . The winning protection weight timer is provided to wait for a specified time, such as to protect the winning of a ball that has already been fired when a communication timeout occurs. For example, the launch of a sealed ball stops during a 15-second wait. Is done.

  If the winning protection weight timer is “0” (Y in Step A302), the process branches to Step A303, and it is determined whether or not a communication timeout has occurred. Here, the occurrence of a communication timeout is determined to be a communication timeout if communication between the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 is interrupted for a predetermined time, for example.

  If it is not determined that a communication timeout has occurred (N in step A303), the process ends and returns. Therefore, in this case, no communication abnormality or communication timeout has occurred, and the winning protection wait timer is “0”, so communication is normal. This state is defined as a normal processing route (a). That is, the normal route (a) passes through the route of step A301, step A302, step A303, and RET.

Next, in the route (b) when it is recognized that a communication abnormality has occurred, the winning protection wait timer is “0” in step A302 described above (Y in step A302). As a result of the determination in step A303, If a communication timeout has occurred (Y in step A303), the process proceeds from step A303 to step A304.
In step A304, an initial value (for example, 15 seconds) is set in the winning protection weight timer. This is for the purpose of protecting the winning of a ball that has already been launched, for example, by stopping and waiting for the launch of the encapsulated ball for a specified time set as an initial value when a communication timeout occurs.
After step A304, the communication abnormality monitoring process is terminated as it is, and the process returns.

  Therefore, in this case, a communication timeout occurs first and an initial value is set in the winning protection wait timer. This state is the processing route (b) when it is recognized that a communication abnormality has occurred (first). That is, when it is recognized that a communication abnormality has occurred (initial), the route (b) goes through the routes of step A301, step A302, step A303, step A304, and RET.

  Next, in the route (c) during the winning protection weight, in step A301 described above, no communication abnormality has occurred (N in step A301), and if the processing proceeds to step A302, is the winning protection weight timer set to “0”? judge. Here, if it is not “0” (N in Step A302), the process proceeds to Step A305, and the winning protection wait timer is updated by “−1”. In the subsequent step A306, it is determined whether or not the winning protection weight timer has become "0".

  If the winning protection weight timer is not “0” in step A306 (N in step A306), the process proceeds to step A307 to determine whether authentication is completed. This is because the gaming machine ID (here, both the main control ID and the payout control ID) is sent to the third party management organization 320 via the card control unit 200 via the payout control device 80, where it is checked against the authentication list, It is determined whether or not the verification result OK is found and the authentication is completed.

  If authentication is not completed in step A307 (N in step A307), the process returns to repeat the routine. On the other hand, if authentication is complete (Y in step A307), it is determined in step A308 whether recovery is complete. This is to determine whether or not recovery communication is completed when communication is interrupted due to a communication error or the like. If the recovery is not completed (N in step A308), the process returns and the routine is repeated.

On the other hand, if the recovery is completed (Y in step A308), the communication abnormality flag is cleared in step A309, and in the subsequent step A310, the winning protection wait timer is cleared to “0”, the process is terminated, and the process returns. .
Whether a communication timeout has occurred or authentication has been completed is determined based on the state of the internal status register of the CPU 111, for example. The completion of recovery is determined using a recovery communication completion notification flag stored in an internal register of the CPU 111, for example.
Therefore, in this case, it is in a state of being in a winning protection weight. This state is defined as a processing route (c) during the winning protection weight.

  That is, the route (c) in the winning protection weight is the route of step A301, step A302, step A305, step A306, step A307, step A308, step A309, step A310, and RET. Note that if the communication state returns to normal while the route (c) in the winning protection weight is being executed, the communication is returned from the communication abnormality. When returning from a communication error, the communication error flag remains clear. Also, the winning protection weight timer becomes “0”.

  Next, in the route (d) at the end of the winning protection weight period, when the communication abnormality does not occur in the above-described step A301 (N in step A301) and the process proceeds to step A302, the winning protection weight timer is “ If it is not “0” (N in Step A302), the process proceeds to Step A305, and the winning protection wait timer is updated by “−1”. In the subsequent step A306, it is determined whether or not the winning protection weight timer has become "0".

  If the winning protection weight timer is “0” (Y in step A306), it is determined that the winning protection weight period has ended, and the process proceeds to step A311. In step A311, a communication abnormality flag is set. The game is stopped by setting the communication abnormality flag. After step A311, the communication abnormality monitoring process is terminated and the process is turned as it is. In this way, in the program for the communication abnormality monitoring process, even if a communication abnormality occurs, it is not necessary to immediately determine a communication abnormality and set the communication abnormality flag, but to protect the winning of a ball that has already been launched. Thus, when the winning protection wait period ends after the occurrence of the communication abnormality, the communication abnormality flag is set. Therefore, the game does not stop when the communication state returns to normal during the winning protection weight.

  Therefore, in this case, the winning protection weight period ends, that is, the occurrence of a communication abnormality is confirmed. This state is defined as a processing route (d) when the winning protection weight period ends. The winning protection weight timer remains “0” and does not change. That is, the route (d) when the winning protection weight period ends is the route of step A301, step A302, step A305, step A306, step A311 and RET.

  Finally, in the return confirmation route (e) during communication abnormality, if communication abnormality is occurring in step A301 described above (Y in step A301), the process jumps from step A301 to step A307, and whether authentication is completed in step A307. Determine whether or not. Here, if the authentication is not completed (N in Step A307), the routine returns and the routine is repeated. On the other hand, if authentication is complete (Y in step A307), it is determined in step A308 whether recovery is complete. If the recovery is not completed (N in step A308), the process returns and the routine is repeated. On the other hand, if the recovery is completed (Y in step A308), the communication abnormality flag is cleared in step A309, and in the subsequent step A310, the winning protection wait timer is cleared to “0”, this process is terminated, and the process returns. To do.

  Therefore, in this case, the determination process during the occurrence of the communication abnormality in step A301 is repeated to check the return during the communication abnormality. This state is set as a processing route (e) for returning confirmation during communication abnormality. That is, the return confirmation route (e) during communication abnormality is a route of step A301, step A307, step A308, step A309, step A310, and RET. The route (e) includes a case where the process returns from step A307 or step A308 to N and returns. If it is determined in step A301 that a communication abnormality has not occurred during execution of the return confirmation route (e) during a communication abnormality, the communication abnormality is recovered, and the process proceeds from step A301 to step A302. The process of the same route as the normal route (a) is executed.

  Next, the LED editing process (step A192) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The LED editing process is a process related to the segment LED provided in the collective display device 70. As described above, the collective display device 70 displays the ordinary figure, the special figure, and also the special figure and the ordinary figure. For example, a plurality of indicators (for example, one display) using LED as a light emission source, such as a hold display of start memory (special figure hold display, general figure hold display) and a game state display (round number display or game progress state display) Lamp and 7-segment display).

  In the LED editing process, first, a general map hold number display table in which the display mode of the general map hold LED is defined is set (step A321), display data corresponding to the general map hold number is acquired, and a segment area (for example, a general map hold) is displayed. Save in the segment area of the figure hold LED (step A322). Next, a special figure 1 hold number display table in which the display form of the special figure 1 hold LED is defined is set (step A323), and display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired to obtain a segment area (for example, a special figure). Save to the segment area of 1 hold LED (step A324).

  Thereafter, a special figure 2 hold number display table in which the display mode of the special figure 2 hold LED is defined is set (step A325), display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired, and a segment area (for example, special figure 2) is obtained. Save to the segment area of the hold LED (A326). Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode of the round display LED is defined is set (A327), and display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the round display LED). (Step A328).

  Next, a game state display table in which the display mode of the state display LED in the collective display device 70 is defined (step A329), display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired, and a segment area (for example, state display LED) is obtained. (Step A330). After that, it is determined whether or not the high-probability notification flag related to notification that the probability state of jackpot is a high-probability state when the power failure is restored (step A331).

  If the high probability notification flag is on (Y in step A331), that is, if the high probability state is being notified, the process jumps to step A333. In step A333, a winning display LED editing process is performed. This is a process of displaying the number of winning balls corresponding to winning in the winning opening by the winning display LED in the collective display device 70 (details will be described later). After step A333, the LED editing process is terminated.

  If the high probability notification flag is not on (N in step A331), the off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area (for example, the segment area of the status display LED) (step A332), and the process proceeds to step A333. The winning display LED editing process as described above is performed, and then the LED editing process is terminated.

  Next, the winning display LED editing process in step A333 of the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step A341, if the winning display output control timer is not “0”, the timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and in step A342, the winning display output control timer is set. It is determined whether or not the initial value (for example, 600 ms) has reached “0”.

  When the winning display output control timer becomes “0” (Y in Step A342), the process proceeds to the following Step A343, where there is a count in the winning display counter area (that is, count data for lighting the winning display LED) It is determined whether or not there is). If there is no count in the winning display counter area (N in step A343), the address of the winning display counter area to be checked is updated in step A344. Next, in step A345, it is determined whether or not all areas have been checked. If all areas have not been checked (N in step A345), the process returns to step A343 to repeat the loop.

Then, the address of the winning display counter area is updated by repeating the loop, and when the check of all areas is completed, the process returns from step A345 to step A351.
In step A351, the winning ball display of the winning indication LED disappears by saving the extinguishing data in the segment area, and the process returns.

  On the other hand, if there is a count in the winning display counter area in step A343 (Y in step A343), the process jumps to step A347, and in step A347, the target winning number display counter is updated (decremented) by “−1”, and subsequently. In step A348, the LED output pattern data corresponding to the address of the winning display counter area (for example, when the winning display LED is composed of two 7-segment LEDs, which one of the seven segments is lit (or blinking). Data for deciding whether to do it). In subsequent step A349, the LED output pattern data acquired in step A348 is saved in the segment area of the winning display LED, and then the process proceeds to step A350.

  In step A350, the timer initial value is saved in the winning display output control timer and the process returns. For example, since the repetition timing of this routine is every 4 ms with respect to the initial value of the winning display output control timer, among the timers obtained by the initial value × 4 ms, a predetermined time is turned ON (lighted), and the remaining time thereafter The timing control of winning display is performed as OFF (lights off).

On the other hand, if the winning display output control timer is not “0” in step A342 (N in step A342), the process branches to step A346 to determine whether the winning display control timer is in the lighting section or not. Determine based on a timer.
If the determination result in step A346 is in the lighting section (Y in step A346), the current routine is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the determination result in step A346 is not in the lighting section (N in step A346), the process proceeds to step A351, the extinction data is saved in the segment area of the winning display LED, and the process returns.

  Next, the error / injustice monitoring process (step A186) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The error / injustice monitoring process is a process for monitoring whether or not there is a signal input (signal change) from a switch provided in various winning awards and for monitoring an error.

  In the error / illegal monitoring process, first, in step A361, an illegal winning monitoring table corresponding to the count switch 124 in the large winning opening 29a of the variable winning device 29 is prepared. Next, in step A362, an illegal winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening 29a even though the big winning opening 29a is not open is executed.

  Next, a fraudulent winning monitoring table for a winning opening switch in the ordinary electric power system is prepared (step A363). There is a second start port switch 121 for detecting a winning to the second start winning port 26 as an ordinary electric accessory (general power). Next, an illegal winning monitoring process for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning is executed (step A364). This unauthorized winning monitoring process is a process performed on the count switch 124 of the large winning opening 29a of the variable winning apparatus 29 and the second starting opening switch 121 of the second starting winning opening 26 (general power).

  As for the big winning opening 29a and the second starting winning opening 26, it is easy to perform an illegal act of forcibly opening the opening / closing member, inserting a game ball and paying out a winning ball (adding winning ball number data). In addition to monitoring fraud. Thereby, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 when an error to be monitored occurs, and an illegal prize error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 53 along with the cancellation of the error, so that error notification is started and ended. Will be set.

  Also, in this fraud monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in effect by checking the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning mouth switch subject to error monitoring, and an input is made to the target winning mouth switch during this fraud monitoring period. It is determined whether or not there is. In this determination, an erroneous error determination based on false detection or non-malicious winning signal detection, etc. by providing a predetermined amount of fraud occurrence determination number, which is a criterion for determining fraud monitoring period or illegal winning. (Notification) is not performed.

  Next, radio wave fraud monitoring processing is performed (step A365). This is to monitor radio fraud based on the output of the radio wave sensor 134. When the radio wave sensor 134 is on, that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and notification is made. Is to do. In addition, regarding this radio wave fraud, unlike the case of the next magnet fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  Subsequently, a magnet fraud monitoring process is performed (step A366). This is to monitor the magnet fraud based on the output of the magnetic sensor 133. When the magnetic sensor 133 is on, that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and notification is made. Is to do. As for the magnetic abnormality, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 133 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions).

Next, an error scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal of the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for errors is to be monitored this time is updated (in the range of 0 to 1, “+1”). "Update") and prepare (step A367). Subsequently, the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 is prepared (step A368). The types of errors monitored by the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 include, for example, a switch abnormality error (connector disconnection, switch failure, etc.) and a game stop error (communication failure, etc.).
Thereafter, the error check process of the type defined in the gaming machine error monitoring table 1 is performed (step A369), the error / illegal monitoring process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

Next, the control contents of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIGS.
With reference to FIG. 25, the main process that is started based on the CPU 81 being forcibly reset in the payout control device 80 will be described.
First, when the power switch 191 of the power supply device 55 is turned on and a reset signal is input from the power supply device 55 to the game control device 54 and then released, the CPU 81 is activated.

When the CPU 81 is activated, interrupts are first prohibited (step B101), the CPU peripheral circuits (including the serial port) built in the CPU 81 are initialized (step B102), and off data (binary values) are output to all output ports. Signal corresponding to “0” of the signal) is output (step B103). Furthermore, access to the RAM 83 is permitted (step B104).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear signal is turned on by operating the RAM clear switch 182 provided in the game control device 54 (step B105). If the RAM clear signal is on (Y in step B105), the process jumps to step B110. If the RAM clear signal is not on (N in step B105), the process proceeds to step B106.

  In step B106, it is determined whether or not all values in the power outage inspection areas 1 and 2 of the RAM 83 are normal power outage inspection area check data. Here, if all values are normal (Y in step B106), it is determined that the power failure has been restored (at the time of power failure recovery), and the process proceeds to step B107. If all values have not been stored normally (N in step B106) ), Jump to Step B110.

  Next, in step B107, the checksum of the data in the RAM 83 is calculated, and in step B108, it is compared with the checksum at the time of power shut-off, and it is determined whether or not the values match (normal). If this checksum does not match (is not normal) (that is, if the data in the RAM 83 is corrupted) (N in step B108), the process jumps to step B110 and the checksum matches (is normal). If yes (Y in step B108), the process proceeds to step B109.

  In step B109, initial value setting for power failure recovery is executed. That is, all the power failure inspection areas are cleared, the checksum area is cleared, and the areas related to error and fraud monitoring are reset. Next, the process proceeds to step B113. The power failure recovery command (power failure recovery command) includes information notifying the power failure state (game state, rest state, settlement state), and this command is sent via the game control device 54 when the power failure is recovered. The received effect control device 53 resumes the display on the display device 41 for notifying the break during the power failure, for example, after the power failure is restored. In other words, the processing performed at the time of the power failure and the display on the display device 41 for informing the state are resumed after the power failure is restored.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is ON in step B105 (when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM clear switch 182) (Y in step B105), N in step B106 and N in step B108. Then, the process jumps to step B110, and all work areas in the RAM 83 are cleared. In step B111, all stack areas are cleared. That is, in Step B110 and Step B111, all areas of the RAM 83 to be used are cleared. Next, in step B112, an initial value at power-on is set in an area where initial value setting is necessary, and the process proceeds to step B113.

Next, when the process proceeds from step B109 to step B113, or when the process proceeds from step B112 to step B113, the processes after step B113 including step B113 are performed.
When the processing proceeds to step B113 and subsequent steps, it is first determined in step B113 whether authentication is completed. In this authentication work, the gaming machine ID (here, both the main control ID and the payout control ID) is transmitted to the card unit 200 via the payout control device 80 and sent to the external third party management organization 320, where The verification is performed against the registered authentication list to determine whether or not the verification result is OK (when the verification is OK, the authentication is completed). The authentication completion is determined by, for example, the internal status register of the CPU 81. Judge by state.

  The internal status register of the CPU 81 stores authentication completion information transmitted from the third party management organization 320 via the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80, and makes a determination based on this information. is there. Further, the authentication completion information is also sent from the card unit 200 to the game store management device 300. This is to store the authentication result information in the amusement store management device 300 each time as a response to the case where the communication with the third party management organization 320 is offline. You should set it to overwrite the next day.

If authentication is not completed in step B113 (N in step B113), the process stands by in step B113. If authentication is completed (Y in step B113), the process proceeds to step B114. In step B114, a night monitoring information reception process described later is performed. If authentication is not completed (verification is OK), the process waits for completion in step A117. If authentication is not completed within a predetermined time, a problem such as a communication error or an error has occurred. Then, the process may be terminated, or a predetermined error occurrence process may be performed.
The night monitoring information from the night monitoring switch 126 is output to the payout control device 80 in response to a request from the payout control device 80. The night monitoring information may be stored in the RAM 83 or a register of the CPU 81.

  After step B114, the process proceeds to step B115, and for example, a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit provided in the CPU 81 is activated. The CTC circuit is a circuit for timer interruption. In the subsequent step B116, an interrupt is permitted, and when the process proceeds to the next step B117, the number of times the power-off detection signal is checked (for example, 2 times) is set, and whether or not the power-off detection signal is turned on in the next step B118. judge. If it is on (Y in step B118), the process proceeds to step B119 for final determination of power failure, and if it is not on (N in step B118), the process returns to step B117. During normal operation, steps B118 to B117 are repeated.

  In step B119, it is determined whether or not the power-off detection signal is on for the number of times of the check. If the determination result is affirmative (Y in step B119), it is finally determined that a power failure has occurred, and the process proceeds to step B120. If negative (N in step B119), it is determined that a power failure has not occurred and step B118 is determined. Return to.

  Next, when proceeding to Step B120, after prohibiting the interrupt, in the next Step B121, off data is output to all output ports, and then in Step B122, the aforementioned power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1. The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2. That is, check data for restoration confirmation is saved in the power failure inspection areas 1 and 2.

  After step B122, the checksum of the data in the RAM 83 is calculated in the next step B123, and the calculated checksum is saved in a predetermined checksum area in step B124, and then access to the RAM 83 is prohibited in step B125. Then wait. In addition, the power failure process of the above steps B120-B125 is performed before a power supply voltage falls below the operating voltage of CPU81 by a power failure (a normal power supply interruption is included).

  Next, the night monitoring information reception process (step B114) in the main process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B131, night frame opening / closing information indicating whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 has been detected at night is received from the inner frame opening switch 126 and stored in the RAM 83, for example.

  Next, in step B132, night frame opening frequency information indicating how many times the opening of the inner frame 12 is detected at night is received from the inner frame opening switch 126, and stored in the RAM 83, for example. Next, in step B133, board removal information is received from the inner frame opening switch 126 indicating whether or not the game control device 54 has been removed at night, and is stored in, for example, the RAM 83, and the night monitoring information reception process is terminated.

  In such nighttime monitoring information reception processing, only relevant information is received from the inner frame opening switch 126, and the content of the actual information is checked or determined by the timer interrupt processing described below (see FIG. 27) is set to be performed by the error / injustice monitoring process (step B145).

  Next, timer interruption processing (payout) of the payout control device 80 will be described with reference to FIG. This timer interrupt process (payout) is started by the processes of steps B115 and B116 in the main process described above, and is repeatedly executed at a predetermined timer interrupt cycle. In this timer interrupt process, first, in step B141, register saving and interrupt prohibition are executed as necessary.

  Thereafter, in step B142, each sensor (launching ball detection switch 160, out-ball detection switch 161, first safe ball detection switch 162, second safe ball detection switch 163, first sealed ball detection switch 164, second sealed ball) An input process for reading detection signals from the detection switch 65, the glass frame opening switch 125, the inner frame opening switch 126, the radio wave sensor (frame) 127, and the like) is executed.

  Here, the inner frame opening switch 126 is used not only at night (when the main power is not supplied to the pachinko machine 10) but also in the normal state (when the main power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10). Is detected, and the removal of the game control device 54 is detected.

Next, in step B143, an output process for collectively outputting output data to a port other than communication (for example, communication with the game control device 54) performed using a transmission buffer or the like is executed.
In step B144, switch monitoring processing is performed. This monitors the input flag set in the input process (input flag for the launch ball detection switch 160, the out ball detection switch 161, the first safe ball detection switch 162, the second safe ball detection switch 163, etc.) It performs processing for enclosing ball control such as subtraction of the number of balls that accompanies the launch and increase / decrease of the number of surface balls.

Next, in step B145, an error / fraud monitoring process is executed. This is a process for performing the above-mentioned undetected error of each sensor, magnetic ball fraud monitoring, nighttime fraud monitoring, and the like (details will be described later).
Next, in step B146, main control command reception processing for receiving a command (main control command) from the game control device 54 is performed (details will be described later), and then in step B147, the main control ID is received from the game control device 54. Main control ID reception processing is performed.

Next, in step B148, a card unit command reception process for receiving a command from the card unit 200 is performed (details will be described later), and then in step B149, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is performed (details will be described later). .
Next, in step B150, a polishing apparatus control process for controlling the operation of the polishing apparatus 406 and the like for polishing the encapsulated sphere is performed, and then in step B151, a lifting apparatus control process is performed.

Next, in step B152, the number-of-balls management process for managing the number of balls in the winning and the management of the use of counting balls, etc. is performed, and then in step B153, the ball removal is performed to control when the enclosing ball is withdrawn to the outside. Perform control processing.
Next, in step B154, a payment instruction from the card unit 200 is monitored, and a payment control process for processing related to payment is performed (details will be described later).

Next, in step B155, a break control process for performing processes necessary for the start and end of the break is performed (details will be described later).
In the subsequent step B156, LED editing processing relating to the display of various LEDs (for example, the error display LED 67, the ball count indicator 50, the LED built in the counting switch 36, etc.) is performed.

Next, main control command transmission processing for transmitting a main control command from the payout control device 80 to the game control device 54 is performed at step B157.
In the subsequent step B158, card unit command transmission processing is performed. This is based on a command received from the card unit 200 and performs a necessary process such as a recovery response or a card insertion response, or a process of transmitting a gaming machine ID to the card unit 200.

Next, a game stop signal editing process is performed in step B159. This is to edit the game stop signal such as turning on the game stop signal to stop the game during the settlement process or communication abnormality, or turning off the game stop signal when the game is possible. , Processing of instructions taking the form of signals instead of commands.
After that, the register is restored at step B160, the interrupt is permitted at step B161, and the process is interrupted at the interruption (returned).

  Next, the switch monitoring process B144 in the timer interrupt process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B171, out-ball detection switch monitoring processing is performed in which processing related to monitoring of the out-ball detection switch 161, which is a non-winning sensor, is performed. In this process, every time one out ball is collected, the number of board balls is decremented by one. And, it is determined as a board surface ball number error when the board surface ball number exceeds a specified number in the board surface ball number error monitoring process of the error / injustice monitoring process described later, Since the number of balls on the board is renewed when the glass frame is not open, the error is released without operating the error release switch 87 when the ball clogging is naturally resolved. (The same is true for the following safe ball detection switch monitoring process).

  Next, in step B172, a safe ball detection switch monitoring process for performing a process related to monitoring of the first safe ball detection switch 162 and the second safe ball detection switch 163, which are winning sensors, is performed. In this process, each time one safe ball is detected by the first safe ball detection switch 162 and the second safe ball detection switch 163, one safe ball number and one out ball number are added, and the number of board balls is set to 1. Subtract one.

  Finally, in step B173, a launch ball detection switch monitoring process for performing processing related to monitoring of the launch ball detection switch 160, which is a subtraction sensor, is performed, and the switch monitoring process is terminated. In this process, every time the shot ball detection switch 160 is turned on, the number of balls held is subtracted by one and the number of board balls is added by one.

Next, the error / illegal monitoring process B145 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, the error release switch monitoring process in step B181, the enclosed ball number monitoring process in step B182, the winning number abnormality monitoring process in step B183, the frame opening error monitoring process in step B184, and the frame switch abnormality in step B185 After executing the monitoring process, the board ball number error monitoring process in step B186, the frame radio wave fraud monitoring process in step B187, and the nighttime frame opening fraud monitoring process in step B188, the process returns.
The details of each monitoring process in steps B181 to B188 will be described later.

  Next, the error release switch monitoring process B181 in the error / injustice monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B201 whether or not the error cancel switch 87 has been turned on. If it is turned on (Y in step B201), the process proceeds to step B202. If it is not turned on (N in step B201), the process returns.

In step B202, it is determined whether or not a board ball number error is in progress. Here, if a board surface ball number error is in progress (specifically, a board surface ball number error flag in FIG. 32 described later is set) (Y in step B202), the process proceeds to step B203, and the board surface ball number error is not in progress. If (specifically, the board surface ball number error flag of FIG. 32 described later is cleared) (N in step B202), the process returns.
Next, when proceeding to Step B203, the number of board balls is cleared, and then at Step B204, an enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is set. Thereafter, in step B205, an initial value is set in the enclosing ball number confirmation wait timer, and the process returns.

  Next, the enclosed ball number monitoring process B182 in the error / injustice monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B211 whether or not the number of board balls is less than zero. If it is less than zero (Y in step B211), the process proceeds to step B213. If it is not less than zero (N in step B211), the process proceeds to step B212.

In step B212, the enclosed ball number excess error flag is cleared, and the process proceeds to step B214. On the other hand, in step B213, since there is an abnormal state such as illegally throwing a ball into the board surface, the encapsulated ball number excess error flag is set, and the process proceeds to step B214.
Proceeding to step B214, whether or not there is a request for confirmation of the number of encapsulated balls (that is, when the power release (including power failure recovery), for example, when the error release switch 87 is pressed, the frame opening error has returned to normal. It is determined whether or not the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag that is sometimes set is set.

If there is a request for confirming the number of encapsulated balls (Y in step B214), the process proceeds to step B215. If not (N in step B214), the process jumps and returns without executing all the processes after step B215. .
Then, when the process proceeds to step B215, if the enclosing ball number confirmation wait timer is not "0", "-1" is updated. Next, in step B216, it is determined whether or not the enclosing ball number confirmation wait timer is “0”. If it is not “0” (N in step B216), the process returns. Thereafter, the routine is repeated, and when the enclosing ball number confirmation wait timer becomes “0” (Y in step B216), the process proceeds to step B217, and the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is cleared.

Next, in step B218, it is determined whether or not the minimum enclosed ball number detection switch (that is, the first enclosed ball detection switch 164) is turned on. If it is on (Y in step B218), the process proceeds to step B219. If it is not on (N in step B218), the process proceeds to step B222.
In step B219, it is determined whether or not the maximum enclosing ball number detection switch (that is, the second enclosing ball detection switch 165) is turned on. If it is on (Y in step B219), the process proceeds to step B220. If not on (N in step B219), the process proceeds to step B221.

At this time, if the process proceeds to step B220, both the switches 164 and 165 are turned on, and an encapsulated ball number excess error flag is set since it is an enclosed ball number excess error, and then the process returns.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step B221, the number of encapsulated spheres is in the normal range (that is, not less than the minimum and not more than the maximum). Here, error flags other than the encapsulated ball number excess error flag (that is, an encapsulated ball number insufficient error flag and an encapsulated path abnormality error flag described later) are cleared, and the process returns.

  If the determination in step B218 is N and the process branches to step B222, it is determined whether or not the maximum enclosed ball number detection switch (that is, the second enclosed ball detection switch 165) is turned on. If it is on (Y in step B222), the process proceeds to step B223, and if it is not on (N in step B222), the process proceeds to step B224.

  When the process proceeds to step B223, the second enclosed ball detection switch 165 is turned on even though the first enclosed ball detection switch 164 is not turned on. For example, a clogged ball is generated in the upper passage 403 described above. Since it is considered abnormal, the enclosed path abnormality error flag is set, and then the process returns. When the process proceeds to step B224, the number of encapsulated balls is insufficient (that is, less than the minimum), so the enclosed ball number insufficient error flag is set and the process returns.

  Next, the board ball number error monitoring process B186 in the error / injustice monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B231 whether or not the number of board balls is equal to or greater than a specified number. Here, if it is equal to or greater than the prescribed number (Y in Step B231), the process proceeds to Step B232, and if it is not greater than the prescribed number (N in Step B231), the process proceeds to Step B233.

Here, the prescribed number is, for example, twelve. In general, the fact that there are 12 or more board balls is because the flow of game balls is stagnant and it is considered that there is a problem in the game. The prescribed number is not limited to 12, and the optimum value varies depending on the gaming machine and game playability.
In step B232, the board ball number error flag is set, and the process returns. On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step B233, the board ball number error flag is cleared and the process returns.

  Next, the winning number abnormality monitoring process B183 in the error / injustice monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B241 whether or not a main control command has been received. If no main control command is received (N in step B241), the process directly returns.

  On the other hand, if the main control command is received (Y in step B241), the process proceeds to step B242, and the winning number determined on the game control device 54 side is read based on the main control command, and the winning number and the payout control are read. It is determined whether or not the difference between the safe numbers managed (counted) on the device 80 side is a predetermined number (for example, 5) or more.

If it is determined in step B242 that the difference between the winning number and the safe number is equal to or larger than the predetermined number (Y in step B242), the process proceeds to step B243, and the winning number abnormality flag is set.
After step B243, it is determined in step B244 whether or not the winning number abnormality monitoring timer has become “0”. Even if the difference between the number of winnings and the number of safes exceeds a predetermined number, the winning ball number addition is not immediately stopped and is counted by a winning number abnormality monitoring timer (set to the initial value in step B245 described later). Monitoring is continued until “0” is reached. During a big hit, there may be a case where a game ball is temporarily won in the variable winning device 29 temporarily. Therefore, even if the winning number abnormality flag is set, the prize ball addition is not stopped immediately.

  If the winning number abnormality monitoring timer is not “0” in step B244 (N in step B244), the process proceeds to step B246, and the winning number abnormality monitoring timer is updated by “−1”. On the other hand, if the winning number abnormality monitoring timer is “0” in step B244 (Y in step B244), the process proceeds to step B245, and an initial value (for example, 15 seconds) is set in the winning number abnormality monitoring timer. In subsequent step B246, the winning number abnormality monitoring timer is updated by "-1."

  After step B246, it is determined in step B247 whether or not the winning number abnormality monitoring timer has become “0”. If the timer is not "0" (N in step B247), the process returns and the routine is repeated. If it is determined in step B247 that the winning number abnormality monitoring timer has become “0” by repeating this routine (Y in step B247), the process proceeds to step B248, and a winning ball addition stop flag is set.

This is because the difference between the winning number and the safe number is over a predetermined period (a period set as the initial value of the winning number abnormality monitoring timer (for example, 15 seconds)) after the difference between the winning number and the safe number becomes a predetermined number or more. Since the abnormal period that the number exceeds the predetermined number has continued, it is determined that there is a high possibility of fraud, and a prize ball addition stop flag is set to stop the process of adding the number of winning prizes to the number of possessed balls is there. After step B248, the process returns.
If the difference between the number of winnings and the number of safes is not greater than a predetermined number (for example, 5) in step B242 described above (N in step B242), the process branches to step B249, clears the winning number abnormal flag, and then returns. To do.

  Next, the frame opening error monitoring process B184 in the error / injustice monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B261 whether or not the state of the glass frame opening switch 125 for detecting the opening of the glass frame 13 (front frame) is the same as that in the previous processing. If they are the same (Y in step B261), the process jumps to step B263, and if they are not the same (N in step B261), in step B262, the glass frame opening monitoring timer initial value (for example, After setting (a value corresponding to 100 msec), the process proceeds to step B263.

  Proceeding to step B263, if the glass frame opening monitoring timer is not zero, the value of the glass frame opening monitoring timer is updated by "-1", and then proceeding to step B264, whether the value of the glass frame opening monitoring timer has become zero. judge. If it is zero (Y in step B264), the process proceeds to step B265. If not zero (N in step B264), the process jumps from step B265 to B267 and proceeds to step B268.

  In these steps B265 to B267, the open / close state of the glass frame 13 is monitored by the state of the glass frame open switch 125, and the same state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the initial value of the glass frame open monitor timer. For the first time, the open / closed state of the glass frame 13 is determined in the processing after step B265. Thereby, the determination of the open / closed state of the glass frame 13 can be ensured.

  In step B265, it is determined whether the state of the glass frame open switch 125 corresponds to the open state of the glass frame 13. If it is in the open state (Y in step B265), the glass frame open error flag is set in step B266, and then the process proceeds to step B268. On the other hand, if it is not in the open state, that is, if it is in the closed state (N in step B265), the process jumps to step B267, clears the glass frame open error flag, and then proceeds to step B268.

  Subsequently, in step B268, it is determined whether or not the state of the inner frame opening switch 126 that detects the opening of the inner frame 12 is the same as in the previous process. If they are the same (Y in step B268), the process proceeds to step B270, and if they are not the same (N in step B268), in step B269, the inner frame release monitoring timer initial value (for example, 100 msec) is set. Then, the process proceeds to step B270.

  Proceeding to step B270, if the inner frame release monitoring timer is not zero, an update process ("-1" update) is performed to decrease the value of the inner frame release monitoring timer by one cycle of the timer processing cycle, and then the process proceeds to step B271. It proceeds to determine whether the value of the inner frame release monitoring timer has become zero. If it is zero (Y in step B271), the process proceeds to step B272. If it is not zero (N in step B271), the process jumps to step B275.

  In steps B268 to B271, the open / close state of the inner frame 12 is monitored based on the state of the inner frame opening switch 126, and only when the same state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 100 msec) corresponding to the initial value of the inner frame opening monitoring timer. Then, the open / closed state of the inner frame 12 is determined by the processing after step B272. Thereby, the determination of the open / closed state can be ensured.

  In step B272, it is determined whether the state of the inner frame open detection switch 126 corresponds to the open state of the inner frame 12. If it is in the open state (Y in step B272), the inner frame open error flag is set in step B273, and then the process proceeds to step B275. On the other hand, if it is not in the open state, that is, if it is in the closed state (N in Step B272), after clearing the inner frame open error flag in Step B274, the process proceeds to Step B275.

  In Step B275, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the frame has returned to normal from the frame open error state, that is, whether or not it is the moment when either one frame or both frames are open and both are closed. To do. If it is not the moment of normal return from the frame open error state (N in step B275), the frame open error monitoring process is terminated and the process returns.

  Then, the routine is repeated, and if it is determined in step B275 that it is the moment of normal return from the frame opening error state (Y in step B275), the process proceeds to step B276, and the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is set. When the enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is set here, it is determined that there is a request for confirming the enclosing ball number in the enclosing ball monitoring process (FIG. 31), and the enclosing ball number is confirmed. Next, in step B277, an initial value is set in the enclosing ball number confirmation wait timer, and the frame opening error monitoring process is terminated.

  Next, the frame switch abnormality monitoring process B185 in the error / injustice monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. This frame switch abnormality monitoring process is a process for monitoring abnormalities such as connector disconnection, disconnection, and short circuit of various switches connected to the payout control apparatus 80, as in the case of the game control apparatus 54. The switches to be monitored are the first enclosed sphere detection switch 164, the second enclosed sphere detection switch 165, the out sphere detection switch 161, the first safe sphere detection switch 162, the second safe sphere detection switch 163, and the launching sphere detection switch 160. These are proximity switches such as a polishing inlet switch 421, a pumping inlet switch 432, and a pumping outlet switch 434.

  When this routine is started, first, in step B281, it is determined whether or not the state of the switch abnormality signal is the same as in the previous process. This determination is made based on, for example, a signal output from the proximity interface IC in the peripheral circuit of the CPU 81 in the payout control device 80. If the determination result is the same as in the previous process (Y in step B281), the process proceeds to step B283, and if not the same (N in step B281), the switch abnormality monitoring timer is switched to the switch abnormality monitoring timer in step B282. After setting an initial value (for example, a value corresponding to 100 msec), the process proceeds to step B283.

  In step B283, if the switch abnormality monitoring timer is not zero, an update process ("-1" update) for reducing the value of the switch abnormality monitoring timer by one cycle of the timer processing period is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B284 to determine whether the value of the switch abnormality monitoring timer has become zero. If it is zero (Y in step B284), the process proceeds to step B285, and if it is not zero (N in step B284), the process returns as it is.

  Next, when proceeding to step B285, it is determined whether or not the switch abnormality signal is in an abnormal state. This is to determine whether or not an abnormality such as connector disconnection, disconnection, or short circuit has occurred in the various switches described above. Here, if it is determined that the switch abnormality signal is in an abnormal state (Y in step B285), the process proceeds to step B286 to set the frame switch abnormality flag and then return. On the other hand, if the switch abnormality signal is not in an abnormal state (N in step B285), the process proceeds to step B287 to clear the frame switch abnormality flag, and then returns.

  The frame switch abnormality flag generates a command based on various error flags in a main control command transmission process shown in FIG. 61 to be described later, and sends the command to the game control device 54. The game control device 54 sends the command to the effect control device. 53, and the presentation control device 53 receives this command and uses it, for example, to notify the display device 41 that it is in an error state (for example, an error state that the frame switch is abnormal).

  Next, the frame radio wave fraud monitoring process B187 in the error / fraud monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, at step B291, it is determined whether or not the radio wave sensor (frame) 127 is on. Here, if the radio wave sensor (frame) 127 is on (Y in step B291), the payout control device 80 determines that an illegal radio wave for the frame has been detected, and proceeds to step B292, where the wait timer initial value ( (For example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave illegal weight timer area.

  The reason why the initial value is set in the radio wave improper weight timer is that even if the radio wave sensor (frame) 127 no longer detects the illegal radio wave, it is treated as illegal while the timer value is present. Next, in step B293, the frame radio wave fraud flag is set and the process returns. As a result, when the radio wave sensor (frame) 127 is turned on, according to the main control command transmission process shown in FIG. An error notification is made on the display device 41.

  On the other hand, if the radio wave sensor (frame) 127 is not turned on in step B291 described above (N in step B291), the process branches to step B294, and if the radio wave illegal weight timer is not zero, the value of the radio wave illegal weight timer is determined. Is updated ("-1" update) by reducing the timer processing cycle by one cycle. Then, it progresses to step B295 and it is determined whether the value of the notification timer has become zero. If it is not zero (N in step B295), the process returns as it is. If it is zero (Y in step B295), the frame radio wave fraud flag is cleared in step B296 and the process returns. The notification timer counts a period during which error notification is continued.

  Next, the nighttime frame opening fraud monitoring process B188 in the error / fraud monitoring process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B301 whether or not night monitoring information has been set. If the result of the night monitoring information has already been determined and set based on the output of the inner frame opening switch 126, it is not necessary to perform the same processing twice after the power is turned on. In order to perform the nighttime frame opening fraud monitoring process only once, the determination in step B301 is performed.

  If the night monitoring information has already been set (Y in step B301), the night frame opening fraud monitoring process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the night monitoring information has not been set (N in step B301), the process proceeds to step B302, and it is determined whether or not there is a nighttime frame open. In step B131 of the night monitoring information reception process shown in FIG. 26 described above, the night frame opening / closing information is received from the inner frame opening switch 126 and stored. This night frame opening / closing information includes information (frame opening information) indicating whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 has been detected at night, and the removal monitoring information of the game control device 54. Therefore, the night frame opening is a case where the opening of the inner frame 12 is detected at night.

  Next, in step B302, it is determined whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 is detected at night. If the night frame is open (when the opening of the inner frame 12 is detected at night) (Y in step B302), the process proceeds to step B303, and the timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the night fraud notification timer is set. Save in the nighttime fraud alert timer area. This nighttime fraud notification timer counts the period during which nighttime fraud is reported. In the following step B304, the nighttime illegal flag is set, and the process proceeds to step B305.

When the nighttime illegal flag is set in step B304, according to the main control command transmission process shown in FIG. 61 to be described later, the display controller 53 is finally controlled by the control of the effect control device 53 as in the case of the frame switch abnormality monitoring process. At 41, an error notification (for example, notification of a nighttime frame opening error) is issued.
On the other hand, if there is no nighttime frame release in step B302 (N in step B302), the process proceeds to step B306 to clear the nighttime illegal flag, and the process proceeds to step B305.

  Next, when proceeding to step B305, it is determined whether or not there is a substrate removal. In step B133 of the nighttime monitoring information reception process shown in FIG. 26 described above, the board removal information is received from the inner frame opening switch 126 and stored. This board removal information is removal monitoring information of the game control device 54 (corresponding to a board), and is information indicating whether or not the game control device 54 has been removed at night. Therefore, the board removal is a case where it is detected that the game control device 54 is removed at night.

  Therefore, in step B305, it is determined whether or not removal of the game control device 54 is detected at night. The inner frame opening switch 126 includes a disconnection detecting unit 153 (see FIG. 10). The disconnection detecting unit 153 is configured to supply current from the backup power source 151 to the payout control device 80 → the game control device 54 → the payout control device 80 →. When a route connected in a loop (disconnection monitoring route) such as the inner frame opening switch 126 is flowing, it is detected that the route is not disconnected and the game control device 54 is not removed. When the current of the backup power supply 151 does not flow through this route, it is detected that the game control device 54 has been removed because the route is disconnected.

  In this case, the state in which the disconnection is detected not only can detect the removal of the game control device 54 but also, for example, even when the payout control device 80 is removed, the route detects the disconnection state. It becomes possible. Therefore, in the process of step B305, not only the removal of the game control device 54 but also the removal of the payout control device 80 may be determined. As a result, it is possible to monitor the unauthorized removal of the payout control device 80 at night and perform processing such as error notification.

  If it is determined in step B305 that the substrate is removed (Y in step B305), the process proceeds to step B307, and the timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the nighttime fraud notification timer is saved in the nighttime fraud notification timer area. Next, in step B308, the nighttime illegal flag is set, and the process proceeds to step B309. Here, when the nighttime fraud flag is set, as in the case of step B304 described above, an error notification (for example, a removal error of the game control device 54, for example, is finally displayed on the display device 41 under the control of the effect control device 53. Notification).

On the other hand, if there is no substrate removal in step B305 (N in step B305), the process jumps to step B309. At this time, the nighttime illegal flag is not set.
In step B309, fraud level information is generated from whether or not the nighttime frame is opened, the number of times of opening, and the board removal information. This is performed in order for the payout control device 80 to determine the unauthorized level from the nighttime monitoring information received from the inner frame opening switch 126 and to output the determined unauthorized level to the card unit 200. Note that, as described above, there are 0 to 3 fraud levels.

  Next, the process proceeds to step B310, and the generated information is saved in the night monitoring unauthorized level area. In the following step B311, the night monitoring information setting flag is set, and then the process returns. Thus, by setting the night monitoring information set flag, it is not necessary to perform the same process twice after the power is turned on.

  Next, the main control command reception process B146 in the timer interrupt process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG. This process receives and saves a command transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 80. When this routine is started, first, at step B321, whether there is any game information received. Determine whether or not. If no game information is received (N in step B321), the process ends and the process returns. On the other hand, if there is game information reception (Y in step B321), the process proceeds to step B322, and the type information and prize ball information are read from the game information reception buffer.

As described above, the type information is composed of a data type and a data number, and the prize ball information is composed of the number of prize balls and the number of winning prizes. A more detailed configuration is as follows.
The data type of the type information is the upper 4 bits, 0: no information, 1: start port (including the first and second start ports), 2: large winning port (first large winning port, second large winning port) 3): winning a prize opening (general winning opening), 4: distinguishing types of symbol stop count.

The lower 4 bits represent 0: no information, 1-15: data number for each data type.
On the other hand, the prize ball information is the upper 4 bits, 0: no information, 1-15: the number of prize balls for each data type.
The lower 4 bits represent 0: no information, 1-15: the number of winnings for each type.
Further, the game state information represents various game states such as external information system signal state, radio wave, illegal information such as magnet fraud, and emission stop information.

  After step B322, in a subsequent step B323, it is determined whether or not the type information and prize ball information read from the game information reception buffer is “no information”. If it is determined that there is no information (Y in step B323), the process jumps to step B333 to determine whether or not all commands have been received. In step B333, if all the commands have not been received (N in step B333), the process returns to step B322 and the process is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the commands have been received (Y in step B333), the process proceeds to step B334.

  If it is not “no information” in step B323 described above, that is, if there is information (N in step B323), the process proceeds to step B324, and it is determined whether type information = winning system. This determines whether or not the type information read out from the game information reception buffer and the type information of the prize ball information is information indicating winning at the start opening, the big winning opening, and the winning opening which are winning information. To do.

  In step B324, if the type information = winning system (Y in step B324), the process proceeds to step B325, and a winning ball number area corresponding to the type of winning mouth represented by the command is set. Next, the process proceeds to step B326, where it is determined whether or not the number of winning balls is zero. Here, if the number of winning balls is 0 (Y in step B326), there is no number of winning balls this time, so the process jumps to step B333. On the other hand, if the number of winning balls is not 0 (N in step B326), in the following step B327, the value indicating the number of winning balls is written in the new winning ball area, that is, the previous data is overwritten. .

  Next, in Step B328, a winning number area corresponding to the type of winning opening is set, and the process proceeds to the following Step B329 to determine whether or not the winning number = 0. If the number of winnings is 0 (Y in step B329), there is no current winning number, and the process jumps to step B333. On the other hand, if the number of winnings is not 0 (N in step B329), the process proceeds to step B330, and the value of the current winning number is added to the value of the previous winning number region, and the value of the new winning number region is obtained. To do.

  This is a configuration in which the number of winnings is transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 80 during a reception interval of every 200 ms, so there is a possibility that a plurality of commands will be received during 200 ms. Therefore, the number of winning prizes is added. For example, there is a possibility that the game ball may continuously win the winning prize opening while the big winning opening is open during the big hit.

  After step B330, it is determined in step B333 whether reception of all commands has been completed. If all the commands have not been received (N in step B333), the process returns to step B322 and the process is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all commands have been received (Y in step B333), the process proceeds to the next step B334.

  Returning to step B324 described above, if the type information is not a winning system (N in step B324), the process branches to step B331 to determine whether the type information is the number of symbol stops. Here, if the type information = the number of symbol stops (Y in step B331), the process proceeds to step B332, and the value indicated by the data number corresponding to the number of symbol stops in the type information is written in the symbol stop number area. Updated to the latest symbol stop count. After step B332, the process proceeds to step B333.

Also, if the type information is not equal to the symbol stop count in step B331 (N in step B331), the process proceeds to step B333.
Next, when proceeding to step B333, it is determined whether or not reception of all commands is completed. If all the commands have not been received (N in step B333), the process returns to step B322 and the process is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all commands have been received (Y in step B333), the process proceeds to the next step B334.

  In step B333, it is determined that all commands have been received, and when the process proceeds to step B334, it is determined whether or not gaming state information has been received. Here, if no gaming state information is received (N in step B334), the main control command receiving process is terminated. On the other hand, if the game state information is received (Y in step B334), the process proceeds to step B335, and the start address of the game state information storage area is set.

  In the next step B336, the game state information is read from the game information reception buffer, and the read game state information is saved in the start address of the game state information storage area in step B337. Next, in step B338, the address of the game state information storage area is updated to the next address. Thereby, preparation for storing the next game state information is completed.

  Next, in step B339, it is determined whether or not reception of all game state information has been completed. Here, if reception of all game state information has not been completed (N in Step B339), the process returns to Step B336 and is repeated. In this manner, the next information of the plurality of pieces of game state information is read from the game information reception buffer and stored in the game state information storage area designated by the next address (updated address). .

  By repeating such processing, all of the game state information is read from the game information reception buffer and saved at a plurality of addresses in the game state information storage area. As a result, the payout control device 80 knows the latest gaming state (for example, external information system signal state, radio wave, illegal information such as magnet fraud, launch stop information).

  If it is determined in step B339 that reception of all the game state information (a plurality of all game state information) has been completed (Y in step B339), the process proceeds to step B340, and the main control command received flag is set. Thereby, by referring to the set of the main control command received flag, it is possible to confirm that the reception of all the game state information is completed in other processes. After step B340, the main control command reception process is terminated.

  Next, the main control ID reception process B147 in the timer interrupt process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG. This process receives and saves the main control ID transmitted from the game control device 54 to the payout control device 80. When this routine is started, the main control ID is received in step B351. It is determined whether or not there is. Here, if the main control ID is not received (N in step B351), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the main control ID is received (Y in step B351), the process proceeds to step B352, and the head address of the main control ID storage area is set.

  The main control ID storage area is configured so that a plurality of data (for example, a chip code, a manufacturer code, a model code, etc.) of the main control ID can be stored by an address. Therefore, for a plurality of data of the main control ID read from the main control ID reception buffer, addresses for storing in the main control ID storage area are sequentially set from the top.

  Next, in step B353, one of the plurality of data of the main control ID is read from the main control ID reception buffer. The read data is saved at the head address of the main control ID storage area in step B354. In the subsequent step B355, the address of the main control ID storage area is updated to the next address. Thereby, preparation for storing the next main control ID is completed.

  Thereafter, in step B356, it is determined whether or not reception of all data (all of the plurality of data of the main control ID) has been completed. If reception of all data has not been completed (N in step B356), the process returns to step B353 and is repeated. As a result, the next data among the plurality of data of the main control ID is read from the main control ID reception buffer and stored in the main control ID storage area specified by the next address (updated address). By repeating such a loop, all data of the main control ID is read from the main control ID reception buffer and saved at a plurality of addresses in the main control ID storage area.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B356 that all data of the main control ID has been received (Y in step B356), the process proceeds to step B357, and the ID transmission flag is set. As a result, referring to the ID transmission flag, it is possible to confirm that the main control ID may be transmitted in other processes. After step B357, the main control ID reception process is terminated.

  Next, the card unit command reception process B148 in the timer interrupt process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG. In this process, a command (card unit command) transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is received and saved. When this routine is started, first, in step B361, the card It is determined whether or not a unit command has been received.

  If no card unit command is received in step B361 (N in step B361), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if a card unit command has been received (Y in step B351), the process proceeds to step B362, and the head address of the card unit command storage area is set. The card unit command storage area is configured such that the area can be divided by address so that a plurality of card unit commands can be stored. Therefore, for a plurality of card unit commands read from the card unit command reception buffer, addresses for storing in the card unit command storage area are sequentially set from the top.

  Next, in step B363, a command (card unit command; hereinafter the same in this flowchart) is read from the card unit command reception buffer, and in step B364, the read command is saved at the start address of the card unit command storage area. . In the subsequent step B365, the address of the card unit command storage area is updated to the next address. This prepares you to save the next command.

  In step B366, it is determined whether or not reception of all commands (all of a plurality of commands existing in the card unit command reception buffer) has been completed. If reception of all commands has not been completed (N in step B366), the process returns to step B363 and the loop is repeated. As a result, the next command is read from the card unit command reception buffer and stored in the card unit command storage area designated by the next address (updated address). By repeating such a loop, all commands existing in the card unit command reception buffer are read from the card unit command reception buffer and saved at a plurality of addresses in the card unit command storage area.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step B366 that all card unit commands have been received (Y in step B366), the process proceeds to step B367, and the card unit command received flag is set. As a result, by referring to the set of the card unit command received flag, it is possible to confirm that all card unit commands have been received in other processes. Thereafter, after step B367, this process is terminated.

  Next, the firing control process B149 in the timer interrupt process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B371, a firing permission condition setting process is performed. This sets conditions for enabling the launch of a sphere, and details will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, in step B372, it is determined whether or not the firing is permitted. This firing permission state is determined based on a later-described firing permission state flag (FIG. 42). Here, if it is determined that it is in the firing permission state (the firing permission state flag is set) (Y in step B372), the process jumps to step B374 and updates the launch control timer by "+1".

  Next, in step B375, it is determined whether or not the firing control timer is equal to or greater than an upper limit value (for example, 600 ms). If it is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (Y in step B375), the firing control timer is cleared to 0 in step B376. Thereafter, the process proceeds to Step B377. On the other hand, if the firing control timer is not greater than or equal to the upper limit value (N in step B375), the process jumps to step B377. That is, the firing control timer counts a period of one cycle (600 ms) and is repeated every time the upper limit value (600 ms) is reached.

  In step B377, the firing control timer determines whether it is the ball feed timing. In the launch control, the launch control is performed at an interval of one cycle of 600 ms (launching a ball once every 600 ms) (because there is a launch limit of 100 shots per minute). The operation timing is set to be 100 ms on and 500 ms off from the starting point of one cycle (600 ms), and the operation timing of the firing solenoid 173 is set to be off after turning on 200 ms after 300 ms from the starting point of one cycle (600 ms). Is set.

  Therefore, the on-operations of the ball feed solenoid 172 and the firing solenoid 173 are all completed by the timing of 500 ms from the start point in one cycle (600 ms), and for the remaining 100 ms (100 ms before the end point). During the period, the ball feed solenoid 172 and the firing solenoid 173 are off.

  In step B377, it is determined whether or not the firing control timer is a ball feeding timing, that is, whether or not it is a timing from the starting point of one cycle (600 ms) to 100 ms. Here, if the firing control timer is not the ball feed timing (N in Step B377), the process proceeds to Step B378, where the off data of the ball feed solenoid 172 is set, and then the process proceeds to Step B379. On the other hand, if the firing control timer is the ball feed timing (Y in step B377), the process proceeds to step B380, the ON data of the ball feed solenoid 172 is set, and then the process proceeds to step B379.

  Then, when proceeding to Step B379, it is determined whether or not the firing control timer is the firing on timing, that is, whether or not it is the timing from the elapse of 300 ms from the start of one cycle (600 ms) to the elapse of 200 ms. Here, if the firing control timer is not the firing timing (N in Step B379), the process proceeds to Step B381, the off data of the firing solenoid 173 is set, and then the process returns. On the other hand, if the firing control timer is the firing timing (Y in step B379), the process proceeds to step B382, the on-data of the firing solenoid 173 is set, and then the process returns.

  On the other hand, if the firing is not permitted in step B372 described above (N in step B372), the process proceeds to step B373, and it is determined whether or not the firing control timer is “0”. If the firing control timer is not “0” (N in Step B373), the process proceeds to Step B374, and the processes after Step B374 are executed as described above. On the other hand, if the firing control timer is “0” (Y in step B373), the process branches to step B383 to set the off data of the ball feed solenoid 172, and the off data of the firing solenoid 173 is set in step B384. And then return.

  Next, the launch permission condition setting process B371 in the launch control process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B391, it is determined whether or not the card unit connection is OK. If it is OK (Y in step B391), the process proceeds to step B392, and if not OK (N in step B391), the process proceeds to step B404.

  In step B391, the card unit 200 and the dispensing control device 80 communicate regularly (for example, every 200 ms) from when the power is turned on via the card unit connection terminal plate 52. If, for example, the card unit connection confirmation flag indicating that the card unit 200 is powered on and connected to the payout control device 80 is set, it is determined that the card unit connection confirmation is OK. Is done.

If the process proceeds to step B404, since the card unit connection is not OK, the firing permission state flag is cleared, and the routine is terminated as a state in which the ball is not permitted to be fired.
On the other hand, if the card unit connection is OK in step B391 (Y in step B391), each condition from step B392 to step B402 is determined. If all the conditions are satisfied, the last step B403 Then, the routine is ended by setting the firing permission state flag to permit the firing of the ball.

  In the determination processes in steps B392 to B402 shown below, if the determination result is positive in each determination, the process proceeds to step B404 without executing the subsequent determination process. On the other hand, if the determination result in each of the determinations in steps B393 to B402 is negative, the next determination process is sequentially executed. If the determination result in step B402 is negative, the process proceeds to the last step B403.

  Here, in step B392, it is determined whether or not a firing stop instruction has been received in determining whether or not a firing stop instruction has been received. In step B393, it is determined whether or not the number of balls is zero. In step B394, it is determined whether counting is in progress. In step B395, it is determined whether or not the account is being settled based on a later-described settlement control process number and a settlement flag. In Step B396, it is determined whether or not a break is in progress, based on a break control process number and a break flag described later. In step B397, it is determined whether or not an encapsulated ball number shortage error has occurred by using the above-mentioned enclosed ball number shortage error flag. In Step B398, it is determined whether or not an encapsulated ball number excessive error is occurring based on the above-mentioned enclosed ball number excessive error flag.

  Next, in step B399, it is determined based on the above-mentioned enclosure path abnormality error flag whether or not an enclosure path abnormality error is occurring. In step B400, determination is made based on whether or not the frame is being opened (the inner frame 12 is being opened) (the above-mentioned nighttime illegal flag). In step B401, it is determined whether an illegal act is occurring or not, based on an error command relating to fraud such as magnet fraud. In step B402, it is determined whether or not the number of encapsulated balls is being checked, and whether or not the above-mentioned enclosing ball number confirmation request flag is set. In step B404, the process returns after clearing the firing permission state flag. On the other hand, in step B403, the process returns after setting the firing permission state flag.

  Next, although details of the polishing apparatus control process B150 in the timer interruption process (FIG. 27) are omitted, this polishing apparatus control process operates the polishing apparatus 406 only for a certain period when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, for example. In this polishing period when the power is turned on, the automatic firing state, which is omitted in the above-described firing control process in FIG. 41, is switched. .

  Then, the lower passage conversion solenoid 410S is switched to the polishing side, and the lower passage conversion member 410 opens the polishing inlet passage 419 (the enclosed sphere flows into the polishing device 406), and the ball in the lower passage 401 (from the out passage 431 to the lower portion). The sphere that has flowed into the passage 401 is caused to flow into the polishing device 406 by gravity. At this time, polishing is performed by operating the polishing motor 412 for a predetermined time. Not only when the power is turned on but also during the game, the lower passage conversion solenoid 410S is switched to the polishing side so that the lower passage conversion member 410 opens the polishing inlet passage 419 and the ball in the lower passage 401 (out passage 431). The sphere that has flowed into the lower passage 401 from the flow into the polishing device 406 by gravity can be polished at a predetermined timing.

  Next, the lifting device control process B151 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, at step B441, a feed inlet switch for detecting whether or not there is an input of the lift inlet switch 432 (see FIG. 4), that is, the inflow of a ball into the lifting device 402. It is determined whether or not the detection signal rises at 432. Here, if there is an input of the lift inlet switch 432 (Y in Step B441), the number of lifted balls is updated by "+1" in Step B442, and then the process proceeds to Step B443.

  On the other hand, if there is no input of the feed inlet switch 432 in step B441 (N in step B441), the process jumps to step B442 and proceeds to step B443. In step B443, it is determined whether or not the on state of the pumping inlet switch 432 is continued for a predetermined time, that is, whether or not the on state is continued based on the level of the detection signal at the pumping inlet switch 432. Here, if the on state of the feed inlet switch 432 continues for a predetermined time (Y in Step B443), it is determined that there is an abnormality (for example, a ball clogging or the like), and the process branches to Step B457. When branched to step B457, as will be described later, stop data of the lifting motor 433 is finally set (step B456), and the lifting motor 433 is stopped.

  On the other hand, if the on state of the feed inlet switch 432 has not continued for a predetermined time in Step B443 (N in Step B443), the process proceeds to Step B444, and it is determined whether or not there is an input of the feed outlet switch 434. In step B444, it is determined that there is an input at the rising edge of the detection signal.

  If there is an input from the lifting outlet switch 434 (Y in step B444), the number of pumped balls is updated by "-1" in step B445, and then the process proceeds to step B446. On the other hand, if there is no input of the lift outlet switch 434 (N in Step B444), the process jumps to Step B445 and proceeds to Step B446.

  When the process proceeds to step B446, it is determined whether or not the on / off state of the feed outlet switch 434 continues for a predetermined time. Here, if the pumping outlet switch 434 remains on for a predetermined time (Y in Step B446), it is determined that there is an abnormality (for example, a ball clogging or the like), and the process branches to Step B457. When branched to step B457, as will be described later, stop data for the lifting motor 433 is finally set (step B456), and the lifting motor 433 is stopped.

  On the other hand, if the ON state of the pumping outlet switch 434 has not continued for a predetermined time (N in Step B446), the process proceeds to Step B447, and it is determined whether the number of pumped balls = 0. If the number of raised balls is not 0 (N in step B447), the process proceeds to step B448, and the processes after step B448 are executed. If the number of raised balls = 0 (Y in step B447), the process jumps to step B457. When the process branches to step B457, the lifting motor 433 is finally stopped.

  Proceeding to step B448, it is determined whether or not the lifting device 402 is in operation. Here, if the lifting device 402 is not in operation (N in Step B448), a subsequent flag is set in Step B449. In step B450, the lifting motor monitoring timer is cleared to 0, and then the process proceeds to step B451. The process in step B449 is performed only once when the lifting device 402 starts to move, and is an initial setting when the operation of the lifting device 402 is started. On the other hand, if the lifting device 402 is in operation (Y in Step B448), the process jumps to Step B451.

  In step B451, rotation data of the lifting motor 433 is set. Thereby, the feed motor 433 is rotated. In step B451, rotation data of the lifting motor 433 is set, but when the lifting motor 433 has an abnormality, the stop data is overwritten on the rotation data.

  Next, in step B452, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lifting motor switch 435 that detects the operation of the lifting motor 433. If there is an input to the lifting motor switch 435 (Y in step B452), the lifting motor monitoring timer for monitoring the abnormality of the lifting motor 433 is cleared to 0 in the following step B453. Thereafter, in step B454, the lifting motor monitoring timer is updated by “+1”. The lifting motor monitoring timer stops updating at a specified value described later.

  Next, in step B455, it is determined whether or not the lifting motor monitoring timer is equal to or greater than a specified value (reference value for determining abnormality of the lifting motor 433). If the lifting motor monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the specified value (N in step B455), the lifting device control process is terminated and the process returns. Thereby, the enclosing ball is continuously lifted.

  On the other hand, if the lifting motor monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the specified value (Y in step B455), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the lifting device 402 (for example, a ball clogging, etc.), and the process proceeds to step B456. Set stop data. As a result, the rotation of the lifting motor 433 is stopped. After step B456, the lifting device control process is terminated and the process returns.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step B443 described above that the pumping inlet switch 432 remains on for a predetermined time, and in step B446 that the pumping outlet switch 434 is switched on for a predetermined time. When the number of lifted balls is determined to be 0 in step B447, in any case, after jumping to step B457 and clearing the lifter operating flag, the process proceeds to step B456 to stop data of the lift motor 433. Set. As a result, the enclosing ball does not flow into the lifting device 402.

  Next, the number-of-balls management process B152 in the timer interruption process (payout) will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, at step B461, it is determined whether or not a prize ball addition stop flag is set. If the winning ball addition stop flag is not set (N in step B461), the process proceeds to step B462. On the other hand, if the winning ball addition stop flag is set (Y in step B461), the process jumps to step B472.

  In step B462, the start address of the winning number area is set. The winning number area is configured such that the area can be divided by address so that a plurality of winning numbers can be stored. Therefore, the winning number received from the game control device 54, that is, a prize ball command from the game control device 54 is stored. An address for sequentially storing the number of winnings corresponding to the number of winning balls acquired in response to the number of winning balls in the winning number area is set from the top.

  Next, in Step B463, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning number area is “0”. If it is not “0” (N in Step B463), the value of the winning ball number area corresponding to the winning number area is loaded in Step B464. The number of winning balls associated with winning a prize is such that the first grand prize opening 27a = 13, the starting winning opening 25 = 3, the starting winning opening 26 (Fuden) = 1, the general winning openings 27a to 27d = 10, etc. In this way, since the game control device 54 sends a prize ball command indicating how much and how many prizes have been won, the number of prize balls corresponding to the type of the prize slot is read out in the process of step B464. .

  The reason for performing the process of step B464 is that when there are a plurality of winnings, the display of the number of balls held is not updated at once (see step B465 described later), but the number of balls held increases in units of winning. This is to display the number of held balls.

  Next, the process proceeds to step B465, where the value loaded in step B464 (the number of winning balls this time) is added to the number of balls held to obtain a new number of balls, and in step B466, the number-of-balls display light counter is set to “+1”. Update. In the following step B467, the number of winning balls is saved in the display updated possession ball number storage area corresponding to the light counter. When there is a prize ball accompanying winning, it is necessary to display the change in the number of balls on the number-of-balls display 50, so the value of the number-of-balls display light counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. The number of winning balls for winning is stored in the display updated holding ball number storage area corresponding to the advanced light counter, and the stored number of winning balls is added to the holding ball number for display. The number of balls.

  The display updated number-of-balls storage area is composed of a multi-byte area like a command reception buffer, and the number-of-balls display increases or decreases in the order of writing. That is, the data (number of winning balls) added to the number of holding balls displayed on the holding ball number display 50 is stored in the ring buffer format area in the order of winning.

  Next, the process proceeds to Step B468, and it is determined whether the number of balls updated in Step B465 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (for example, 250,000). Here, if the number is more than the upper limit value (Y in step B468), the process proceeds to step B469, and the upper limit value (250,000) is updated and registered as the new number, and then the process proceeds to step B470. On the other hand, if it is not greater than the upper limit value of the number of balls (N in step B468), the process jumps to step B470 without executing step B469.

  In step B470, the address of the winning number area is updated to the next area. Next, in step B471, it is determined whether or not all the winning number areas have been checked. Here, if all the winning prize number areas have not been checked (N in Step B471), the process returns to Step B463 and is repeated. In this way, the next winning number out of the plurality of winning numbers is read from the winning number area and stored in the winning ball number area corresponding to the winning number specified by the next address (updated address). The value is loaded and added to the number of balls held.

  On the other hand, returning to the above-mentioned step B463, if the value of the winning number area is “0” (Y in step B463), there is no value to be added to the number of balls held, so the process jumps to step B470 and the winning number area The address of is updated to the next area. Thereafter, in step B471, it is determined whether or not all the winning prize number areas have been checked. If it is determined that the check is completed (Y in step B471), the process proceeds to step B472 to perform a count switch monitoring process, and in a subsequent step B473, a count ball use monitoring process is performed. These steps B472 and B473 perform processing for monitoring the counting switch 36 (see FIG. 5) and monitoring the use of the counting ball.

In step B474, data corresponding to the number of balls is saved in the test signal output data area. In the subsequent step B475, data corresponding to the number of counted balls is saved in the test signal output data area, and then the present process is terminated.
According to such a number-of-balls management process, the number of balls held and the number of balls for display are equal to the number of prize balls as long as the number of balls does not exceed the upper limit of the number of balls by the processing of steps B465 to B468. To increase. The number of balls for display is data in a storage area of the RAM 83 (see FIG. 5) that stores the number of balls to be displayed on the ball number display 50.

  Next, the count switch monitoring process B472 in the number-of-balls management process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B481 whether or not the counting switch 36 is on. If the counting switch 36 is on (Y in step B481), it is determined that the player intends to count the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 36, and the process proceeds to step B482 to start the counting stop timer. Is set to an initial value (for example, 2 seconds).

  Next, in step B483, the count switch-on timer is updated (incremented) by “+1”. In subsequent step B484, a count switch-on timer that counts the elapsed time from when the player presses the count switch 36 is displayed. It is determined whether or not the upper limit value is exceeded. Here, the upper limit value corresponds to a time during which all the number of balls can be counted, and is set to 6 seconds, for example. If the count switch-on timer is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (Y in step B484), the process proceeds to step B485, and the count switch-on timer is kept at the upper limit value. After step B485, the process proceeds to step B486. On the other hand, if the count switch-on timer is less than the upper limit value (N in step B484), the process jumps to step B485 and proceeds to step B486.

  In step B486, it is determined whether or not the count switch-on timer is equal to 1 second corresponding to the minimum time when the count switch 36 is pressed to count the number of balls. If the count switch-on timer is equal to 1 second (Y in step B486), the process proceeds to step B487. Step B486 is a determination for setting the number of units of counting in the processing after step B487 when the counting switch-on timer is 1 second. Accordingly, the operation of the counting switch 36 in a time shorter than 1 second is invalidated to prevent malfunction, and the counting of the number of balls is not started. On the other hand, if it is determined that the count switch-on timer is not 1 second (N in step B486), the unit number of count is not set this time, and the process jumps to step B490.

In the processing after step B487, the number of units for counting is determined as follows. The counting unit number is a numerical value (hereinafter referred to as a unit counting value) representing how many balls are counted in units of one second, for example.
In step B487, it is determined whether the number of balls is “1000” or less. Here, if the number of possessed balls is “1000” or less (Y in Step B487), the process branches to Step B501, sets “50” as the unit count value, and then proceeds to Step B490. On the other hand, if the number of held balls exceeds “1000” (N in Step B487), the process proceeds to Step B488, and it is determined whether or not the number of held balls is “10000” or less.

  Here, if the number of held balls is “10000” or less (Y in step B488), the process branches to step B502, “100” is set as the unit count value, and the process proceeds to step B490. On the other hand, if the number of held balls exceeds “10000” (N in Step B488), “1000” is set as the unit count value in Step B489, and the process proceeds to Step B490.

  Next, when the process proceeds to step B490, it is determined whether or not the number of balls possessed is “0”. Here, if it is not “0” (N in step B490), the process proceeds to the process after step B491, and the number of balls is counted. On the other hand, if the number of balls is “0” (N in step B490), the process returns and no counting is performed.

  When the process proceeds to step B491 and subsequent steps, first, in step B491, it is determined whether or not the count switch-on timer has a timing value for performing unit counting. The value of the timing for performing the unit counting is that the operation of the counting switch 36 is invalidated because the operation of the counting switch 36 is invalidated when the minimum time for counting the number of balls held by pressing the counting switch 36 is less than 1 second. This is a valid time of 1 second or more and a timing with 0.5 second as a unit break after 1 second.

  In this way, when the count switch is pressed every 0.5 seconds, the value of the timing for performing unit counting is set, and when the operation of the count switch 36 is effective for 1 second or longer, The counting unit is set every second by the pressing time of the counting switch 36 and the number of balls held. However, no matter how many balls are held, the count switch 36 is pressed for 6.0 seconds, and all are counted.

  Next, in step B491, it is determined whether or not the count switch-on timer has a timing value for performing unit counting. Here, if the count switch-on timer is a value for timing of unit counting (Y in step B491), it is determined that the number of balls possessed by the operation of the count switch 36 is determined, and the process proceeds to the subsequent step B492, where It is determined whether or not the number of balls is less than the unit count value. Here, if the number of balls held is less than the unit count value (Y in step B492), the process proceeds to step B493, and the number of balls held at that time is replaced with the unit count value. This is to simplify the counting process by replacing the remaining number of balls at that time with the unit count value when the number of balls remaining is less than the unit count value.

  After step B493, the process proceeds to step B494. On the other hand, if the number of balls possessed is not less than the unit count value in step B492 (N in step B492), the process jumps to step B493 and proceeds to step B494. In step B494, “counting ball number + unit count value” is set as the counting ball number, and this is stored in the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80. In the following step B495, “the number of balls held−unit count value” is set as the number of balls held this time, and this is stored in the RAM 83 of the payout controller 80. Thus, in the present embodiment, both the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls are managed by the payout control device 80. Therefore, the card unit 200 is simply transmitted with the data of the number of balls held and the number of balls counted.

  Next, the process proceeds to step B496 to update the possession ball number display light counter by “+1”. In the subsequent step B497, after “-unit count value” is saved in the display updated possession ball number storage area corresponding to the light counter, the process returns. This is because, when there is a subtraction of the number of balls that accompanies counting, it is necessary to display the change in the number of balls in the number display 50, so that the value of the number display light counter is set to “+1”. Update (increment) and advance, store the updated number of balls for storage corresponding to the advanced light counter, and store the subtraction number (unit count value) of the number of balls with the count, and display the stored unit count value for display The number of updated holding balls for display is obtained by subtracting from the number of holding balls.

  Next, a description will be given of a case in which the determination at each step branches to a route different from that described above. Returning to step B481 described above, if the count switch 36 is not on (N in step B481), it is determined that the player has not pressed the count switch 36, or has pressed the count switch 36 but has been released for a moment, The process branches to step B498, and if the firing stop timer during counting is not “0”, the timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”.

  By the way, when the player presses the counting switch 36 to start counting the number of balls, the counting of the number of balls can be continued even if the counting switch 36 is turned off for a moment during counting. A grace period (for example, 2 seconds) is provided. In order to count this grace period, in step B498, the counting stop timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”.

  After step B498, it is determined in subsequent step B499 whether or not the counting stop timer is “0”. If the counting stop timer is not “0” (N in step B499), the process returns and the routine is repeated. N in Step B499 is a case where the above-described grace period is counted.

  On the other hand, if the counting stop timer during counting is “0” (Y in step B499), it is determined that the player has not pressed the counting switch 36, and the process proceeds to step B500, where the counting switch on timer is cleared to “0”. And return. In this case, since the player has not pushed the counting switch 36 at all, the counting of the number of balls is not started.

  Next, returning to the above-mentioned step B491, if it is determined that the count switch-on timer is not the timing value for performing unit counting (N in step B491), the process branches to step B503, where the count switch-on timer counts all the counts. It is determined whether or not it is a timing value. For example, when the count switch 36 is pressed for 6.0 seconds, the timing for performing the total counting is that all balls are counted regardless of the number of balls held. (6.0 seconds).

  Therefore, in step B503, if the pressing time of the counting switch 36 is not the timing value for performing the total counting (N in step B503), the routine is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the pressing time of the counting switch 36 is a value of the timing for performing the total counting (Y in Step B503), the process proceeds to Step B504, where “counted ball number + number of held balls” is set as the counted ball number, and the payout control device 80 Is stored in the RAM 83.

  As described above, when total counting of the number of balls is performed, it is determined in step B503 that the count switch-on timer has a timing value for performing total counting, and the process proceeds to subsequent step B504. In step B504, “counted ball number + number of held balls” is set as the number of counted balls, stored in the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80, and in step B505, the number of held balls is cleared to “0”, and then returned. To do. By the processing from step B503 to step B505, all of the number of balls possessed is counted and saved in the counting ball number area, and thereafter, the number of balls possessed is cleared to “0”.

  Next, the counting ball use monitoring process B473 in the held ball number management process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first in step B511, it is determined whether or not a counting ball use command has been received, that is, the counting ball use button 710 is pressed, and the player moves from the counting ball number to the holding ball number. It is determined whether or not a request for movement is requested. If the counting ball use command has not been received (N in step B511), the counting ball use monitoring process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the counting ball use command has been received (Y in step B511), the process proceeds to step B512, and the counting ball use command received flag is cleared.

  Next, in Step B513, it is determined whether or not the counted ball number is “0”. Here, if the counted number of balls is “0” (N in Step B513), it is determined that the movement to the number of held balls cannot be made, and the routine is finished and the process returns. On the other hand, if the number of counted balls is not “0” (Y in step B513), it is determined that the movement to the number of possessed balls is possible, and the process proceeds to step B514 to determine whether the number of counted balls is “100” or more. Determine whether.

  Here, if the counting ball number is “100” or more (Y in Step B514), “100” (100 counting ball number) of the counting ball number is set as the counting ball use number in Step B515. As a result, 100 balls out of the counted number of balls move to the number of balls held. After step B515, the process proceeds to step B516. On the other hand, when the number of counted balls is less than “100” (N in Step B514), the process branches to Step B522, and all the counted balls are counted as the number of counted balls used. Moves to the number of holding balls. After step B522, the process proceeds to step B516.

  When the process proceeds from step B515 to step B516, or when the process proceeds from step B522 to step B516, in step B516, the sum of “the number of held balls + the number of counted balls used” is the designed upper limit value (for example, 250,000). It is determined whether or not it exceeds. Here, if the number of held balls exceeds the upper limit value (Y in step B516), in order to prevent the player's number of held balls and the number of counted balls from disappearing, in step B517, “the number of held balls upper limit value−the number of held balls” "Is updated and registered as the new number of counting balls used, and the process proceeds to step B518. On the other hand, if the sum of “the number of balls held + the number of counting balls used” is less than the designed number of held balls (for example, 250,000) (N in Step B516), the process jumps to Step B518.

  Next, when the process proceeds from step B516 or step B517 to step B518, “number of held balls + counted ball used number” is updated as a new number of held balls in step B518, and in the subsequent step B519, “number of counted balls” -Update the number of counting balls used as a new number of counting balls. In subsequent step B520, the number-of-balls display light counter is updated by “+1”. Next, in step B521, after the “counting ball use number” is saved in the display updated possessed ball number storage area corresponding to the light counter, the process directly returns.

  Next, the ball removal control process B153 in the timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B531, it is determined whether or not the ball removal control timer for counting the time for removing the enclosed ball is “0”. If the ball removal control timer is “0” (Y in step B531), the process proceeds to step B532 to determine whether or not there is a ball removal request. This ball removal request is output, for example, when the ball removal switch 182 is turned on.

  In this embodiment, a magnetic sensor and a small-diameter sphere detection sensor that are managed and controlled by the payout control device 80 are not provided. It is preferable that a ball removal request is issued even when an error occurs when an abnormal sphere (for example, an illegal magnetic sphere or an illegal small-diameter sphere) is detected.

If there is a ball removal request (Y in step B532), the ball removal request flag is cleared in step B533, and in step B534, the ball removal set to the time required for removing the enclosed ball is performed. Set the initial value of the control timer.
Next, in step B535, the ON output data of the upper passage conversion solenoid 436S is set and the process returns.

  By the step B535, the upper passage conversion solenoid 436S is turned on, the upper passage conversion member 436 opens the end of the upper passage 403 (the communication portion with the bypass passage 404), and the sphere in the upper passage 403 is passed to the bypass passage 404. Let it flow. Thereby, the ball of the upper passage 403 is guided to the bypass passage 404, passes through the bypass passage 404, flows into the ball removal passage 405, and finally is collected in the collection box 445, and the ball removal of the encapsulated ball is performed. Done.

  Returning to the above-mentioned step B531, if the ball removal control timer is not “0”, that is, if ball removal is being performed (N in step B531), the process branches to step B536, and the ball removal control timer is set to “ -1 "update. Next, in Step B537, it is determined whether or not the ball removal control timer is “0”. If the ball removal control timer is not “0” (N in step B537), the routine is terminated and this process is repeated.

  By repeating this process, when the ball removal control timer becomes “0” in step B537 (Y in step B537), the process proceeds to step B538, the upper passage conversion solenoid 436S is turned off, and the upper passage conversion member 436 causes the upper passage to change. The end portion of 403 (the communication portion with the bypass passage 404) is closed, and the sphere in the upper passage 403 does not flow into the bypass passage 404. Thereby, the ball removal of the encapsulated sphere is completed. On the other hand, if there is no ball removal request in step B532 (N in step B537), the process jumps from step B532 to step B538, executes the process of step B538, and returns. In this case, the enclosed sphere is not removed.

Next, the settlement control process B154 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.
When this routine is started, first, in step B551, branching is performed according to the adjustment control process number. If the settlement control process number is 0, a settlement start monitoring process (details will be described later) is executed in step B552, and then the process returns.

If the adjustment control process number is 1, an adjustment write completion monitoring process (details will be described later) is executed in step B553, and then the process returns.
If the payment control process number is 2, a payment completion monitoring process (details will be described later) is executed in step B554, and then the process returns. The initial value of the settlement control process number is set to 0, for example, in step B109 of the main process.

  Next, the settlement start monitoring process B552 in the settlement control process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B561, it is determined whether or not a settlement start flag that is set when a “settlement start request” command is received from the card unit 200 is set. Here, if the settlement start flag is not set (N in step B561), the present process is terminated as it is, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the settlement start flag is set (Y in step B561), the process proceeds to step B562, and the settlement start flag is cleared to prepare for the next settlement. Next, in step B563, a settlement in progress flag is set.

  In step B564, the number of possessed balls and the number of counted balls that the player has acquired are all counted, and the “number of possessed balls + the number of counted balls” is the total number of possessed balls possessed by the player. The number of balls held. In other words, when the return button 64 is pressed to request the return of the game card, it is necessary to automatically perform payment based on the “settlement start request” command transmitted from the card unit 200. This is because all the counted balls are counted as the number of balls for display, and the number of balls for display is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  The reason why “the number of held balls + the number of counted balls” is used as the number of holding balls is to display the number of holding balls on the holding ball number display 50 until the settlement is completed. The number of balls for display is stored in a storage area of the RAM 83 that stores the number of balls to be displayed on the ball number display 50.

  Thereafter, in step B565, the timer initial value (for example, 2 seconds) of the settlement write completion monitoring timer, which is a timer for providing a timeout in the response from the card unit 200, is set. Next, in step B566, the settlement write completion monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and then the process returns. Therefore, in this processing, the next time, the routine proceeds to the routine of payment write completion monitoring processing.

  Next, the settlement write completion monitoring process B553 in the settlement control process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B571, the settlement write completion monitoring timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”. Next, in step B572, it is determined whether or not the timer has reached “0”. If the settlement write completion monitoring timer is not “0” (N in step B572), the process proceeds to step B573, for example, whether the settlement write completion is received from the card unit 200, for example, the card unit 200. For example, it is determined whether or not a settlement write completion command has been received. If payment completion is not received from the card unit 200 (N in step B573), the process returns and the routine is repeated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that payment completion is received from the card unit 200 (Y in step B573), the process proceeds to step B574, where the number of held balls is cleared to “0” and the number of counted balls is set to “0” in step B575. clear. This is because the card unit 200 side completes the payment writing (that is, records all the total number of balls (the number of balls held and the number of balls counted) on the game card) and the record is held on the game card. This is because it is possible to clear the number of balls held and the number of counted balls to “0”. Next, in step B576, the settlement end monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and the process returns. Therefore, in this process, the process proceeds to the settlement end monitoring process routine next time.

  Returning to the above-mentioned step B572, if the payment writing completion monitoring timer is “0” (Y in step B572), the payment is completed from the card unit 200 within a predetermined time counted by the payment writing completion monitoring timer. This means that writing completion has not been received. Therefore, the process branches to step B577 to set the settlement write failure flag. Next, in step B578, the settlement in progress flag is cleared. Further, in step B579, the settlement start monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, and the process returns. Therefore, in this processing, the next time is a transition to the settlement start monitoring processing routine.

  Next, the settlement end monitoring process B554 in the settlement control process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B581, it is determined whether or not a settlement end flag is set. This settlement end flag is set when a “settlement end request” command is received from the card unit 200. Here, if the settlement end flag is not set (N in step B581), this process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the settlement end flag is set (Y in step B581), the process proceeds to step B582, and the settlement end flag is cleared to prepare for the end of the next settlement. Next, in step B583, the settlement in progress flag is cleared.

  In step B584, the card removal waiting flag is cleared. The card removal waiting flag is set in “card return response processing” described later, and is set in the process of paying out the game and returning the game card from the card unit 200, but the checkout ends. Sometimes cleared.

  Next, in step B585, a timer initial value (for example, 2 seconds) is set in a ball count display timer for providing a time for displaying the ball count on the ball count display 50 at the time of payment. This ball number display timer is configured to end a blinking display of the number of balls held on the ball number display 50 when the time is up (see FIG. 57 to be described later). By setting an initial value in the display timer, the number of balls that have been settled in the LED of the number-of-ball display 50 is flashed and displayed for a predetermined time (initial value of the timer) even after the game card is ejected from the card unit 200. You can make preparations.

  Thereafter, in step B586, after the settlement start monitoring process number is set in the settlement control process number, the process returns as it is. Therefore, in this processing, the next time is a transition to the settlement start monitoring processing routine.

  Next, the break control process B155 in the timer interruption process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B591, branching is performed based on the break control process number. That is, if the break control process number is 0, a break start monitoring process (described later in detail) in step B592 is executed, and then the process returns.

  If the break control process number is 1, a break end monitoring process (described later in detail) is executed in step B593, and then the process returns. The initial value of the break control process number is set to 0, for example, in step B109 of the main process described above.

  Next, the break start monitoring process B592 in the break control process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B601, it is determined whether or not a break start flag that is set when a “break start request” command is received from the card unit 200 is set. Here, if the break start flag is not set (N in step B601), the present process is terminated as it is, and the process returns.

  On the other hand, if the break start flag is set (Y in step B601), the process proceeds to step B602, and the break start flag is cleared to prepare for the next break. Next, a break flag is set in step B603. When the break flag is set, control for displaying “breaking” on the screen of the operation display device 60 is executed by a process not shown in the figure, and the player or employee is informed that the break is in progress. Is done. On the other hand, when the break flag is cleared, the indication “breaking” disappears, and it is notified that the break has ended.

  Next, in step B604, after the break end monitoring process number is set in the break control process number, the process returns. Therefore, in this process, the next process is shifted to a break end monitoring process routine.

  Next, the break end monitoring process B593 in the break control process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B611, it is determined whether or not a break end flag that is set when a “break end request” command is received from the card unit 200 is set. If the break end flag is not set (N in step B611), the break end monitoring process is terminated and the process returns.

On the other hand, if the break end flag is set (Y in step B611), the process proceeds to step B612, and the break end flag is cleared to prepare for the next break end. Next, in step B613, the break flag is cleared.
Next, in step B614, the break start monitoring process number is set in the break control process number, and then the process returns. Therefore, in this processing, the next time is shifted to a break start monitoring processing routine.

  Next, the LED editing process B156 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B621, an error display LED editing process is executed. In subsequent step B622, the number-of-balls LED editing process is executed. In step B623, the counting ball number LED editing process is sequentially executed, and then the process returns.

  In the error display LED editing process in step B621 described above, setting of display data for turning on or blinking the error notification LED 203 arranged in the payout control device 80 when a predetermined error occurs is executed (see FIG. 56 described later). . In addition, in the number-of-balls LED editing process in step B622, setting of display data for performing various displays on the number-of-balls display 50 is executed (see FIG. 57 described later). Further, in the counting ball number LED editing process in step B623, setting of display data for performing various displays on the counting ball display 37 is executed (see FIG. 58 described later).

  Next, the error display LED editing process B621 in the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B631, whether or not any error is occurring among various errors such as opening of the inner frame 12, removal of the game control device 54, fraudulent radio waves, encapsulated ball abnormality, etc. Determine.

  If any error is occurring (Y in step B631), the process proceeds to step B632, and the display data of the error having the highest display priority among the generated errors is set. For example, if errors such as opening of the inner frame 12, removal of the game control device 54, and an enclosed ball abnormality have occurred as some kind of error, the error regarding removal of the game control device 54 is considered to be the error that needs to be dealt with most. . Therefore, the removal error of the game control device 54 is set as the display data of the error having the highest display priority. As a result, the error notification LED 203 arranged in the payout control device 80 blinks (or lights up) as an occurrence error of the game control device 54. Then, after step B632, the process returns.

  On the other hand, if any error is not occurring (N in step B631), the process branches to step B633 to set display data at normal time. Thereby, it is notified that it is normal, that is, no error has occurred. Then, after step B633, the process returns.

  Next, the number-of-balls LED editing process B622 in the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B641 whether or not a card unit unconnected error has occurred, for example, based on a card unit connection confirmation flag, as in step B391 described above. If an error is occurring (Y in step B641), the process proceeds to step B648. On the other hand, if no error is occurring (N in step B641), the process proceeds to step B642.

  Then, when proceeding to step B642, it is determined whether an abnormal error relating to the encapsulated system switch (launched ball detection switch 160, out-ball detection switch 161, first encapsulated ball number detection switch 164, second encapsulated ball number detection switch 165) is occurring. To do. If an abnormal error is occurring (Y in step B642), the process proceeds to step B648. On the other hand, if an abnormal error is not occurring (N in step B642), the process proceeds to step B643. In step B648, display data for displaying a notification of an enclosed system switch abnormality error or a card unit non-connection error is set by the ball count indicator 50, and the process returns.

  In Step B643, for example, it is determined based on the above-described checkout flag whether the checkout is in progress (including a checkout or waiting for a game card removal). If settlement is in progress (Y in step B643), the process proceeds to step B649. On the other hand, if payment is not in progress (N in step B643), the process proceeds to step B644.

  In step B649, it is determined whether or not payment write completion is waiting. Here, if payment writing is waiting to be completed (Y in step B649), the process proceeds to step B650, and display data for moving and blinking the number of balls on the ball number display 50 (ball number display movement blinking data). ) And return. Thereby, while waiting for the completion of payment writing, the number of balls held on the number-of-balls display 50 moves and blinks.

  If it is not waiting for the completion of payment writing in step B649 (N in step B649), the process branches to step B651, and display data for displaying the number of balls blinking on the ball number display 50 (number of balls held display). Set blinking data) and return. As a result, even when the payment is in progress, when the payment writing is not waiting for completion (that is, when the writing to the game card is completed), the number of balls held on the ball number display 50 blinks. become.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step B644, it is determined whether the value of the number-of-balls display timer is not zero. If it is not zero, that is, if the time is not up (Y in step B644), the process branches to step B652. On the other hand, if it is zero, that is, if the time is up (N in step B644), step B645 is reached. Proceed to The number-of-balls display timer is a timer that is set at the end of settlement in step B585 (FIG. 51) in the settlement completion monitoring process described above.

  Thereafter, when the process proceeds to step B652, the number-of-balls display blink data for blinking the number of balls is displayed by the number-of-balls display 50. In the subsequent step B653, the number-of-balls display timer is updated (decrement) by “−1”. Next, in Step B654, it is determined whether or not the value of the number-of-balls display timer has become zero. Here, if it is not zero (N in step B654), the process returns and this routine is repeated. On the other hand, when the value of the number-of-balls display timer becomes zero (counts up) (Y in step B654), the process proceeds to step B655, where the number of balls for display is cleared to zero. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B647, where the turn-off data for turning off the number-of-balls display 50 is set as described later, and then the process returns.

  Until the return button 64 of the operation display device 60 is pressed and the checkout process is started by the processing of Steps B643, B644, B649 to Step B655, the game card is removed and the number-of-balls display timer counts up. During the period from the start of payment to waiting for completion of payment writing, the number of balls held on the ball number display 50 moves and blinks. When the payment writing is completed, the number of balls held on the number-of-balls display 50 flashes.

On the other hand, if it progresses to step B645, it will be determined whether it is resting based on the above-mentioned resting flag, for example. If the user is taking a break (Y in step B645), the process proceeds to step B656. On the other hand, if it is not during a break (N in step B645), the process proceeds to step B646.
In Step B656, the break display data for displaying that the player has a break on the holding ball number display 50 is set, and the process returns.

  When the process proceeds to step B646, it is determined whether or not a game is in progress (a player is seated) based on whether or not a game card is inserted in the card unit 200, for example. Here, if the game is in progress (Y in step B646), the process proceeds to step B657. On the other hand, if the game is not in progress (N in Step B646), the process proceeds to Step B647. A sensor capable of detecting the seating state of the player may be provided, and it may be determined whether or not the game is in progress based on the detection result of the sensor.

  In step B657, the number-of-balls display data setting process (see FIG. 58 described later) for displaying the number of balls on the number-of-balls display 50 is performed, and then the process returns. In step B647, the turn-off data of the number-of-balls display 50 is set and the process returns. In addition, you may make it perform demonstration display with the number-of-balls display 50 instead of light extinction.

  Next, the number-of-balls display data setting process B657 in the number-of-balls LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B661, if the number-of-balls display update timer is not “0”, the timer is updated (decremented) by “−1”. In step B662, it is determined whether or not the number-of-balls display update timer is “0”.

  Here, if the number-of-balls display update timer is “0” (Y in step B662), the process proceeds to the next step B663, whether the number-of-balls display read counter is equal to the number-of-balls display light counter, that is, It is determined whether or not the current number of balls has been read out from the number-of-balls display number storage area storing the number of balls. If the number of possessed balls has not yet been read (N in step B663), the number of possessed balls display read counter is not equal to the number of possessed balls display light counter, and the number of balls currently held from the number of stored balls displayed number storage area. Is read out, the process proceeds to step B664.

  In Step B664, the number-of-balls display read counter is updated (incremented) by “+1”. Subsequently, in step B665, the current updated number is loaded from the updated updated ball number storage area corresponding to the ball number display read counter. Next, in step B666, “the number of balls held for display + the number of updates” obtained by adding the number of updates loaded in step B665 to the number of balls for display is updated to the number of balls for display this time.

  In step B667, data corresponding to the number of updates is saved in the test signal output data area. The number of updates here corresponds to the number of prize balls, and step B667 corresponds to a process of outputting a test signal relating to the addition of the number of prize balls to the number of balls held to the outside. This is to output a test signal relating to the addition of the number of winning balls to the number of balls held in accordance with the update of the number of balls held on the ball holding number display 50.

  Subsequently, the process proceeds to step B668, and the initial value (for example, 300 ms) of the number-of-balls display update timer is saved in the number-of-balls display update timer area. Here, the initial value = 300 m corresponds to an interval for updating the number of balls (the interval of a predetermined period (0.3 seconds)) when the number-of-balls display 50 displays the number of balls held by the player. To do.

  That is, the payout control device 80 stores the real-time change in the number of balls held in the RAM 83 by subtracting the number of balls fired from the number of balls held and adding the number of prize balls by processing based on the game program. Control to continue. However, the update of the number of balls when the number-of-balls display 50 displays the number of balls of the player is different from the case where the RAM 83 updates and stores the number of balls in real time for a predetermined period (for example, Control is performed to update the number of balls held at intervals of 0.3 seconds).

  Then, the process proceeds to step B669, and it is determined whether or not the number of balls for display is “0”. If the number of holding balls is not “0” (N in step B669), the process proceeds to step B670, and LED display data corresponding to the number of holding balls updated in step B666 is set. This is for setting data to be displayed on the LED of the ball holding number display 50 capable of displaying six digits of numbers (the number of balls held) by arranging six 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, if there are 6 LEDs to be displayed, data for 6 digits is set. After step B670, the process returns.

  On the other hand, if the number of holding balls is “0” (Y in step B669), the process branches to step B673, and it is determined whether or not the counted number of balls is “0”. Here, if the counted ball number is not “0” (N in Step B673), the process proceeds to Step B674, and after the blinking display data of the held ball number display “0” is set, the process returns. Thereby, when the number of counted balls is not “0”, the display of the number-of-balls display 50 blinks. On the other hand, if the number of counted balls is “0” (Y in step B673), the process proceeds to step B675, the lighting display data of the number of balls held “0” is set, and the process returns. Thereby, when the counted number of balls is “0”, the display of the number-of-balls indicator 50 is turned on.

  Returning to step B662 described above, if the number-of-balls display update timer is not “0” (N in step B662), the process jumps to step B669. In this case, the display of the previous number of balls is continued by the number-of-balls display 50. However, since the processing of steps B669 and B673-B675 is performed, the presence / absence of the number of balls is counted even if the number of balls is “0”. The display mode of the number-of-balls display 50 differs depending on the number of balls. When the number of counted balls is not “0”, the display of the number-of-balls display 50 flashes “0”, and when the number of counted balls is “0” The indication on the ball number display 50 lights “0”.

  Further, returning to the step B663, if the number of held balls has already been read (Y in step B663), the number-of-ball display lead counter becomes equal to the number-of-ball display light counter, and the number-of-ball display number storage area From this, it is determined that the current number of balls has been read, and the process branches to step B671, where the current number of balls is updated to the number of balls for display. Thereafter, in step B672, data without a prize ball is saved in the test signal output data area. In addition, when performing the process of step B671, in order to prevent a deviation between the display data about the number of balls and the internal data, when there is no data to be added (the number of balls to be added), it is periodically performed. The process to match the number of balls held inside.

  Step B672 corresponds to a process of outputting a test signal relating to the number of prize balls to the outside, and in particular, outputting a test signal relating to the number of prize balls when there is no prize ball number. This is to output a test signal related to the number of winning balls in accordance with the update of the number of holding balls on the holding ball number display 50, but also output data without winning balls to an external test device. It is possible. As a result, the external test apparatus can more reliably capture data relating to the number of prize balls. After step B672, the process proceeds to step B668, and the processes after step B668 are executed.

  Next, the counting ball number LED editing process B623 in the LED editing process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B681 whether or not the number of counted balls is “0”. Here, if the counting ball number is not “0” (N in Step B681), the process proceeds to Step B682, and ON data of the counting ball number LED is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B684. As a result, the counting ball display 37 is turned on. Since the counting ball display 37 displays whether or not there is a counting ball, it is understood that there is a counting ball when it is lit.

  On the other hand, if the counting ball number is “0” in step B681 (Y in step B681), the process proceeds to step B683, and the off data of the counting ball number LED is set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B684. As a result, the counting ball display 37 is turned off, and it can be seen that there is no counting ball.

  Then, when the process proceeds to step B684, the output data of the counting LED corresponding to the counting situation is set, and then the process returns. This is because, as data for controlling the lighting state (including blinking) of the counting LED built in the counting ball display 37 in accordance with the situation such as the presence of the counting ball and the quantity, for example, counting is not possible (the counting ball is No state): Red lighting, counting possible (with counting ball): blue lighting (or blinking), counting: green blinking, etc. are set and the lighting mode (flashing mode) is changed to notify the player To do.

  Next, the main control command transmission process B157 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B691 whether or not a main control command has been received. If no main control command is received (N in step B691), the process branches to step B713. In the present embodiment, in the communication between the card unit 200 and the payout control device 80, the card unit 200 is the primary station, and the communication between the payout control device 80 and the game control device 54 is the game control device. 54 becomes a primary station and performs two-way communication.

  In other words, the payout control device 80 transmits to the game control device 54 based on the command received from the game control device 54. In addition, since both are configured to perform bi-directional communication periodically (for example, every 200 ms), for example, if a command from the primary station does not come to the secondary station, a process for making an abnormality is performed. . Therefore, in this routine, for example, if a command from the game control device 54 does not come to the payout control device 80 for 1 second, the reception of the main control command is confirmed in step B691 in order to perform an abnormal process.

  On the other hand, if the main control command is received in the above-described step B691 (Y in step B691), the process proceeds to step B692, where the glass frame is opened, the inner frame is opened, the winning number is abnormal, the fraud addition is detected, the radio wave is illegal, the switch is abnormal, A command is generated based on various errors such as nighttime frame opening and an illegal flag, and stored (for example, stored in the RAM 83).

  Next, the process proceeds to step B693, and the command generated in step B692 is written in the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer. This gaming machine frame information transmission buffer is a buffer for temporarily storing commands to be transmitted from the payout control device 80 arranged in the machine frame 11 to the gaming control device 54.

  In step B694, a command is generated and stored based on the pressed state of the count switch 36 and the card removal waiting flag. Waiting for card removal refers to a period of waiting for a player to remove a game card when the game card is ejected from the card slot 201 of the card unit 200 at the time of payment.

Next, the process proceeds to step B695, and the command generated in step B694 is written in the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer.
In subsequent step B696, it is determined whether or not the touch sensor 174 is off, whether or not the number of held balls = 0 in step B697, and whether or not the number of counted balls = 0 in step B698. If the touch sensor 174 is off (Y in step B696), the number of held balls = 0 (Y in step B697), and the number of counted balls = 0 (Y in step B691) in B696 to B698, the process proceeds to step B699. .

  This is because the pachinko machine 10 is in operation when the touch sensor 174 is off, the number of held balls is zero, and the number of counted balls is zero because the player does not touch the firing operation handle 18. Therefore, it is determined that energy saving is necessary, and the process proceeds to step B699. Therefore, in step B699, a command with a power saving transition request is generated and stored. Thereby, when a command with a power saving transition request is sent to the game control device 54, the command is sent from the game control device 54 to the effect control device 53, and the display control device 53 controls, for example, the display device 41. The screen becomes energy saving mode and power consumption is reduced.

  Thereafter, after step B699, the process proceeds to step B700. On the other hand, in step B696 to step B698, even one determination that the touch sensor 174 is on (N in step B696), has a number of balls (N in step B697), and has a counted number of balls (N in step B691). If there is, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 10 is operating, so it is determined that energy saving is not necessary, and the process branches to step B701.

  Next, in step B701, a command without a power saving transition request is generated and saved, and then the process proceeds to step B700. As a result, a command without a power saving transition request is sent to the game control device 54, and for example, control such as setting the screen of the display device 41 to the energy saving mode is not performed.

  When the process proceeds from step B699 or step B701 to step B700, in step B700, the command set in step B699 or step B701 is written in the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer. Thereby, the command set in step B699 or step B701 is sent to the game control device 54.

  Next, the process proceeds to step B702, where a command is generated and stored based on the break-related flag and the settlement-related flag. As this checkout-related flag, for example, there is a card removal waiting flag, and a command is generated based on this card removal waiting flag. There is a command for instructing the display device 41 to display a message for prompting the user. Next, the process proceeds to step B703, and the command generated in step B702 is written in the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer.

  In step B704, a command for notifying the number of balls is generated based on the number of balls and stored. Next, the process proceeds to step B705, and the command generated in step B704 is written in the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer. Further, the process proceeds to step B706, where a command for informing the counting ball number is generated and stored based on the counting ball number. Next, the process proceeds to step B707, where the command generated in step B706 is written in the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer, and the process proceeds to step B708.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to adjust the firing strength of the game ball by touching the launch operation handle 18 and fixing the launch volume 171 at a desired position by the player. ing. Therefore, the launch intensity of the game ball can be determined from the position of the launch volume 171.

  Therefore, in the subsequent step B708, a command is generated and stored based on the firing intensity information relating to the position of the firing volume 171 described above. By sending this command to the game control device 54, the effect control device 53 can finally cause the display device 41 to display an effect of displaying the launch intensity of the game ball. Thereby, for example, the current launch intensity can be notified to the player. Further, at the time of payment, it is preferable to notify that the firing volume 171 is urged to return to the initial position.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B709, and the command generated in step B708 is written in the gaming machine frame information transmission buffer. Next, in step B710, an initial value (for example, 1 second) is set in the main control command reception monitoring timer for determining whether or not the main control command has been received. When no command is received within the range of the initial value set in the main control command reception monitoring timer, it is determined that there is an abnormality in receiving the main control command.

  Next, in step B711, the main control command reception abnormality flag is cleared. In step B712, the main control command received flag is cleared, and then the process returns. On the other hand, if the main control command is not received in step B691 (N in step B691), the process branches to step B713 as described above, and the main control command reception monitoring timer must be “0” in step B713. Update “−1”.

  In step B714, it is determined whether or not the value of the main control command reception monitoring timer has become “0”. Here, if it is not “0” (N in Step B714), the routine returns and the routine is repeated. If the value of the main control command reception monitoring timer becomes “0” in the state where no main control command is received (Y in step B714), the main control command reception abnormality flag is set in the subsequent step B715.

  As a result, when the main control command is not received within the range of the initial value set in the main control command reception monitoring timer, the main control command reception abnormality flag is set. If the value of the main control command reception monitoring timer is not “0” (NO in step B714), the routine returns and the routine is repeated. In this process, when the main control command has been received (Y in step B691), the process proceeds to step B692, and the main control command reception abnormality flag is not set.

  Next, the card unit command transmission process B158 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. When this routine is started, it is first determined in step B721 whether or not a card unit command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 has been received. If no card unit command is received (N in step B721), the process branches to step B740.

  On the other hand, if a card unit command is received (Y in step B721), the process proceeds to step B722, and the command is loaded from the card unit request command area. Examples of this command include a communication start request, a communication end request, and a status information request as described above. In this process, the request received from the card unit 200 is read (loaded) from the card unit request command area.

  Next, in step B722, loading is performed from the card unit request command area, and this command is determined in each process of step B723 to step B736. Specifically, in step B723, it is determined whether the command is a recovery request. Note that the recovery request means a recovery request command, and the same applies to the following commands.

  In step B724, it is determined whether the command is a recovery detail request. Similarly, in step B725, it is determined whether the command is a communication start request. In step B726, it is determined whether the command is a communication end request. In step B727, it is determined whether the command is a status information request. In step B728, it is determined whether the command is a card insertion notification. In step B729, it is determined whether the command is a card return notification.

  Subsequently, in step B730, it is determined whether the command is a break confirmation. In step B731, it is determined whether the command is a break start request. In step B732, it is determined whether the command is a break end request. Also, in step B733, it is determined whether the command is payment confirmation. In step B734, it is determined whether the command is a settlement start request. In step B735, it is determined whether the command is a payment end request. Further, in step B736, it is determined whether the command is a count use request.

  As a result of determining the command loaded from the card unit request command area in each processing of step B723 to step B736, if the determination is NO in all steps, the process proceeds from step B736 to step B737. In step B737, it is determined whether the ID transmission flag is set. If the ID transmission flag is set (Y in step B737), a gaming machine ID transmission process is performed in the subsequent step B738. As a result, the main control ID and the payout control ID are transmitted to the card unit 200, respectively. After step B738, the process proceeds to step B739.

On the other hand, if the ID transmission flag is not set in step B737 (N in step B737), the process jumps to step B738 and proceeds to step B739. In step B739, the card unit command received flag is cleared and then the process returns.
Returning to step B721 described above, if no card unit command is received (N in step B721), the process branches to step B740 as described above. In step B740, the card unit command reception monitoring timer is “0”. If not, update “−1”.

  Next, in step B741, it is determined whether or not the value of the card unit command reception monitoring timer has become zero. Here, if it is not zero (N in step B741), the process returns and this routine is repeated. If the value of the card unit command reception monitoring timer becomes zero (counts up) when no card unit command is received (Y in step B741), the card unit command reception abnormality flag is set in the subsequent step B742. And return.

  As a result, if the card unit command is not received within the range of the initial value (set in step B757) set in the card unit command reception monitoring timer, the card unit command reception abnormality flag is set. Become. Note that the determination at step B741 is NO, and if the card unit command has been received in the process of repeating the routine, the determination at step B721 is YES and processing proceeds to step B722, so the card unit command reception abnormality flag is set. Not.

  Next, a case where the determination result is YES in each processing of Step B723 to Step B736 will be described. First, if the command is a recovery request in step B723 (Y in step B723), the process branches to step B743, and after performing a recovery response process (see FIG. 63 described later) for notifying recovery information, the process proceeds to step B757. move on. If the command is a recovery detail request in step B724 (Y in step D724), the process branches to step B744 to perform a recovery detail response process (see FIG. 64 to be described later) for notifying detailed recovery information. Proceed to B757.

  In step B725, if the command is a communication start request (Y in step B725), the process branches to step B745, and communication start response processing (see FIG. 65 described later) for notifying communication start of the payout control device 80 is performed. After that, go to Step B757. If the command is a communication end request in step B726 (Y in step B726), the process branches to step B746 to notify the end of communication of the payout control device 80 (see FIG. 66 described later). Then, the process proceeds to step B757.

  Next, if the command is a status information request in step B727 (Y in step B727), the process branches to step B747 to perform a status information response process (see FIG. 67 described later) for notifying the status information of the pachinko machine 10. Then, the process proceeds to Step B757. If the command is a card insertion notification in step B728 (Y in step B738), the process branches to step B748 to perform card insertion response processing (see FIG. 68 described later) for notifying receipt of the card insertion notification. Thereafter, the process proceeds to Step B757.

  Next, in step B729, if the command is a card return notification (Y in step B729), the process branches to step B749 to perform card return response processing (see FIG. 69 described later) for notifying receipt of the card return notification. Thereafter, the process proceeds to Step B757. If the command is a break confirmation in step B730 (Y in step B730), the process branches to step B750, and a break confirmation response process for notifying the break confirmation result (whether break is possible) (see FIG. 70 described later). Then, the process proceeds to step B757.

  Next, if the command is a break start request in step B731 (Y in step B731), the process branches to step B751, and after performing a break start response process (see FIG. 71 described later) for notifying the break start, Proceed to B757. In step B732, if the command is a break end request (Y in step B732), the process branches to step B752, and a break end response process (see FIG. 72 described later) for notifying the end of the break is performed. Proceed to B757.

  Next, in step B733, if the command is a payment confirmation (Y in step B733), the process branches to step B753, and a payment confirmation response process for notifying the payment confirmation result (whether payment is possible) (see FIG. 73 described later). Then, the process proceeds to step B757. If the command is a settlement start request in step B734 (Y in step B734), the process branches to step B754 to perform a settlement start response process (see FIG. 74 described later) for notifying the settlement start, and then step Proceed to B757.

  Next, if the command is a settlement end request in step B735 (Y in step B735), the process branches to step B755 to perform settlement settlement response processing (see FIG. 75 described later) for notifying settlement termination, and then in step B757. Proceed to In step B736, if the command is a count use request (Y in step B736), the process branches to step B756, and count use response processing (described later) for notifying the use of the count ball (addition to the number of balls held). Then, the process proceeds to step B757.

  When the process proceeds from step B743 to step B756 described above to step B757, an initial value (for example, 3 seconds) is set in the card unit command reception monitoring timer for determining whether or not the card unit command has been received in step B757. When the command is not received within the range of the initial value set in the card unit command reception monitoring timer, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the reception of the card unit command. Next, in step B758, the card unit command reception abnormality flag is cleared, and then the process proceeds to step B737, and the processing similar to that described above is performed after step B737.

  Next, the recovery response process B 743 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, when the communication between the payout control device 80 and the card unit 200 is cut off, the recovery process is performed in order to match the information regarding the games stored in both, but first of all, the above-described step B743 is performed. The recovery response process of the payout control device 80 corresponding to the recovery request from the card unit 200 shown in FIG.

  When this routine is started, first, in step B761, the serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area, and in step B762, the serial number is updated by "+1". Here, the serial number is a serial number in response to a command received from the card unit 200, and is incremented every time a command is transmitted to the card unit 200. Similarly, on the card unit 200 side, the serial number is updated by “+1” at the time of transmission. With this serial number, it is possible to confirm whether there is a transmission / reception failure.

  Next, the process proceeds to step B763, and the serial number updated in step B762 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. In the subsequent step B764, a command of a recovery response code which is a response to the recovery request and means “notify recovery information” is set. In step B765, the command set in step B764 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a recovery response command is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  In step B766, the card ID is loaded from the card ID storage area. This is because the unique ID of the game card transmitted from the card unit 200 at the start of the game (when the card is inserted) is stored in the card ID storage area in the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80 as the card ID. Is read out.

  Next, the process proceeds to step B767, and the data (card ID) loaded in step B766 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the card ID stored at the payout control device 80 at the start of the game (when the card is inserted) is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200.

  In addition, when a game result (the number of balls, etc.) is written in a game card and settled, the card ID stored in the payout control device 80 is sent to the card unit 200, so that the card unit 200 inserts the card ID. It can be compared with the game card ID inside, leading to fraud prevention.

  Next, in step B768, the card insertion time is loaded from the card insertion time storage area. This is because the time when the game card is inserted into the card insertion slot 201 of the card unit 200 is stored in the card insertion time storage area in the RAM 83 of the payout control device 80, so that the card insertion time is read from the card insertion time storage area. It is. In the subsequent step B769, the data (card insertion time) loaded in the step B768 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. Thereby, the card insertion time is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200.

  In step B770, the previous last transmission serial number is loaded from the transmission command storage area. Here, the previous last transmission sequence number is the sequence number of the “status information response” last transmitted to the card unit 200 when the dispensing control device 80 is connected to the card unit 200 last time. In the subsequent step B771, the data loaded in the step B770 (the previous last transmission serial number) is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the previous last transmission serial number is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200.

As described above, in this process, in response to the recovery request from the card unit 200, the card ID stored at the start of the game, the card insertion time, and the last serial number of the “status information response” transmitted to the previous card unit 200 are Processing to transmit to the unit 200 is performed.
Further, the card unit 200 performs the following processing corresponding to this processing.

  In other words, after receiving the recovery response, the card ID and the card insertion time are compared with their own, and if it is OK, the status information stored by itself is checked from the last serial number of the “status information response” and must match. For example, a detailed recovery request is made. When the recovery response is received, the card ID and the card insertion time are compared with the own one, and if it is OK, the status information stored by itself is checked from the last serial number of the “status information response”. Do not request details. If the card ID and the insertion time are different from the own one, there is a possibility that the player is different or illegal, so a detailed recovery request is not made. In the detailed recovery request, the final serial number transmitted to the payout control device 80 and the number added to the number of balls not received by the payout control device 80 are sent.

  Next, the recovery detail response process B744 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. This process is performed in response to the detailed recovery request from the card unit 200 as described above. When this routine is started, first, in step B781, the number of added balls is loaded from the card unit command storage area. In the subsequent step B782, “the number of held balls + the number of added balls” is set as a new “number of held balls”. Here, the number of added balls is data to be added to the number of possessed balls by lending or using counting balls, and corresponds to the amount that the payout control device 80 could not receive.

  In step B783, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area. In subsequent step B784, the serial number is updated by "+1". Here, the serial number is a serial number when responding to a command received from the card unit 200 as described above, and is incremented each time a command is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  In step B785, the serial number updated in step B784 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 200. In step B786, a recovery detail response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is a “recovery detail request”, a recovery detail response command meaning “notify detailed recovery information” is set as the response.

  Next, the process proceeds to step B787, and the command set in step B786 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a recovery detail response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200. Further, the process proceeds to step B788, and various recovery information stored as the previous gaming machine information is loaded and written to the card unit transmission buffer. Thereby, the various recovery information stored as the previous gaming machine information is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B789, where various recovery information is generated as the latest gaming machine information and written to the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, various recovery information generated as the latest gaming machine information is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200. After this step B789, the process returns. The card unit 200 that has received this detailed recovery response updates the information stored in the card unit 200 to the latest gaming machine information received from the payout control device 80.

  As described above, the recovery response process of FIG. 63 and the recovery detail response process of FIG. 64 are executed, so that the communication cannot be normally performed between the payout control device 80 and the card unit 200 due to a communication abnormality or the like. Sometimes, a recovery process for matching data between the card unit 200 and the payout control device 80 is performed in two stages.

  That is, the first stage of recovery in the payout control device 80 is the recovery response process of FIG. 63, and the conditions for data recovery are confirmed by the process of the first stage. This includes a recovery request and a recovery response. The second stage of recovery in the payout control device 80 is the recovery detailed response process in FIG. 64. In this second stage process, if the condition for data recovery is OK, data recovery is performed. . This includes a recovery detail request and a recovery detail response.

  Further, in the first stage of recovery on the card unit 200 side, a recovery request is transmitted to the payout control device 80. As a response process of the payout control device 80, the payout control device 80 transmits a recovery response to the card unit 200. The recovery response includes the last last transmission serial number to the card unit 200, the stored card ID, and the insertion time. Is included.

  Further, in the second stage of recovery on the card unit 200 side, a recovery detail request is transmitted to the payout control device 80. This detailed recovery request includes the previous last transmission serial number to the payout control device 80 and the added ball number data to the number of held balls. Then, as a response process of the payout control device 80 to this, the payout control device 80 adds the number of added balls received from the card unit 200 to the number of held balls, and also sends the previously transmitted various data and the latest various data to the card unit. 200. Thereby, the data of the card unit 200 and the payout control device 80 are matched.

  Next, the communication start response process B745 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B791, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area. In the subsequent step B792, the serial number is updated by “+1”. The function of the serial number is as described above. In the other flowcharts, the serial number function is the same.

  Next, the process proceeds to step B793, and the serial number updated in step B792 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 200. In subsequent step B794, a command of a communication start response code is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is a “communication start request”, a communication start response command meaning “notify start of communication of payout control device” is set as the response. .

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B795, and the command set in step B794 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a communication start response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200. After this step B795, the process returns.

  Next, the communication end response process B746 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B801, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area. In subsequent step B802, the serial number is updated by "+1". The function of the serial number is as described above.

  In step B803, the serial number updated in step B802 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 200. In the subsequent step B804, a command for a communication end response code is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is a “communication end request”, a communication end response command meaning “notify the end of communication of the payout control device” is sent as the response. Set.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B805, and the command set in step B804 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a communication end response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200. After this step B805, the process returns.

  Next, the status information response process B747 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B811, CU (card unit) state information is loaded from the card unit command storage area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B812, and the data loaded in step B801 is saved in the CU (card unit) state information area.

  Next, in step B813, the number of added balls is loaded from the card unit command storage area. In the following step B814, “number of balls held + number of balls added” is set as a new “number of balls held”. Here, the number of added balls is data added to the number of held balls by lending or using counting balls. In step B815, CU (card unit) error status information is loaded from the card unit command storage area.

  In step B816, the data loaded in step B815 is saved in the CU (card unit) error status information area. In step B817, the serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area. In subsequent step B818, the serial number is updated by "+1". Here, the function of the serial number is as described above.

  Next, the process proceeds to step B819, and the serial number updated in step B818 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 200. In the subsequent step B820, a command for the status information response code is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is a “status information request”, a status information response command meaning “notify the gaming machine status information” is set as the response.

  In step B821, the command set in step B820 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a status information response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200. Next, the process proceeds to step B822, where various game machine state information is generated as a response command and written to the card unit transmission buffer. Thereby, various gaming machine state information generated as a response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B823, and all the transmitted response commands are saved. After step B823, the process returns.

  Next, the card insertion response process B748 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B831, the card ID is loaded from the card unit command storage area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B832, and the data (card ID) loaded in step B831 is saved in the card ID storage area. In subsequent step B833, the card insertion time is loaded from the card unit command storage area.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B834, and the data (card insertion time) loaded in step B833 is saved in the card insertion time storage area. Next, in step B835, the serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area. In subsequent step B836, the serial number is updated by “+1”. The function of the serial number is as described above.

  Then, the process proceeds to step B837, and the serial number updated in step B836 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 200. In subsequent step B838, a card insertion response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is “card insertion notification”, a card insertion response command meaning “notification of receipt of card insertion notification” is set as the response.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B839, and the command set in step B838 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a card insertion response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200 to the card unit 200. After this step B839, the process returns.

  Next, the card return response process B749 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B841, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area. In the subsequent step B842, the serial number is updated by “+1”. Next, the process proceeds to step B843, and the serial number updated in step B842 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  In step B844, a card return response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is “card return notification”, a card return response command meaning “notify receipt of card return notification” is set as the response. In subsequent step B845, the command set in step B844 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. Thereby, a card return response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200.

  In step B846, the card ID is loaded from the card unit command storage area. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step B847, and the data (card ID) loaded in step B846 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the loaded card ID is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  Thereafter, in step B848, the card insertion time is loaded from the card insertion time storage area. In the subsequent step B849, the data loaded in the step B848 (card insertion time) is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the loaded card insertion time is transmitted to the card unit 200. Finally, in step B850, a card removal waiting flag is set, and then the process returns.

  Next, the break confirmation response process B750 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B861, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area. In the subsequent step B862, the serial number is updated by “+1”. Next, the process proceeds to step B863, and the serial number updated in step B862 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  In step B864, a break confirmation response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is “break confirmation”, as a response, a break confirmation response command that means “notify break confirmation result (whether break is possible)” is sent. Set. In subsequent step B865, the command set in step B864 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a break confirmation response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200.

  Next, the following determination is performed in each process of Step B866 to Step B872. That is, in step B866, it is determined whether the settlement process is being performed. In step B867, it is determined whether the count switch-on timer = 0. In step B868, it is determined whether an error / injustice is occurring. In step B869, it is determined whether there is a ball on the board surface. In step B870, it is determined whether the touch sensor 174 is on. In step B871, it is determined whether a customer waiting demonstration is in progress. Further, in step B872, it is determined whether the number of held balls = 0.

  In each of the processes of step B866 to step B870, if the determination is NO, step B871 is YES, and step B872 is NO, it is determined that a breakable condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step B873, where a breakable code is set. Set the command. Next, the process proceeds to step B874, and the breakable code command set in step B873 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a breakable code command is transmitted to the card unit 200. After this step B874, the process returns.

  On the other hand, if any one of the processes in steps B866 to B870 described above is YES, it is determined that a breakable condition is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step B874. If even one of the determinations of NO in step B871 and YES in step B872 is satisfied, it is determined that a condition for resting is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step B875.

  Then, when the process proceeds to Step B875, a command for a break impossible code is set. Next, the process proceeds to step B874, and the command of the non-breakable code set in step B875 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a command of a break impossible code is transmitted to the card unit 200. After this step B874, the process returns as it is.

  Next, the break start response process B751 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, a break start flag is first set in step B881. In the subsequent step B882, the serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area. In step B883, the serial number is updated by “+1”. Next, the process proceeds to step B884, and the serial number updated in step B883 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  In step B885, a break start response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is a “break start request”, a break start response command that means “notify break start” is set as a response. Finally, the process proceeds to step B886, and the command set in step B885 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. Thereby, a break start response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200. After step B886, the process returns.

  Next, the break end response process B752 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, a break end flag is first set in step B891. In the subsequent step B892, the serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area. Further, in step B893, the serial number is updated by “+1”. Next, the process proceeds to step B894, and the serial number updated in step B893 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  In step B895, a break end response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is a “break end request”, a break end response command that means “notify the end of break” is set as the response. Finally, the process proceeds to step B896, and the command set in step B895 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a break end response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200. After this step B896, the process returns.

  Next, the settlement confirmation response process B753 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B901, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area. In subsequent step B902, the serial number is updated by "+1". In subsequent step B903, the serial number updated in step B902 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  In step B904, a settlement confirmation response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is “checkout confirmation”, a checkout confirmation response command meaning “notify the checkout check result (whether or not checkout is possible)” is sent as the response. Set. Next, the process proceeds to step B905, and the command set in step B904 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a payment confirmation response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200.

  Next, the following determination is performed in each process of Step B906 to Step B914. That is, in step B906, it is determined whether a break process is in progress. In step B907, it is determined whether the count switch-on timer = 0. In step B908, it is determined whether an error / injustice is occurring. In step B909, it is determined whether there is a ball on the board.

  In step B910, it is determined whether the touch sensor 174 is on. In step B911, it is determined whether the launch intensity of the sphere is greater than a predetermined value. In step B912, it is determined whether a customer waiting demonstration is in progress. In step B913, it is determined whether the number of held balls = 0. In step B914, it is determined whether the number of counted balls = 0.

  In each of the processes of Step B906 to Step B911 described above, if NO, YES in Step B912, YES in Step B913, NO in Step B914, it is determined that a condition that can be settled is satisfied, and the process proceeds to Step B915. Set the command for the checkable code. Next, the process proceeds to step B916, and the command of the accountable code set in step B915 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a command for a payable code is transmitted to the card unit 200. After this step B916, the process returns.

  On the other hand, if any one of the processes in steps B906 to B911 described above is YES, it is determined that a condition that can be settled is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step B917. If even one of the determinations NO in step B912 and YES in step B914 is satisfied, it is determined that a condition that can be settled is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step B917.

  In step B917, a command for a non-adjustable code is set. Next, the process proceeds to step B916, and the command of the non-adjustable code set in step B917 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a command with an unaccountable code is transmitted to the card unit 200. After this step B916, the process returns.

  Further, if the number of held balls is not 0 in step B913 (N in step B913), the process jumps to step B914 and proceeds to step B915 to set a command for a payable code. Accordingly, when the number of held balls is not 0, that is, when there is a number of held balls, it is possible to settle the amount.

  Next, the settlement start response process B754 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B921, a settlement start flag is set. In the subsequent step B922, the serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area. In step B923, the serial number is updated by "+1". Next, the process proceeds to step B924, and the serial number updated in step B923 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  In step B925, a settlement start response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is a “settlement start request”, a settlement start response command meaning “notify settlement start” is set as the response. Finally, the process proceeds to step B926, and the command set in step B925 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. Thereby, a payment start response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200. After this step B926, the process returns.

  Next, the settlement completion response process B755 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B931, a settlement end flag is set. In the subsequent step B932, the serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area. In step B933, the serial number is updated by “+1”.

  Next, the process proceeds to step B934, and the serial number updated in step B933 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 200. In the subsequent step B935, a settlement end response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is a “payment end request”, a payment end response command that means “notify the end of payment” is set as the response.

  Finally, the process proceeds to Step B936, and the command set in Step B935 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a payment completion response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200. After this step B936, the process returns.

  Next, the count use response process B756 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B941, a count use command received flag is set. Since this is a response when a count use request command is received from the card unit 200, a count use command received flag is set.

  In step B942, a serial number is loaded from the card unit command storage area, and in step B943, the serial number is updated by "+1". Next, the process proceeds to step B944, and the serial number updated in step B943 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the updated serial number is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  Next, in step B945, a count use response code command is set. Here, since the command transmitted from the card unit 200 to the payout control device 80 is a “count usage request”, the response means “notification of use of count ball (addition to number of balls)”. Use response commands will be set. Finally, the process proceeds to step B946, and the command set in step B945 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, a count use response command is transmitted from the payout control device 80 to the card unit 200. After this step B946, the process returns.

  Next, the gaming machine ID transmission process B738 in the card unit command transmission process will be described with reference to FIG. When this routine is started, first, in step B951, an ID transmission start code, which is start (start) information indicating that the information to be transmitted is ID, is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the ID transmission start code is transmitted to the card unit 200. In the card unit 200 that has received this ID transmission start code, it can be seen that the information to be sent is the ID.

  In step B952, a chip identification code of the main control chip, which is a code indicating that the next command group is a division of information of the main control chip in the game control device 54, is written in the card unit transmission buffer. Thereby, the chip identification code of the main control chip is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  Next, in step B953, the head address of the main control ID storage area is set. The main control ID storage area is configured so that a plurality of data (for example, data such as chip ID, manufacturer code, product code, etc.) in the main control ID can be stored by address. Therefore, a plurality of data of the main control ID received from the game control device 54 are sequentially stored. Therefore, an address for loading these data is set from the top.

  Then, the process proceeds to step B954, and one data of the main control ID stored in the main control ID storage area corresponding to the head address set in step B953 is loaded. For example, if a plurality of data of the main control ID is composed of a chip ID, a manufacturer code, a product code, etc., and these data are stored for each address in the main control ID storage area, for example, the chip ID at the head address When the storage area is designated, the chip ID is loaded.

  Next, the process proceeds to step B955, and the data (eg, chip ID) loaded in step B954 is written into the card unit transmission buffer. Thereby, the loaded data (for example, chip ID) is transmitted to the card unit 200. In subsequent step B956, the address of the main control ID storage area is updated to the next address. Thereby, the data of the next address is designated among the plurality of data of the main control ID.

  In step B957, it is determined whether transmission of all data has been completed. Since the main control ID is composed of a plurality of data (for example, chip ID, manufacturer code, product code, etc.), it is determined whether or not transmission of all of the plurality of data to the card unit 200 has been completed. . If transmission of all data has not been completed (N in step B957), the process returns to step B954 and the process is repeated. On the other hand, when transmission of all data is completed, that is, when transmission of all of a plurality of data of the main control ID (for example, chip ID, manufacturer code, product code, etc.) is completed (Y in step B957), the process proceeds to step B958. In this way, the main control ID transmission process is performed.

  In addition, regarding the transmission process of the main control ID in this process, the information of the main control ID to be transmitted has a variable length depending on the situation. That is, as the information of the main control ID, for example, when only the chip ID is sent to the card unit 200, or when the chip ID, manufacturer code, product code is sent, etc., the length is variable depending on the situation. B954 to B957 are structured to loop. In this process, all information of the main control ID (for example, all data such as chip ID, manufacturer code, product code, etc.) may be transmitted to the card unit 200 each time.

  Then, when the process proceeds to step B958 and subsequent steps, a payout control ID transmission process is performed. When the process proceeds to step B958, the process of sending the payout control ID is executed in the process of steps B958 to B963. First, in step B958, the chip identification code of the payout control chip indicating that the next command group is the payout control chip information division in the payout control device 80 is written in the card unit transmission buffer. Thereby, the chip identification code of the payout control chip is transmitted to the card unit 200. Note that the part having the identification code indicates not a piece of information read out from a chip (for example, a payout control chip) but a fixed value command indicating a classification.

  Next, in step B959, the chip code (chip ID) of the payout control chip is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the chip code (chip ID) of the payout control chip is transmitted to the card unit 200. In subsequent step B960, the manufacturer identification code of the payout control chip is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the manufacturer identification code of the payout control chip is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  In step B961, the manufacturer code of the payout control chip is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the manufacturer code of the payout control chip is transmitted to the card unit 200. In subsequent step B962, the product identification code of the payout control chip is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the product identification code of the payout control chip is transmitted to the card unit 200.

  In step B963, the product code of the payout control chip is written in the card unit transmission buffer. As a result, the product code of the payout control chip is transmitted to the card unit 200. As described above, the payout control ID transmission process is performed. In the present embodiment, processing for sending all information (chip ID, manufacturer code, product code) to the card unit 200 each time is executed for the payout control chip information, but the present invention is not limited to this. .

  In addition, for example, similar to the above-described main control ID, depending on the situation, it may be a process capable of sending only the chip ID. In this embodiment, since the information of the payout control chip has a fixed length, it may be processed so that each identification code is not sent to the card unit 200. Thereafter, after step B963, the process proceeds to step B964, where the ID transmission flag is cleared and the process returns.

  Next, the game stop signal editing process B159 in the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. This process edits the game stop signal such as turning on the game stop signal or turning off the game stop signal, and does not process a command but an instruction in the form of a signal.

  When this routine is started, first, in steps B971 to B976, a process is performed to determine whether or not a condition capable of stopping the game (game stop condition) is satisfied. Here, if all the game stop conditions are not satisfied, that is, if all the determination results are NO in the processing of steps B971 to B976, it is determined that the game cannot be stopped by stopping the game from continuing. In step B977, the game stop signal OFF output data is set.

  As a result, the game is not stopped. After step B977, the process returns. On the other hand, if at least one game stop condition is satisfied, that is, if the determination result in step B971 to B976 shows a YES determination result that prevents the game from continuing, the process branches to step B978. The game stop signal ON output data is set. As a result, the game is stopped. After step B978, the process returns.

  Here, the game stop conditions include the following six conditions. That is, Y in the determination of whether or not the checkout process is being performed in step B971, that is, the checkout process is being performed, Y in the determination of whether or not the break process is being performed in step B972, that is, the break process is being performed, In determination of whether or not an authentication error has occurred in Step B973, that is, that a communication abnormality has occurred, Y in determination of whether or not the glass frame 13 in Step B975 is open, that is, the glass frame 13 May be open, and in determining whether or not the inner frame (inner frame 12) in step B976 is open, Y, that is, the inner frame 12 may be open.

  Note that the determination as to whether or not the adjustment process is being performed may be made with reference to the adjustment in progress flag set in step B563 described above, for example. Also, whether or not an authentication error is occurring is determined by transmitting the gaming machine ID to the card unit 200 and then receiving, for example, a verification result in the third-party management organization 320, and determining whether the verification result is OK or NG. .

  The communication abnormality in step B974 is determined to be a communication abnormality when the communication between the payout control device 80 and the game control device 54 is abnormal (for example, a state where communication cannot be performed every 200 ms), and the payout control device 80. And the card unit 200 are abnormal (for example, in a state where communication cannot be performed every 200 ms), it is determined that the communication is abnormal. That is, the payout control device 80 sends a game stop signal to the game control device 54 when the communication between the payout control device 80 and the game control device 54 is abnormal or when the communication between the payout control device 80 and the card unit 200 is abnormal. Send.

  And the game control apparatus 54 will perform the process which stops a game, if the game stop signal is received from the payout control apparatus 80. FIG. In addition to the above-described example, when the game control device 54 detects an abnormality in the bidirectional encrypted communication with the payout control device 80, the game control device 54 stops the game (winning port switch monitoring processing, special game processing and Stop normal game processing).

However, among the processes related to the game, the winning opening switch monitoring process, the special game process, and the normal game process are not performed, but other processes related to the game are performed. Therefore, in the two-way encrypted communication between the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80, even if there is a communication failure due to either the game control device 54 side or the payout control device 80 side, the game control The game is stopped at the device 54. For this reason, it is possible to eliminate the possibility that the number-of-balls data and the like are not normal, and to improve security.

  Next, referring to FIG. 79, the browsing of registered information in the game shop management device 300 will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram in which a game information browsing screen is displayed on the display of the game store management device 300. In the game store management device 300, only predetermined information (game information) selected for each game store is received and managed. Here, FIG. 79A shows an example in which only the information regarding the out ball and the safe ball and the information regarding fraud (abnormality) are set to receive the difference ball. Of course, the game information selected and managed in the game store is not limited to information relating to out balls and safe balls, information relating to fraud (abnormality), and information relating to fraud (for example, including information on opening a night frame) Basically, it is better to receive. Even if all information is received from the card unit 200 side, the game store management device 300 may be added with a function of selecting information to be managed from the information.

  In FIG. 79 (b), the layout arrangement of each pachinko machine 10 in the game store for each gaming machine island is displayed, and for each pachinko machine 10, it is distinguished whether the pachinko machine is in operation or not in operation. As for the machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 in which fraud has occurred is displayed in different colors in a display manner different from the others, in addition to the color-coded display of the player type (member or non-member) and the operating status (special prize or probability change). . Thus, by displaying the pachinko machine 10 in which the fraud has occurred, together with its positional relationship so as to be clearly distinguishable from other pachinko machines 10, it is possible to call attention to nearby employees by income etc. Become.

Next, referring to FIG. 80, the inquiry about abnormal contents in the game shop management device 300 will be described. FIG. 80 is a screen transition diagram showing a flow of operations on the display of the gaming store management device 300.
Information regarding the presence / absence of fraud can be received by either the amusement store management device 300 or the third party management organization 320 of the amusement store, but the unauthorized content is normally notified only to the third party management organization 320. Is set. Therefore, in the game store management device 300, the presence / absence of fraud is displayed, but the details cannot be grasped. In view of this, an employee having a predetermined inquiry authority in the amusement store can check the details of the injustice based on the ID input.

Here, the game store management device 300 may receive the details of the illegal contents, or only when inquired, obtains information by communicating on the condition that the valid employee ID is authenticated. And can be viewed.
In this way, with regard to specific fraudulent content, if employees other than those with the specified authority cannot be known, for example, a case where an employee and a player are fraudulently conspiring. In this case, it is possible to delay (or not notify) the player notifying the player that fraud has been detected if the employee himself / herself does not clearly know that the fraud has been involved.

  First, in the game information browsing screen shown in FIG. 80 (a) (same as FIG. 79 (a)), it indicates that there is an abnormality in the item of “abnormal content” among the information displayed for each pachinko machine 10. When the “present” part is selected (for example, click with the cursor, touch operation on the touch panel, etc., the same applies hereinafter), the game information browsing screen is selected as shown in FIG. A message for inquiring about the contents of the abnormality with respect to the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, and an ID input field for an employee to input an ID is displayed. Here, the employee inputs his / her ID using a keyboard or the like in the game store management apparatus 300.

  As shown in FIG. 80 (c), when an employee who does not have the authority to inquire about the abnormal content inputs the ID, as shown in FIG. 80 (d), the authority to inquire the abnormal content into the input ID. An error message is displayed along with a message indicating that is not set. At this time, the employee ID that has been inquired without authority may be refrained from management at the amusement store side, for example, the management agency 330 side.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 80 (e), when an employee who has the authority to inquire about abnormal contents inputs an ID, as shown in FIG. Along with a message indicating that the details of the abnormality that has occurred in the selected pachinko machine 10 are displayed, for example, the details of the abnormality and the ID of the employee who performed the operation are displayed together with the abnormality occurrence time in time series. become. As a result, fraudulent details can also be confirmed at the amusement store.

  Next, the display of the abnormality history in the operation agency 330 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an abnormality history screen displayed on the display display of the management server (amusement facility management means) in the operation agency company 330. Here, the management server (amusement facility management means) of the operation agency 330 has a database for storing and managing the abnormality history, and the abnormality history is displayed as a form of the form shown in FIG. It can be displayed on the history screen and printed.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), on the abnormality history screen, the history of abnormality that occurred within the period specified in the “date specification” field can be viewed in time series. That is, in the abnormality history screen, the serial number arranged in descending order as the latest abnormality content is “No”, the date of occurrence of the abnormality in the “Date” field, the occurrence time in the “Time” field, The content of the abnormality is in the “Content” column, the machine number of the pachinko machine 10 where the abnormality occurred is in the “Machine No” column, and the ID of the employee involved in opening the glass frame or opening the inner frame of the abnormality content is “Employee” It is displayed in the “ID” column. At this time, there is basically no employee information when an error such as a magnetic error occurs. However, if it is possible to cancel these various errors, the same game machine can be used within a very short time after the error has occurred. By checking employees who have opened a frame or the like (to operate the error release SW or the like), finer and more rigorous employee management becomes possible.

Here, for example, it can be seen that fraud often occurs in the pachinko machine 10 in which the employee with ID “0345” has opened the inner frame. Therefore, the operation agency 330 can instruct to strengthen management (monitoring) for the employee with the ID “0345” as one of the instructions regarding management of the amusement store.
As described above, the operation agency company 330 can present various information related to management of the amusement store and give specific instructions by analyzing the abnormality history. Since a plurality of pieces of information related to the pachinko machine 10 (game state and the like) are set as shown in FIG. 88, it is possible to give instructions regarding the operation of the game store with reference to all these pieces of information.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the abnormality history screen can also display the history of abnormality that occurred within the period specified in the “date specification” column by content. That is, the abnormality history screen includes the number of detected abnormality “number of detected” and the abnormality detected for each abnormality content “content” that occurred within the range of the specified period. The number “number of” pachinko machines 10 is displayed.

Furthermore, in the abnormality history screen, an abnormality occurs for each “employee ID” of the employee related to the abnormality that occurred within the specified period as the aggregation by employee as well as the aggregation by contents. The number of occurrences and the “details” for displaying details of the contents are displayed. Here, by selecting “detail browsing” written in “content details”, a screen corresponding to the employee ID is displayed, and details of abnormality information related to the employee are displayed.
As a result, the management agency 330 side can also grasp detailed information of employees related to the abnormality. It should be noted that not only the employee but also the unauthorized person management of the player may be performed by face authentication or the like.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, registration of received information in the amusement shop management apparatus 300 will be described. FIG. 82 is a screen transition diagram showing the flow of operations for registering received information on the menu screen on the display of the gaming store management device 300.
First, in the initial state of the menu screen shown in FIG. 82 (a), items for selecting a plurality of menus that can be set in the game shop management device 300 are displayed. Here, the manager of the game shop or an employee with authority selects “model registration” for registering the desired type of the pachinko machine 10 from a plurality of menus.

  Then, on the menu screen shown in FIG. 82 (b), a message indicating that model registration is to be performed, and an “unregistered model list display” field for displaying a list of models not yet registered are displayed. When this “unregistered model list display” field is selected, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), the menu screen displays a list of models that are not yet registered, along with a message indicating that the unregistered models are displayed. The specific model name and the number of each model are displayed. An arbitrary model is selected from the list.

  Next, on the menu screen shown in FIG. 82 (d), a list of game information corresponding to the selected model is displayed together with a message prompting the user to select a genre of game information to be received. The Here, for example, when the “ball number information” field is selected from among the genres of game information, the menu screen shown in FIG. 82 (e) displays the game information to be received among the genres of the selected game information. A list of individual game information such as the number of game balls, the number of shot balls, the number of out passes, etc. included in the specifically selected “ball number information” is displayed together with a message to prompt selection. Arbitrary game information is selected from the list, but not limited to one here, a plurality of game information can be selected. The definition of individual game information will be described later.

When individual game information included in the selected game information genre cannot be displayed or selected in the menu screen shown in FIG. 82 (e), as shown in FIG. 82 (f), By selecting the “Set next” field that appears at the end of the menu screen, the remaining game information can also be displayed sequentially.
When selection of all game information to be registered this time is completed, the operation of registering received information is completed by selecting the “OK” button that appears at the end of the menu screen shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, in the menu screen shown in FIG. 82 (g), a list of the model name of the selected pachinko machine 10 and all of the selected game information to be received are displayed together with the message indicating that the selected game information is received. Is displayed. It should be noted that fraud information regarding fraud (including nighttime frame opening information, etc.) is basically set to be received as described above without any particular selection operation.

  As described above, for each model of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to perform setting for selecting and receiving desired game information from each genre of game information. After completion of such selection (setting), the information is transmitted to and stored in the card unit 200 corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 of the target model.

  Note that the method for selecting information to be received by the game store management device 300 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 82. In other words, if the information to be collected from the pachinko machine 10 to be registered can be selected (set), It doesn't matter how. For example, the game store management device 300 receives all game information output from the card unit 200, and the game store management device 300 arbitrarily selects only specific information from all received game information. It may be possible to select and manage. In this case, all the information output from the card unit 200 can be set uniformly, and only the set information is selected and displayed on the game store side management device 300 side receiving this information. It will be.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, output information output setting in the game shop management device 300 will be described. FIG. 83 is a screen transition diagram showing the flow of operations for setting the output of received information on the menu screen on the display of the gaming store management device 300. Here, the information for which the output setting has been performed is basically received from the management agency 330. This is because, for example, in the card unit 200, it is difficult to edit and output as information that can be managed to that extent. Note that the timing at which the output setting information is displayed on the amusement store management device 300 is, for example, when the store is closed, every time the store is open, when illegal information, base abnormality, etc. reach a predetermined number, or at the amusement store It can be set appropriately so as to be possible at any time when necessary on the side.

  First, in the initial state of the menu screen shown in FIG. 83 (a), items for selecting a plurality of menus that can be set in the game shop management device 300 are displayed. Here, the manager of the amusement shop or an authorized employee selects “Reception information registration” for setting the output of reception information from a plurality of menus. It should be noted that a plurality of items can be selected, and all information desired to be set at the game store may be selected.

  Next, on the menu screen shown in FIG. 83B, a list of selectable reception information and the like are displayed together with a message for prompting selection of desired reception information. Here, any reception information can be selected. Here, for example, when “illegal information” is selected, a list of categories corresponding to the selected reception information is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 83 (c). Therefore, it is possible to arbitrarily select a category for output display for each reception information.

  When selection of all reception information to be set this time is completed, the menu screen shown in FIG. 83 (d) lists all of the selected reception information and its categories together with a message indicating that the above-mentioned selected information is received. Is displayed. In FIG. 83D, for example, display for the entire store is selected for “sales information”, and display for each island is selected for “illegal information”. By selecting the “OK” button that appears at the end of the menu screen, the operation for setting the output of received information is completed. If it is desired to return to the previous screen, the “Return” button that appears at the end of the menu screen is selected. This “return” button is the same in FIGS. 83 (b) and 83 (c).

As described above, after the output information output setting is completed, the game store side management device 300 operates at the predetermined timing described above (when the store is closed, every predetermined time during business, or whenever necessary). A transmission request can be output to the agency 330 to receive the above-mentioned preset information and display the output. It should be noted that the transmission request timing (for example, every predetermined time, illegality, arrival of a predetermined number of abnormal information, etc.) is registered in advance from the game store management device 300 to the operation agency 330 so that it can be automatically received. May be.
As a specific output display, in the example shown in FIG. 83 (e), fraud detection that occurred on each gaming machine island as today's fraud information on the screen of the display of the gaming store management device 300. The number of cases is specifically displayed. At the end of this screen, in addition to a “return” button for returning to the previous screen, a “detail” button for instructing detailed display of illegal contents is displayed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 83 (f), when the “detail” button is selected, the serial number arranged in descending order is “No” as the details of today's fraud information, and the time when the fraud is detected is “time In the "" column, the specific illegal content is in the "Content" field, the machine number of the pachinko machine 10 where the illegality is detected is in the "Car No" field, and the ID of the employee who detected the fraud is "Employee ID" Each is displayed in the column. In addition, when it sets for every island in the above-mentioned category, the fraud information of all the gaming machine islands will be displayed. In this case, necessary information regarding fraud is displayed even if the amusement store has not selected reception information for knowing detailed information. The history display is premised on receiving necessary information from the management agency 330.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the display of management instructions from the operation agency 330 in the gaming store management device 300 will be described. FIG. 84 is a screen transition diagram showing a flow of displaying a management instruction from the operation agent company 330 on the display of the amusement shop management device 300.
First, in the information received by the gaming store management device 300, when there is instruction information related to the management instruction from the management agency 330, as shown in FIG. In addition to the message indicating that the instruction information has been received, the type of the instruction information and the “with instruction information” button for viewing the instruction information are displayed.

  When the “with instruction information” button is selected on the screen shown in FIG. 84A, details of the contents of the received instruction information are also displayed on the screen as shown in FIG. 84B. In the example shown in FIG. 84 (b), as the received instruction information related to “sales information”, for example, for model A, an instruction for necessity of replacement or movement, and for model B, even 1 yen is introduced. An instruction to do so is displayed.

In addition, as another example of receiving the instruction information, in FIG. 84 (c), on the screen of the display display, a message indicating that the instruction information has been received and characters of “premium exchange information” indicating the type of the instruction information are displayed. Then, a “with instruction information” button for viewing the instruction information is displayed.
When the “with instruction information” button is selected here, as shown in FIG. 84 (d), as the instruction information regarding the received “premium exchange information”, specifically, for example, there are many users for special prizes. An instruction to promote the exchange of general prizes and an instruction to review the display merchandise are displayed for general prizes because there are few users.

Further, as another example of receiving the instruction information, in FIG. 84 (e), on the screen of the display display, along with a message indicating that the instruction information has been received, characters of “illegal information” indicating the type of the instruction information, A “with instruction information” button for viewing the instruction information is displayed.
When the “with instruction information” button is selected here, as shown in FIG. 84 (f), as the instruction information regarding the received “illegal information”, for example, for employee ID 0345, the frame opening operation and the magnetic For the employee ID 0897, an instruction that requires a lot of errors and a notice that requires a lot of errors during the gift exchange operation is displayed.

  Furthermore, as another example of receiving the instruction information, in FIG. 84 (g), on the screen of the display display, a message indicating that the instruction information has been received, individual information regarding the general prize as the instruction information, and the instruction information A “with instruction information” button is displayed for viewing an instruction regarding. When the “with instruction information” button is selected here, as shown in FIG. 84 (h), specific advice or the like regarding the general prize is displayed.

  As described above, when the gaming store management device 300 receives the instruction information related to the management instruction from the operation agency 330, the operation information on the screen of the display display is checked as needed. can do. That is, at the game store, it is possible to perform management related to sales, change of the received game information described above, or employee management based on these instruction information.

  Next, the control operation of the entire game management system 1 will be described based on FIG. 85 and FIG. As described above, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 are each provided with a main control ID and a payout control ID that can individually identify the IC chip, and “main ID” and “payout ID” in the figure, respectively. Abbreviated. In addition, the main control ID and the payout control ID may be collectively referred to as a gaming machine ID.

  In addition to the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 of the pachinko machine 10, the card unit 200, the game store side management device 300, and the third party management organization relay device 310, an external third party management organization 320 (third Each person management organization management apparatus 321) includes an encryption key A (and an encryption / decryption algorithm) for performing encrypted communication between the apparatuses. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, an encryption key X different for each gaming machine is set after installation in the game store as described below, and after this setting, information is transmitted using the encryption key X.

In FIG. 85, the third party management organization 320 first receives the gaming machine manufacturing information, shipping information, and each ID information from the gaming machine maker 340 in advance and registers them in its own collation list ( Step S101).
And the game control apparatus 54 transmits main control ID to the payout control apparatus 80 at the time of power activation of the pachinko machine 10 (step S102). Here, the game control device 54 transmits the main ID to the payout control device 80 using encrypted communication using the encryption key A provided in the game control device 54.

Next, the payout control device 80 stores the main ID received from the game control device 54 in the RAM 82 (see FIG. 5) in an encrypted state (step S103). Further, the payout control device 80 transmits the main ID and its payout ID to the card unit 200 using encrypted communication using the encryption key A (step S104).
Then, the card unit 200 stores the main ID and the payout ID received from the payout control device 80 while being encrypted (step S105). Further, the card unit 200 uses a third party separately from the amusement store management device 300 by using the encrypted communication with the encryption key A for the main ID and the payout ID (that is, the gaming machine ID) and its own card unit ID. It transmits to the management organization relay device 310 (step S106).

  Subsequently, the third party administrative institution relay device 310 stores the gaming machine ID (main ID and payout ID) and card unit ID received from the card unit 200 in an encrypted state (step S107). Further, the third-party management institution relay device 310 uses the encrypted communication with the encryption key A and the third ID of the gaming machine ID (main ID and payout ID), card unit ID, and hall ID of the game store. To the manager management organization 320 (third-party management organization management device 321 in FIG. 12) (step S108). In this way, each ID is output from the third party management organization relay device 310 to the third party management organization 320 in an encrypted state.

  Thereafter, the third party management organization 320 decrypts the gaming machine ID (main ID and payout ID), card unit ID, and hole ID received from the third party management organization relay device 310, and then each of these IDs. Are collated using a predetermined collation list (step S109). Here, in a predetermined collation list in the third party management organization 320, the gaming machine IDs (main ID and payout ID) of a large number of gaming machines (for example, gaming machines installed in gaming stores nationwide) are previously stored for each gaming machine. In addition to being created as regular information, the ID of the card unit 200 and the ID (hole ID) of the third party management organization relay device 310 are also created and stored in advance as regular information.

  Therefore, in the third party management organization 320, each received ID is authorized by collating the received gaming machine ID (main ID and payout ID), card unit ID and hole ID with a predetermined collation list. Or whether it is a fake. If the main ID, the payout ID, the card unit ID, and the hole ID are all OK as a result of the verification, the current verification result is determined to be OK (step S110). On the other hand, if any one ID is NG, the current collation result is determined to be NG. If the collation result is NG, information to that effect is returned and the game is not started. The case where the collation result is NG will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the above-described verification result is OK, the third party management organization 320 transmits the verification result (= OK) and data for the encryption key X to the third party management organization relay apparatus 310 (step). S111). Here, the data for the encryption key X is data for generating the encryption key X, and the data for the encryption key X is transmitted from the third party management organization 320 to the third party management organization relay device 310. Then, based on the data for the encryption key X, the third party administrative institution relay device 310 generates the encryption key X for each unit in the amusement store. In addition, the third party management organization 320 transmits the authentication information or the like that the above-described verification result is OK to the operation agency 330 (step S110a).

  Next, the third party management organization relay device 310 stores the verification result (= OK) received from the third party management organization 320 and the data for the encryption key X, and based on the data for the encryption key X. An encryption key X for each vehicle in the game store is generated (step S112). Here, as described above, the encryption key X is generated with a different ID for each unit in the game store, and the pachinko machine 10 (between the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80), the pachinko machine 10 and the card. For communication with the unit 200, information is transmitted / received using encrypted communication using an encryption key X that is different for each unit.

  If the collation result received from the third party management organization 320 is OK, the third party management organization relay apparatus 310 decrypts and stores each stored ID. As a result, only the legitimate ID is decrypted and stored in the third party administrative institution relay device 310. If the verification result is OK, encrypted communication using the encryption key A is performed for communication higher than the card unit 200 from the time of verification of the next gaming machine ID. Encrypted communication using a different encryption key X is performed every time.

  Specifically, encrypted communication using the encryption key A is performed between the card unit 200, the third party management organization relay device 310, and the third party management organization 320, and the card unit 200, the payout control device 80, and the game control. Encrypted communication using the encryption key X is performed with the device 54. When the verification result is OK, the third-party administrative institution relay device 310 uses the encrypted communication using the encryption key A for the verification result of each unit and the encryption key X of each unit to the card unit 200. Will be sent.

  Then, the third party administrative institution relay device 310 transmits the above-described verification result (= OK) and the encryption key X to the card unit 200 (step S113). Subsequently, the card unit 200 stores the verification result of the table and the encryption key X of the table received from the third party management organization relay apparatus 310 (step S114). Further, the card unit 200 decrypts each stored ID and stores it again. As a result, only the legitimate ID is decrypted and stored in the card unit 200.

  Further, the card unit 200 sends the gaming machine ID collation result (= OK) and the encryption key X for each unit received from the third party management organization relay device 310 to the payout control device 80 of the pachinko machine 10. At the same time (step S115), the game machine ID verification result (= OK) is transmitted to the game store management device 300 (step S116). From the next time, information is transmitted and received between the payout control device 80 and the card unit 200 by encrypted communication using the encryption key X (step S117). Note that the card unit 200 selects information to be output to the game store management device 300 based on the received information, and determines whether or not it is an output timing.

  Thereafter, the payout control device 80 stores the game machine ID collation result (= OK) received from the card unit 200 and the encryption key X (step S118). Further, the payout control device 80 transmits the comparison result (= OK) of these gaming machine IDs and the encryption key X to the game control device 54 (step S119). From next time, information is transmitted and received between the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 by encrypted communication using the encryption key X (step S120).

In step S117 and subsequent steps, the card unit 200 transmits authentication information, game information, and the like to the third party administrative institution relay device 310 using encrypted communication using the encryption key X (step S121).
Further, the third party management organization relay device 310 uses the encrypted communication using the encryption key X to transmit the authentication information, game information, etc. received from the card unit 200 to the external third party management organization 320 (in FIG. 12). To the third party management organization management apparatus 321) (step S122).

In this way, all the information received from the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the third party management organization 320 in an encrypted state.
Thereafter, the third party management organization 320 transmits the game information received from the third party management organization relay device 310 to the operation agency 330 (see FIG. 12) using the encrypted communication using the encryption key X. (Step S123).

  Further, the card unit 200 transmits the preselected game information to the game store management device 300 using the encrypted communication using the encryption key X (step S124). Here, the card unit 200 selects and outputs game information set in advance when the pachinko machine 10 is installed. In the case of game information that is transmitted when a predetermined number is reached, for example, it is output when the condition for reaching the predetermined number is satisfied.

  Next, in FIG. 86, which is almost the same as FIG. 85 described above, but as shown in a different step S121a, the card unit 200 uses only encrypted information using the encryption key X, for example, important information such as authentication information. Alternatively, it may be transmitted to the third party administrative institution relay device 310 at a predetermined timing.

In addition, as shown in step S122a, the third-party management institution relay device 310 uses only encrypted information with the encryption key X to transfer only important information such as authentication information received from the card unit 200. The timing may be transmitted to an external third party management organization 320 (third party management organization management apparatus 321 in FIG. 12).
In this case, the third party management organization 320 uses only the important information such as the authentication information received from the third party management organization relay device 310 using the encrypted communication with the encryption key X, and operates the operation agency 330 (FIG. 12). (See step S123a).

Next, FIG. 87 shows a modification of the card unit 200.
As shown in FIG. 87 (a), a display input device 205 is provided on the front surface of the card unit 200. The display input device 205 is composed of a touch panel type liquid crystal display, and can be configured to realize an operation such as ball lending similarly to the operation display device 60 by an operation on the screen of the display input device 205. Has been. The lower part of the card unit 200 is configured as a lower unit 200a that is combined as a separate body, and a control device including the CU control unit 210 (see FIG. 12) and the like is mounted inside the lower unit 200a. .

  In particular, in this modified example, as described above, the game store management device 300 itself can select or set game information transmitted from the game store management device 300. Here, a state in which game information can be selected or set is referred to as a “setting mode”. First, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), if the card unit 200 is being activated, as shown in FIG. 87 (c), whether or not to set the “setting mode” is displayed on the screen of the display input device 205. A selection button for instructing is displayed.

  Here, when the selection is made to “set mode” (YES button touch operation), as shown in FIG. 87 (d), the genre of the game information to be set is similar to the example of FIG. 82 (d) described above. A list of game information corresponding to this model is displayed together with a message prompting the user to select the game model. Here, for example, when the “ball number information” field is selected in the genre of game information, as shown in FIG. 87 (e), the game information to be set is selected from the genre of the selected game information. A list of individual game information such as the number of game balls and the number of prize balls included in the specifically selected “ball number information” is displayed together with a message for prompting. Arbitrary game information is selected from the list.

  When selection of all game information to be registered this time is completed, a selection button for instructing whether or not to accept is displayed on the screen of the display input device 205, as shown in FIG. 87 (f). . Here, if selection to accept is made (touch operation of the YES button), the setting operation of game information is completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (g), a message indicating that the above-described set game information (transmission information) has been set is displayed, and the setting in the card unit 200 itself is completed.

  In addition, you may comprise so that the signal regarding the selected game information may be output with respect to IR light emission part 204 with a remote control. The setting mode described above may be selected only when the card unit 200 is activated, and the selection of game information may not be changed during the game. Further, the game information may be similarly selected or set by the operation display device 60 controlled by the card unit 200.

  Next, “information regarding gaming machines” transmitted from the pachinko machine 10 to the card unit 200 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 88 is a table showing a list of information related to gaming machines. Here, information relating to gaming machines is roughly classified into ball number information, gaming machine status, fraud detection status information, and gaming information. Note that the game information here is game information in a narrow sense in a sense that is different from other ball number information, gaming machine status, and fraud detection status information. However, as described above, game information in a broad sense (or game related information) (Also referred to as information) may be collectively referred to as including other ball number information, gaming machine status, and fraud detection information.

  The number-of-balls information includes the number of game balls, the number of fired balls, the number of out-passed balls, the total number of winning balls, the number of counted balls, and the firing strength. In addition, the gaming machine state includes a gaming machine state (1), a gaming machine state (2), a gaming machine state (3), and a gaming machine state (4). The fraud detection information includes fraud detection status (1), fraud detection status (2), fraud detection information (1), fraud detection information (2), fraud detection information (3), fraud detection information ( 4) is included. Further, the game information includes the number of game information, type information (1), and prize ball information (1) to (n). In addition, regarding the names of the above information, the numbers in parentheses at the end are written as circle numbers in the figure.

  In the above-mentioned ball number information, the number of game balls indicates the number of game balls as a result of addition or subtraction as the current number of game balls. The number of fired balls is the number of balls fired by the launching device 34. If there is a back ball, the number of back balls is subtracted, and if there are multiple balls fired at the time of transmission, they are added up. The number of out-passing balls is the number of game balls that have passed through the out-ball inflow port 23. If there are a plurality of passing balls at the time of transmission, they are added together. The total number of winning balls is the total number of winning balls in the winning ball information 1-n. The counted ball number is the number of counted game balls. In this case, when the preparation state of the card unit 200 changes from preparation OK to preparation, the game balls held by the pachinko machine 10 are counted and set as the number of counted balls. The launch strength is the launch strength of the game ball by the launch device 34.

  In addition, the above-described gaming machine state may be referred to as gaming state information in other explanation locations. Regarding this gaming machine state, each classified information shown in the table stores the classified information in units of bits. That is, in the gaming machine state (1), information indicating that the game is permitted, the game is prohibited, the standby, the game is being stored, and the like. In the gaming machine state (2), jackpot information indicating from jackpot 1 (all jackpots) to jackpot 7 (preliminary jackpot) is stored. In the gaming machine state (3), information such as during a big hit + during a short time, during a probability change, during a short time is stored. In the gaming machine state (4), information related to an error code occurring in the pachinko machine 10 is stored.

  In addition, the above-described fraud detection state information is also stored in each register shown in the table in such a manner that the classified information is classified in bit units. That is, the fraud detection state (1) stores fraud detection information indicating radio wave sensor detection, magnetic sensor detection, fraud winning detection, and the like. This fraud detection state (1) is output from the game control device 54. In the fraud detection state (2), fraud detection information indicating glass frame opening, inner frame opening, radio wave sensor (frame) detection and the like is stored. This fraud detection state (2) is output from the payout control device 80. Note that the fraud detection state (2) here also includes the above-described frame opening information and game control device monitoring information (nighttime monitoring information).

  Furthermore, in the above-described fraud detection state information, fraud detection information (1) corresponds to prize ball sensor goto detection (number of winning inconsistent balls), and fraud detection information (2) corresponds to composite sensor goto detection (launch / OUT mismatch). The fraud detection information (3) corresponds to fraud addition detection (fault addition ball count), and the fraud detection information (4) corresponds to detection of the number of times of opening the night frame body.

  Further, in the above-described game information, the number of game information includes the type information and the number (n) of prize ball information. The number of game information varies according to the situation. Further, the type information (1) distinguishes types such as a start opening, a big winning opening, and a general winning opening as data types, for example. The prize ball information (1) to (n) is constituted by game prize ball information 1 to n indicating specific prize ball data.

  In addition to the information regarding the gaming machine described above, the information transmitted / received between the devices includes the authentication information described with reference to FIG. 85 (and FIG. 86), the recovery information described with reference to FIG. 63, and the like. Here, the authentication information is information indicating a matching result of the gaming machine ID (main control ID and payout control ID). For example, when all the predetermined bits of the authentication completion information are “1”, the authentication completion (verification OK). ). Further, the recovery information is information indicating that the recovery is completed when the payout control device 80 recovers data that cannot be communicated by the recovery process when the communication is restored.

  Next, the control operation of the entire gaming system 1 when selecting the game information to be received according to the modification of the card unit 200 shown in FIG. 87 will be described with reference to FIG. In this operation, first, the game store management device 300 selects the setting mode on the screen of the display input device 205 as described above (step S201). Then, the transmission information selected by the game store side management device 300 is set by the operation on the screen of the display input device 205 (see FIGS. 87 (b) to 87 (f)) (step S202).

  In addition, the game control device 54 and the payout control device 80 of the pachinko machine 10 transmit and receive various types of information including game information and fraud information to each other (step S203). Under such circumstances, the card unit 200 sends out its card unit ID (sequence No. in FIG. 89) and a transmission request for transmission information such as the above-described game information using the above-described encrypted communication. 80 (step S204). It is assumed that the following transmission / reception of various information is performed using encrypted communication.

  Then, the payout control device 80 stores (backs up) the received information including the card unit ID received from the card unit 200 in a storage area provided for itself, and generates a command (step S205). Further, the payout control device 80 transmits various types of information including game information, fraud information, and the like to the card unit 200 (step S206). Subsequently, the card unit 200 stores (backs up) the received information including the card unit ID received from the payout control device 80 in its own storage area (step S207).

  Next, the card unit 200 checks the collation list set as the selection information described above (step S208), and stores information including game information, fraudulent information, etc. set in the collation list on the game store side. It transmits to the management apparatus 300 (step S209). Here, the card unit 200 may transmit these pieces of information to the game store management device 300 at a predetermined timing preset by the game store management device 300 (steps S210 to S211).

  Further, the card unit 200 transmits all game information and the like to the third party management organization relay device 310 (step S212). Next, the third party management organization relay device 310 transmits all the game information received from the card unit 200 to an external third party management organization 320 (third party management organization management device 321 in FIG. 12) ( Step S213).

Thereafter, the third party management organization 320 transmits all game information received from the third party management organization relay apparatus 310 to the operation agency 330 (see FIG. 12) (step S214).
Further, the card unit 200 transmits a transmission request for transmission information such as new game information to the payout control device 80 (step S215), and the above operation is repeated.

  Next, referring to FIG. 90, the flow of verification when the verification result of the gaming machine ID at the time of installing the gaming machine is NG will be described. As shown in FIG. 90 (a), first, the third party management organization 320 decrypts the main ID, the payout ID, the card unit ID, and the hole ID with the encryption key A, and then creates a predetermined collation list. If any one of the main ID, the payout ID, the card unit ID, and the hole ID is NG as a result of the verification, the current verification result is determined to be NG. Then, the verification result (= NG) is transmitted again to the third party administrative institution relay device 310 using the encrypted communication with the encryption key A.

  Regarding the collation here, specifically, for example, when the main ID, the payout ID, the card unit ID, and the hole ID are respectively compared with the regular ID, the main ID is NG, and other payout IDs and cards Even if both the unit ID and the hole ID are OK, since only one main ID is NG, it is determined that the current collation result is NG.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 90 (b), the third party management organization relay apparatus 310 stores the collation result (= NG) received from the third party management organization 320. Then, the third party administrative institution relay device 310 transmits this verification result (= NG) to the card unit 200 for each pachinko machine 10 using the encrypted communication with the encryption key A. At this time, the ID whose collation result is NG is discarded. For example, if the main ID is NG in the current collation result, the main ID is discarded (a strikethrough is added to the main ID in the figure).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), the card unit 200 stores the verification result of the pachinko machine 10 received from the third party administrative institution relay device 310. This includes information on the collation result (= NG). At this time, the ID of the collation result (= NG) is discarded. For example, if the main ID is NG in the current collation result, the main ID is discarded (a strikethrough is added to the main ID in the figure).

  Further, the card unit 200 stops the game for the pachinko machine 10 with the matching result (= NG). Furthermore, the card unit 200 sends the verification result of the pachinko machine 10 received from the third party management institution relay device 310 to the payout control device 80 and the amusement shop side management device 300 using encrypted communication using the encryption key A, respectively. Send.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the gaming store management device 300 stores the gaming machine ID collation result (= NG) received from the card unit 200. Then, the amusement store management device 300 transmits the comparison result (= NG) using encrypted communication using the encryption key A. At this time, the ID whose collation result is NG is discarded and the game is stopped.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (e), the payout control device 80 stores the gaming machine ID collation result (= NG) received from the card unit 200. Then, the payout control device 80 transmits this comparison result (= NG) to the game control device 54 using the encrypted communication with the encryption key A. At this time, the ID whose collation result is NG is discarded and the game is stopped.

  Finally, as shown in FIG. 90 (f), the game control device 54 stores the game machine ID collation result (= NG) received from the payout control device 80. At this time, for example, if the comparison result of the main ID is NG, the game is stopped. Here, for example, a command may be sent to the effect control device 53 to cause the display device 41 to display an error.

  Next, the flow of checking the gaming machine ID after installing the gaming machine will be described based on FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. Even if the ID collation result at the third party management organization 320 is OK when installing the gaming machine, there is a possibility that any ID may be replaced with a fake one after that, powering on the pachinko machine 10 Sometimes ID verification is performed every time. Hereinafter, the case where the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on after the gaming machine is installed and the case where the game is played on the pachinko machine 10 after the gaming machine is installed will be described.

  FIG. 91 shows a flow in the case of collating the gaming machine ID when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned on after the gaming machine is installed. First, as shown in FIG. 91 (a), the game control device 54 transmits the main ID to the payout control device 80 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Here, the game control device 54 transmits the main ID to the payout control device 80 using the encrypted communication using the encryption key X obtained when the result of checking the gaming machine ID is OK.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the payout control device 80 transmits the main ID received from the game control device 54 and its payout ID to the card unit 200 using encrypted communication using the encryption key X. To do. Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (c), the card unit 200 updates and stores the gaming machine ID (main ID and payout ID) received from the payout control device 80 over the previous one. Further, the card unit 200 transmits the overwritten data to the third party administrative institution relay device 310 using encrypted communication using the encryption key A.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), the third party management organization relay device 310 overwrites the previous one with the gaming machine ID (main ID and payout ID) and card unit ID received from the card unit 200. And update it. Further, the third party management organization relay device 310 compares these overwritten data with the previously stored information (each ID stored when the gaming machine is installed). If any one of the main ID, the payout ID, and the card unit ID is NG as a result of the verification, the current verification result is determined to be NG. On the other hand, if the main ID, the payout ID, and the card unit ID are all OK as a result of the verification, the current verification result is determined to be OK.

  The example shown in FIG. 91 is a configuration in which the gaming machine ID is collated by the third-party management institution relay device 310 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on after the gaming machine is installed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 91 (e), the third-party management institution relay device 310 transmits the above-described collation result to the card unit 200 using encrypted communication using the encryption key A. Here, when the collation result is NG, the third party administrative institution relay device 310 uses the encryption key A for the gaming machine ID, card unit ID, and hole ID, respectively, as shown in FIG. 91 (k). It transmits to the third party management organization 320 using encrypted communication.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (f), the card unit 200 stores the collation result received from the third party administrative institution relay device 310. At this time, the card unit 200 permits the game if the collation result received from the third party management organization relay device 310 is OK, and stops the game if the collation result is NG. Further, the card unit 200 transmits the collation result received from the third party management organization relay device 310 to the payout control device 80 and the game store management device 300 using the encrypted communication using the encryption key X. At this time, at the stage of matching the gaming machine ID at the time of installing the gaming machine, the ID matching result in the third party management organization 320 is OK, so information is transmitted by encrypted communication using the encryption key X. .

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 91 (g), the payout control device 80 stores the verification result received from the card unit 200. Here, the payout control device 80 permits the game if the collation result received from the card unit 200 is OK, and stops the game if the collation result is NG. Also, the payout control device 80 transmits the verification result received from the card unit 200 to the game control device 54 using encrypted communication using the encryption key X. Here, since the ID collation result in the third party management organization 320 is OK at the stage of collation of the gaming machine ID when the gaming machine is installed, information is transmitted by encrypted communication using the cipher key X. .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 91 (h), the gaming store management device 300 stores the collation result received from the card unit 200. At this time, the game store side management device 300 discards the ID whose collation result is NG and stops the game. Here, the game store management device 300 permits the game if the collation result received from the card unit 200 is OK, and stops the game if the collation result is NG.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (i), the game control device 54 stores the collation result received from the payout control device 80. At this time, the game control device 54 permits the game if the collation result received from the payout control device 80 is OK, and stops the game if the collation result is NG.

  In addition, the third-party administrative institution relay device 310 overwrites and stores the gaming machine ID (main ID and payout ID) and card unit ID received from the card unit 200 over the previous ones, and the gaming machine ID ( The main ID and the payout ID) and the card unit ID are compared with the previously stored information. If the result of the comparison is NG, as shown in FIG. 91 (j), the gaming machine ID ( The main ID and the payout ID) and the card unit ID and the own hall ID are transmitted to the third party management organization 320 using encrypted communication with the encryption key A, and the third party management organization 320 rechecks each ID. I do.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 91 (j), the third party management organization 320 performs re-collation of each ID, and the re-collation result is managed by the third party using encrypted communication with the encryption key A. Transmit to the engine relay device 310. The subsequent processing flow is the same as that described above. As shown in FIG. 91 (e), the third-party management institution relay device 310 uses the encrypted communication with the encryption key A as the card for the re-verification result. It will be transmitted to the unit 200. Such re-collation can further improve security.

  As described above, each ID is re-verified by the third-party management organization 320, and if the re-verification result is NG, each ID is verified by the third-party management organization 320 for a predetermined period thereafter. Therefore, a high security level can be maintained. In this way, when the gaming machine ID is collated when the power is turned on after the gaming machine is installed, the third party management institution relay device 310 compares the gaming machine ID with the gaming machine ID that has been validated when the gaming machine is installed. Since the machine ID is collated, and the collation is performed by the third party management organization 320 only when the collation is NG, it is possible to efficiently match the gaming machine ID.

  In addition, when the collation result with each ID stored in the third party management organization 320 is OK when the power is turned on, the game can be started. If the collation result at this stage is NG, the third party management is possible. The engine 320 collates. Further, when communication between the third party management organization 320 and the card unit 200 becomes impossible, a verification request is made to the game store management device 300 that is updated and updated every day, and the game store management device concerned. Matching is performed based on the matching result stored in 30, and if it is OK, the game can be temporarily started.

  Further, the authentication at a predetermined timing such as when the power is turned on is basically performed with the third party management organization 320, but the authentication is performed at the time of installation and the result is stored in the game management device 320. If there is no change thereafter, the authentication may be OK if authentication is performed during normal times. In this case, for example, a procedure such as changing the authentication key every day is required. Even if authentication is normally performed with the third party management organization 320, the authentication result is transmitted to the game management device 320 every day and stored, for example. In addition, the authentication result with the game management device 320 may be OK.

  Next, FIG. 92 shows a flow in the case of checking the gaming machine ID during the game of the pachinko machine 10 after the gaming machine is installed. First, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), the game control device 54 transmits the main ID to the payout control device 80 when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Here, the game control device 54 transmits the main ID to the payout control device 80 using encrypted communication using the encryption key X. Thereafter, the game is started on the pachinko machine 10. Hereinafter, an example will be described after the game machine ID is verified when the power is turned on after the game machine is installed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), the payout control device 80 transmits the main ID received from the game control device 54 and its payout ID to the card unit 200 using encrypted communication using the encryption key X. To do. Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (c), the card unit 200 updates and stores the gaming machine ID (main ID and payout ID) received from the payout control device 80 overwriting the previous one. Further, the card unit 200 compares the overwritten data with the previously stored information (the gaming machine ID stored when the power is turned on after the gaming machine is installed).

  As a result of this collation, if any one of the main ID and the payout ID is NG, it is determined that the current collation result is NG. On the other hand, if all of the main ID and the payout ID are OK as a result of the collation, the current collation result is determined to be OK. Here, particularly when the collation result is NG, as shown in FIG. 92 (f), the card unit 200 manages the collation result (= NG) using third party encryption communication using the encryption key A. Transmit to the engine relay device 310. The third party management organization relay device 310 stores the collation result (= NG). Moreover, a game is stopped because a collation result is NG.

  The example shown in FIG. 92 is a configuration in which the gaming machine ID is collated by the card unit 200 during gaming after the gaming machine is installed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), if the above-described collation result is OK, the card unit 200 uses the cipher key X (main ID and payout ID) and card unit ID together with the collation result as the encryption key X. The data is transmitted to the amusement store management device 300 using the encrypted communication. At this time, as shown in FIG. 92 (e), the gaming store management device 300 stores the collation result (= OK) and gaming machine ID received from the card unit 200.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (g), the payout control device 80 stores the verification result received from the card unit 200. At this time, the payout control device 80 permits the game if the collation result received from the card unit 200 is OK, and stops the game if the collation result is NG. Also, the payout control device 80 transmits the verification result received from the card unit 200 to the game control device 54 using encrypted communication using the encryption key X. Here, since the ID collation result in the third party management organization 320 is OK at the stage of collation of the gaming machine ID when the gaming machine is installed, information is transmitted by encrypted communication using the cipher key X. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92 (i), the game control device 54 stores the collation result received from the payout control device 80. At this time, the game control device 54 permits the game if the collation result received from the payout control device 80 is OK, and stops the game if the collation result is NG. In this way, when the gaming machine ID is checked during the game of the pachinko machine 10 after the gaming machine is installed, the card unit 200 compares it with the gaming machine ID stored at the time of power-on after the gaming machine is installed. Since the game machine ID is collated, the game machine ID can be efficiently collated.

Next, a modified example of the game management system 1 shown in FIG. 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 shows an overall outline of the game management system 1 according to the modification.
As shown in FIG. 93, in this modification, the card unit 200 (information output means thereof) is connected to the game store management device 300 (game management device) via a third-party management organization relay device 310. The predetermined information selected from the information regarding the gaming machine received from the pachinko machine 10 is output.

  As described above, the predetermined information selected from the information related to the gaming machine is not limited to the system form (see FIG. 11) that is directly output from the card unit 200 to the gaming store side management device 300. It may be configured to output indirectly via another device such as the person management organization relay device 310. The description of the components shown in FIG. 93 that overlap with those in FIG. 11 is omitted, but the following points are supplemented.

  That is, the third party management organization relay device 310 distributes predetermined information selected in advance and transmits it to the amusement store management device 300. Here, the selection of the predetermined information is performed by third party management. It may be set by the third party management organization 320 via the institution relay device 310, or information indicating that the information is selection information at the stage of transmission from the card unit 200 as described above is added. It can also be configured to transmit.

  In addition, the third-party management organization 320 registers information related to the gaming machine (main control ID and the like) from the gaming machine maker 340 in advance. Basic management information is also transmitted as information related to this gaming machine, and the management information at the time of installation is information that should be newly managed from various collected game information etc. It is also possible to configure the system so that it can be reviewed and changed. The same applies to the game management system 1 of FIG. 11 described above.

Next, a modification of the circulation path described in FIG. 4 will be described based on FIG.
As shown in FIG. 94, in this modification, a magnetic sensor 441 or the like for detecting an illegal sphere made of a magnetic material is arranged in the circulation path so as to prevent an illegal use using the sphere of the magnetic material. It is configured.

  The basic configuration of the circulation path shown in FIG. 94 is the same as that shown in FIG. 4, but a magnetic sensor 441 is provided immediately after the polishing inlet switch 421 in the polishing apparatus 406. Here, the magnetic sensor 441 does not directly detect a sphere made of a magnetic material, but can detect a magnet that acts on such an illegal sphere, so it is indirectly made of a magnetic material. The detected game ball is detected.

  Further, immediately after the lower outlet 415 of the polishing device 406, a recovery flow path 442 that communicates downward before reaching the lifting device 402 hangs down, and a ball removal valve 444 is provided at the upper end inlet of the recovery flow path 442. Is provided. The ball removal valve 444 includes a ball removal solenoid 444S. A recovery box 450 is disposed at the lower end outlet of the recovery flow path 442. In addition, about the site | part of the same kind as the circulation path shown in FIG. 4, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the overlapping description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, the bypass passage 404 and the like are not shown.

  When the ball removal solenoid 444S is off, the conversion member of the ball removal valve 444 does not slide, and the conversion member is urged by the spring to close the upper end inlet (the connection portion with the lifting device 402) of the recovery flow path 442. Then, the sphere is guided to the lifting device 402 without falling into the recovery flow path 442. On the other hand, when the ball removal solenoid 444S is turned on, the conversion member of the ball removal valve 444 is sucked and slid by the ball removal solenoid 444S to open the upper end inlet (connecting portion with the lifting device 402) of the recovery flow path 442. The sphere that has flowed out of the polishing device 406 is operated so as to drop into the recovery channel 442 by gravity. Thereby, the sphere that has flowed out of the polishing device 406 is collected in the collection box 450 via the collection channel 442 without being guided to the lifting device 402.

  As shown in FIG. 95, the polishing inlet switch 421 is repeatedly turned on and off at predetermined intervals during polishing of the encapsulated sphere in which the polishing apparatus 406 operates. During such polishing, the magnetic sensor 441 is improperly sphered. When the magnet acting on is detected and turned on, the ball removal solenoid 444S is set to be turned on after the lapse of the predetermined time t1. As a result, the ball removal solenoid 444S is operated, and the ball removal valve 444 opens the upper end inlet of the recovery flow path 442 (connecting portion with the lifting device 402). The guided sphere is dropped into the collection path 442 and collected in the collection box 450. The predetermined time t1 may be set to a time at which polishing in the polishing apparatus 406 is completed after detection of the polishing inlet switch 421 and the magnetic sensor 441 in consideration of the polishing distance of the polishing apparatus 406.

Next, another modification of the circulation path described in FIG. 4 will be described.
In this modification, a small-diameter sphere sensor that detects an illegal small-diameter sphere (for example, less than 10.5 mm in diameter) that is slightly smaller in diameter than a regular sphere (for example, 11 mm in diameter) is disposed in the circulation path. It is configured to prevent fraud using. Here, the small-diameter sphere sensor is configured to detect a regular sphere (detection signal is turned on) but not a small-diameter sphere. Such a small-diameter sphere sensor may be arranged so as to be provided immediately after the polishing inlet switch 421 in the polishing apparatus 406 shown in FIG. 94, for example, instead of the magnetic sensor 441 described above.

  As in the case of the magnetic sensor 441 described above, although not shown, when the small-diameter ball sensor is turned on, the ball removal solenoid 444S is set to be turned on after the predetermined time t1 has elapsed. As a result, the ball removal solenoid 444S is operated, and the ball removal valve 444 opens the upper end inlet of the recovery flow path 442 (connecting portion with the lifting device 402). The guided small diameter sphere is dropped into the collection path 442 and collected in the collection box 450.

  Next, still another modification of the circulation path described in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In this modified example, the regular sphere is allowed to pass through the circulation path, while the small diameter sphere described in the above modified example 2 is provided with a communicating portion 451 that prevents unauthorized use using the small sized sphere. doing. Here, although an overall view of the circulation path is omitted, the communication portion 451 is arranged between the lower outlet 415 of the polishing device 406 and the inlet of the lifting device 402 in FIG. It is good to provide in place. However, since the regular sphere does not fall, it is not necessary to provide a ball removal valve.

  As shown in FIG. 96, the communication portion 451 is configured to have a gap that allows the regular sphere to pass without falling but allows the small-diameter sphere to fall and cannot pass. The width of the gap may be arbitrarily set depending on the size of the pair of protrusions protruding from both walls. If it is a regular sphere, it passes through the lifting device 402 while being supported by the pair of protrusions 452 and 452, but in the case of a small-diameter sphere, it does not get caught by the protrusion 452 and falls downward. The small-diameter sphere dropped here is collected as it is in the collection box 450 described above.

  Next, as a modified example of the gaming machine, a case where it is applied to the slot machine 500 instead of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. In FIGS. 97 to 100, each device other than the slot machine 500 will be described with the same reference numerals as those constituting the gaming system 1 described above.

First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 500 will be described with reference to FIG.
The slot machine 500 includes a front frame 502 that can be opened and closed in a single-opening manner on the front surface of a housing 501 that is open on the front side. Inside the casing 501, as the three reels constituting the variable display device 510, the first reel 511a, the second reel 511b, and the third reel 511c are arranged in a horizontal row in order from the left side in FIG. It is arrange | positioned so that rotation is possible. Hereinafter, the three reels 511a to 511c are collectively referred to as each reel 511.

  Although not shown in the drawings, on the outer peripheral surface of each reel 511, a symbol row composed of a plurality of types of symbols (symbols) is represented. Each reel 511 is driven by a corresponding reel drive unit and rotates independently of each other. Here, the reel driving unit is constituted by a stepping motor, for example, and a first reel motor 516a for driving the first reel 511a, a second reel motor 516b for driving the second reel 511b, and a third reel 511c for driving the third reel 511c. It consists of a 3-reel motor 516c (see FIG. 98). Hereinafter, the three reel motors 516a to 516c are collectively referred to as each reel 516.

  Then, the slot machine 500 starts the variable display game by the rotation of each reel 511, and the stop result at the end of the variable display is a predetermined display mode (symbol combination mode corresponding to the winning combination) on the effective line described later. When determined, the medal is paid out as giving a predetermined game value to the player.

  A display window 503 is provided at the approximate center of the front frame 502 so that the player can visually recognize the symbols that are displayed in a variable manner by the rotation of the reels 511. When the reels 511 are stopped, the upper and lower three symbols stopped on the front side can be visually recognized from the display window portion 503 on the outer peripheral surface of the reels 511. That is, in a state where each reel 511 is stopped, a total of nine symbols can be visually recognized from the display window portion 503.

  Furthermore, speakers 504 as sound output devices are provided on the upper left and right of the front frame 502, respectively. Here, the speaker 504 outputs a sound effect at the time of occurrence of a big bonus (BB) state or a regular bonus (RB) state, etc., and improves the fun of the game. Here, the regular bonus is, for example, a game in which a combination of jackpot symbols appears with a high probability 8 times in succession and a high payout is awarded so that 15 medals are awarded each time. The big bonus includes a game in which the regular bonus is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, three times), and a small hit can occur with a predetermined probability between the end of the regular bonus and the start of the next regular bonus.

  On the front side of the front frame 502, an inclined surface that gently slopes from the back to the near side is formed from a predetermined position below the display window portion 503, and the operation unit extends further to the near side from the inclined surface. 520 is formed. On the upper surface of the operation unit 520, a single BET switch 521, a MAXBET switch 522, a settlement switch 523, and a medal number use switch 524 are provided. In addition, a start lever 525, a stop button 526, and a medal count adjustment switch 527 are provided on the front side of the operation unit 520.

  A first display device 512 is provided below the display window portion 503. The display surface of the first display device 512 is inclined in the depth direction when viewed from the front, and is devised so that the first display device 512 having a large screen size can be attached by effectively using the depth direction. . Further, since the screen is inclined, there is an effect that the player can easily see the screen.

  The first display device 512 is a touch panel liquid crystal display device. The display screen of the first display device 512 is provided with a touch panel for detecting an instruction (for example, a touch operation) from the player on the display surface and specifying the position (for example, a position where the touch operation is performed). On the first display device 512, in addition to the bet number set in the game and the number of points earned when a winning occurs, an effect display related to the variable display game, an auxiliary game related to the game, and other various information are displayed.

  Further, a second display device 513 is provided below the operation unit 520. Similarly to the first display device 512, the second display device 513 also employs a touch panel type liquid crystal display device and is controlled by the card unit 200. In the second display device 513, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 described above, in addition to information on the number of medals related to the game, the character of the model of the slot machine 500, etc., description of the winning combination of the model, game method, Alternatively, various information such as strategy information is displayed.

  A game state display unit 514 is provided on the right side of the first display device 512. The game state display unit 514 indicates that the slot machine 500 is in a game-ready state, and displays “REPLAY” indicating that the replay winning is obtained and the currently executed game is a replay game after the replay winning. It is composed of a “WAIT” display indicating that there is a waiting time from when the player operates the start lever using the medal points until the rotation of each reel 511 starts, and an “INSERT MEDALS” display for prompting the use of the number of medals. The

  A bet line display unit 515 is provided on the left side of the first display device 512. The bet line display unit 515 displays a bet line (valid line) activated corresponding to the number of medals bet (the number of bets). Here, the bet number of medals is the number of medals used by the player for the game, or the number of medals used in the game after being subtracted from the medal stored number (credit number) used by the player in advance. An operation in which a player uses the number of medals or subtracts from the stored number to start a game is called a bet. In this embodiment, the number of medals is used as game medium data, but the number of game balls may be used.

  The bet line display unit 515 includes, for example, three lamps “1”, “2”, and “3”. For example, when the number of bets is one, only the “1” lamp of the bet line display section 515 is lit, indicating that only the middle horizontal line is an active line. When the number of bets is two, the “1” and “2” lamps of the bet line display section 515 are turned on to indicate that the three horizontal lines in the upper, middle, and lower stages are active lines. When the number of bets is three, all the lamps “1”, “2” and “3” on the bet line display section 515 are lit, and three horizontal lines and two right-down and right-up The diagonal lines (5 lines in total) are effective lines.

  Next, various operation means provided in the operation unit 520 will be described. The one-sheet BET switch 521 is a switch operated when setting a bet amount using “credit = 1” corresponding to one medal. The MAXBET switch 522 has a maximum bet number determined according to the gaming state (for example, in the normal gaming state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) in which the replay winning probability is high, “credit = 3”, bonus In this case, the switch is operated when setting “credit = 2”.

  The start lever 525 is for starting rotation of each reel 511 after setting the betting amount. The stop button 526 is a button for stopping each reel 511 that is rotating, and corresponds to each of the left, middle, and right reels 511. The medal number use switch 524 is a switch operated when using the medal number. The settlement switch 523 is a switch operated when counting credits and converting them into medals. The medal number adjustment switch 527 is a switch operated when counting the number of medals and converting them into points.

  Next, a game flow in the slot machine 500 will be described. When playing a game in the slot machine 500, the player first secures the number of medals. This operation is established when an operation corresponding to receiving a medal loan is detected in the medal payout type slot machine 500. That is, the medals lent out in the medal payout slot machine 500 correspond to the number of medals in this embodiment.

  In order to set the bet number using the medal number, the medal number use switch 524 is pressed once. Then, 1 is added to the bet number and 1 is subtracted from the medal number. When the medal number use switch is further operated after the betting number reaches the upper limit, the medal point is decremented by 1 and the credit is incremented by 1 each time the operation is performed. In this embodiment, the upper limit of credit is set, and even if the medal number use switch 524 is pressed after the credit number 50 is reached, the credit number and the medal number do not change.

  Further, when the 1BET switch 521 is operated in a state where credits exist, one bet is added and 1 credit is subtracted. Further, when the MAXBET switch 522 is operated in a state where credits are present, an additional setting is made so that the bet number becomes the maximum number within the credit range, and the credits are subtracted by the additional setting amount.

  When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the gaming state is valid among the pay lines, and the operation of the start lever 525 is valid, that is, the game can be started. When a betting operation is performed using the number of medals, an active line is set according to the number of bets, and the operation of the start lever 525 is enabled, that is, the game can be started. When the start lever 525 is operated, an internal lottery process is performed in a game control device 530, which will be described later, and winning / non-winning of the winning is determined, and the variation of each reel 511 is started.

  When the rotation speed of each reel 511 becomes constant after a predetermined time has elapsed, the operation of the stop button 526 corresponding to each reel becomes valid, and each reel 511 is based on the operation of the stop button 526 corresponding to each reel. Is stopped, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on the display window 503. When the symbol combination mode corresponding to the internal winning prize is formed on the active line, a prize is established, and a game value corresponding to this prize is given (for example, the number of medals is added as a prize medal). .

  The game of one segment is completed as described above, and thereafter, the game is advanced by repeating this operation. Note that a part or all of the credits can be counted and converted into the number of medals by operating the settlement switch 523. By converting into the number of medals, it is possible to receive a medal number sharing process and a wagon service that can exchange the number of medals with juice or the like.

  When the settlement switch 523 is pressed and held (for example, an operation for 3 seconds or more), all credits are counted and converted into medals. On the other hand, if the settlement switch 523 is operated for a time shorter than the long press operation detection time (hereinafter referred to as “short press operation”), only one credit is counted and converted into one medal point by one operation. The Note that two or more points may be counted in one short press operation.

  By operating the medal count adjustment switch 527, some or all of the medals can be counted and converted into points. By converting to points, it is possible to record the points on the card at the end of the game. When the medal number adjustment switch 527 is pressed and held (for example, an operation for 3 seconds or more), the total number of medals is counted and converted into points.

  On the other hand, if the medal number adjustment switch 527 is operated for a time that is less than the detection time of the long press operation (hereinafter referred to as “short press operation”), only one medal number is counted and held in one operation. Converted to one point. Note that two or more points may be counted in one short press operation.

  In the medal payout type slot machine 500, a payout mechanism such as a hopper for actually paying out medals is disposed at the lower part of the housing (a portion corresponding to the rear of the second display device 513 in FIG. 1). In the enclosing type slot machine 500, such a medal is not paid out, so that an empty space can be secured at a place where the payout mechanism is provided. In view of this, a unit structure that gives an image of the payout of medals is provided at a position corresponding to the place where the payout mechanism is provided, and a viewing window is provided below the second display device 513 so as to correspond to the unit structure. A unit may be opened so that the unit structure disposed inside the housing can be viewed.

  In this case, the pseudo medal can be visually recognized from the viewing window at a timing when the number of medals changes (timing when the medals are paid out by the medal payout type slot machine 500) such as medals are paid out or lent out. The unit structure is moved so that In addition, a sound effect that causes the speaker 504 to image the payout of medals may be output in correspondence with the movable timing.

  The configuration of the card unit 200 is substantially the same as that of the pachinko machine 10 described above, but as shown in FIG. 1, below the display input device 205 (see FIG. 87), a replay button 206, A lending button 207, a return button 208, and a score button 209 are provided. In addition, in the same kind of part as the card unit 200 (refer to FIG. 1 or FIG. 87) described above, the same reference numerals are given and redundant description is omitted.

The replay button 206 is an operation button for performing a replay game using a member card ID (also simply referred to as a card ID) recorded on the member card and the number of stored medals specified by the member card ID.
Here, the “stored medal” is a point stored in the amusement store. The points earned by the player in the game are managed as points during the day, but are managed as “stored medals” after the next day.

In other words, the medal score obtained and counted by the player on the day at the game store is referred to as “score”, and the score acquired by the player before the previous day and deposited at the game store is referred to as “stored medal”. This “stored medal” is generally managed by the game store management device 300 or other management computer installed in the game store.
The “score score” is obtained by counting and converting the number of medals owned by the player as a result of the player playing the game with the slot machine 500. This “score” is stored so as to be specified by the player's card. In addition, you may manage the number of points with the management apparatus for point number management set to the game store.

The lending button 207 is a button for lending a predetermined number of medals (increasing points) within the range of the balance (for example, medal lending number) recorded on the member card.
The return button 208 is operated when the player ends the game, and is a button for causing the member card to record the determined score at the end of the game. That is, the return button 208 functions in the same manner as the settlement switch 523 on the slot machine 200 side. However, if the return button 208 is operated before the game starts, the membership card is simply returned.

A score button 209 is a button for performing an operation for drawing a part of the score recorded on the membership card inserted into the card slot 201 and converting it into medal points.
A holding point button may be provided. The replay button 206, the lending button 207, the return button 208, and the buttons having the same functions as the score points 209 can be displayed on the screen of the display input device 205, for example, and the same operation is realized by a touch operation. You may comprise as follows. Alternatively, as in the case of the pachinko machine 10 described above, the second display device 513 provided on the slot machine 500 side instead of the card unit 200 side and controlled by the card unit 200 may be operable.

Next, the overall system configuration of the game management system including the control system of the slot machine 500 will be described with reference to FIG. In the drawings and the following description, “SW” means a switch.
The control system of the slot machine 500 includes a game control device 530, a payout control device 540, an effect control device 550, and a power supply device 560. Necessary power is supplied from the power supply device 560 to each device of the control system and each electronic component shown in FIG. Each device of the control system is disposed inside the housing 501 of the slot machine 500.

First, the configuration of the game control device 530 and devices connected to the game control device 530 will be described. The game control device 530 controls the game in an integrated manner, and includes a CPU 531, a ROM 532, a RAM 533, an I / F (Interface) 534, a random number generator 535, and the like.
Here, the CPU 531 includes a control unit and a calculation unit, and performs various types of calculation control as a calculation processing device of the game control device 530.

  The ROM 532 stores a program for executing control processing and control data (for example, a determination value for internal lottery). The ROM 532 stores a stop table that is referred to when stop control of each reel 511 is performed in each game. For example, there are a stop table corresponding to various winnings won internally, a stop table corresponding to a miss, and the like.

  Here, in the stop table, data for performing stop control of each reel 511 in order to maximize the pattern combination mode corresponding to the internal winning state (the state of the set winning flag) on the effective line. (The number of sliding symbols, etc.) is stored, and the stop position is preset according to the operation stop order and operation timing of each reel 511.

  The RAM 533 stores an internal lottery random number storage area generated by a random number generator 535, which will be described later, and other various data (for example, credit number data, bet number data, various winning flag state data, and predetermined symbol combinations). A storage area for temporarily storing data relating to payout based on the mode being derived, and a work area for temporarily storing data necessary for the operation of the CPU 531.

  The I / F 534 includes a start lever switch 525a, a first reel stop switch 526a, a second reel stop switch 526b, a third reel stop switch 526c, and a first reel position detection switch 517a via a low-pass filter and a buffer gate (not shown). , Second reel position detection switch 517b, third reel position detection switch 517c, single bet switch 521, max bet switch 522, (credit) adjustment switch 523, medal number use switch 524, medal number adjustment switch 527, front frame open Signals input from the detection switch 518, the reset switch 519, and the setting device 570 are output to the CPU 531, respectively.

  Further, the I / F 534 outputs a control signal output from the CPU 531 from an output port and a driver (not shown), and via the effect control device 550, the first display device 512, the speaker 504, the frame side light emitting device, the back Output to light etc. Thereby, various devices can be controlled by an effect control device 550 described later.

  The random number generator 535 generates a random number for internal lottery that determines whether each winning flag is established / not established. Then, the CPU 531 performs an internal lottery based on the generated random number. Instead of generating a random number for internal lottery by the random number generator 535, a random number for internal lottery may be generated by software processing of the CPU 531 and the internal lottery may be performed using the generated random number. .

  The result of the aforementioned internal lottery (whether the winning flag is established / not established) is transmitted to an effect control device 550, which will be described later. The effect of the frame light emitting device and the backlight is controlled. The lottery for determining whether or not to execute an effect can be performed by the game control device 530, but may be configured to be performed by the effect control device 550.

  The game control device 530 may be provided with an RTC (Real Time Clock) and a business time setting switch so as to perform various effects every predetermined time, or to provide services to the player. Also good. Here, the RTC is a dedicated clock for outputting current date and time information, and is supplied with power from a battery separate from the power supply device 560. The business hours setting switch is a switch for setting business hours (from what time to what time) of the amusement shop where the slot machine 500 is installed.

  Of the devices connected to the game control device 530, the start lever switch 525a is a switch that detects the operation of the start lever 525. The reel stop switches 526a to 526c are switches that detect operations of the corresponding stop buttons 526, respectively. Here, when the operation of each stop button 526 is detected by each reel stop switch 526a to 526c, the rotation of each corresponding reel 511 is stopped. Each reel position detection switch 517a to 517c is a switch for detecting a stop position of each corresponding reel 511.

  The front frame opening detection switch 518 is a switch for detecting opening / closing of the front frame 502. The reset switch 519 is a switch for initializing the gaming state of the slot machine 500. For example, when resetting an error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 500, a key is inserted into a key cylinder (not shown) and turned in a direction opposite to the direction for opening and closing the front frame 502, thereby resetting the reset switch. 519 is turned on. The other switches 521 to 524 and 527 are as described above.

  The setting device 570 is a device for switching the probability that the result of the variable display game is a hit (a winning flag is established) to any one of a plurality of levels (for example, 1 to 6). For example, setting 1 can be switched so that the winning flag has a lowest probability, and the winning flag has a higher probability as the set value increases. It should be noted that the number of medals (machine discount) that can be obtained by the player varies depending on the probability that the winning flag is established.

  The game control device 530 is electrically connected to each component via the I / F 534 as described above. In the game control device 530, for example, the random number generator 535 updates the random number (for example, +1) every predetermined cycle time, and performs control to sample the random number at the detection timing by the start lever switch 525a. Is set to perform an internal lottery with the random number for internal lottery.

  Further, the game control device 530 controls the operation of each reel motor by referring to the corresponding stop table based on the internal lottery result and the stop operation timing of the stop button 526 corresponding to each reel. Each reel 511 is stopped so that a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the display window 503. For example, if a symbol that constitutes a symbol combination mode corresponding to an internal winning prize is stopped before reaching the valid line, the timing for stopping each reel 511 is delayed and the symbol is valid. So-called pull-in stop control is performed so that the stop display is made on the line.

  Further, for example, when a stop operation is performed at a timing when a symbol combination mode corresponding to a winning that is not won internally is formed on the effective line, the timing for stopping each reel 511 is delayed and formed on the effective line. So-called kicking stop control is performed so that the symbols constituting the possible symbol combination mode pass the effective line. In the pull-in stop control and kick-off stop control by the game control device 530, the range in which the stop timing can be changed is within a predetermined number of symbols (for example, within 4 frames) from the position where the stop operation is performed.

  Next, the configuration of the payout control device 540 will be described. The payout control device 540 is connected to the above-described game control device 530 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and is connected to the card unit 200 so as to be able to transmit and receive various types of information. The payout control device 540 mainly manages medal points and accumulated medals, and includes a CPU 541, a ROM 542, a RAM 543, an I / F (Interface) 544, and the like.

  Here, the CPU 541 executes a predetermined program to perform calculation processing necessary for managing medal holding points and saving medals. The ROM 542 stores the program, and the RAM 543 is used as a work area (work area) when executing processing based on the program. The I / F 544 outputs information related to the gaming machine in the slot machine 500 to the card unit 200 through a low-pass filter and a buffer gate (not shown) as will be described later.

  In this way, the payout control device 540 is connected to the card unit 200 via a card unit connection terminal board (not shown) and the like, and can transmit bidirectional information to and from the card unit 200. That is, the slot machine 500 (game machine) and the card unit 200 (game device) are configured to be able to transmit and receive information related to the game machine.

  Here, the information relating to the game specifically includes, for example, bet number information (for example, the number of pulses corresponding to the bet number is output when the start lever 525 is operated and the game is started). Information indicating the number and number of games), internal winning information indicating a lottery result by internal lottery, gaming state information indicating a current gaming state (normal state, BB state, RB state, RT state, etc.), and the like. .

  Next, the effect control device 550 performs control related to the effect of the game under the control of the game control device 530, and includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an I / F, etc. (not shown). Has been. The effect control device 550 controls the effect display in the first display device 512 described above based on the information related to the game output from the game control device 530 and the frame side light emission provided in the speaker 504 and the front frame 502. An effect is controlled by the device 506 (lamp, LED) and the effect backlight 507 (LED) provided behind each reel 511.

  Specifically, the effect control device 550 uses the first display device 512 to display a winning announcement for a small prize winning, a winning announcement for a bonus winning, or an effect display (one effect completed in one game or a continuous effect over a plurality of games). Etc. are displayed. In addition, the effect control device 550 is a light emitting illumination unit that can illuminate an effect by sound from the speaker 504, an effect by light emission by the frame side light emitting device, and a pattern on the effective line of each reel 511 from the back side. The production by the light emission with the back light.

  The communication mode between the game control device 530 and the effect control device 550 described above is set so that the control signal is transmitted only in one direction from the game control device 530 to the effect control device 550. An illegal signal is prevented from being input to 530.

  Next, the power supply device 560 includes a backup power supply circuit, a power failure monitoring circuit, and the like in addition to the power supply circuit (not shown). Here, the backup power supply circuit supplies backup power to the RAM 533 of the game control device 530, the RAM 543 of the payout control device 540, and the like, and retains the storage contents regarding the game data and the like. Although illustration is omitted, it is also possible to supply backup power to the effect control device 550 so as to hold the storage contents such as the effect contents.

  Further, an outline of a control circuit for the card unit 200 and the slot machine 500 will be described. As shown in FIG. 98, the card unit 200 is provided with a connection part 217 to the slot machine 500 side, and the slot machine 500 is provided with a connection part 505 to the card unit 200 side. These connection parts 505 and 217 are constituted by predetermined connectors, for example. The card unit 200 and the slot machine 500 are connected by a communication cable that connects the connection units 505 and 217.

  The card unit 200 and the slot machine 500 give medal points based on the consumption of the game value (balance, points, accumulated medals) specified by the player's game card, and other processing via this communication cable. Various commands and responses are exchanged, and information on the second display device 513 is transmitted.

  Here, the control system of the card unit 200 has substantially the same configuration as the card unit 200 corresponding to the pachinko machine 10 described above, and includes a CU control unit (main control unit) 210 configured by a microcomputer or the like. . Although not shown in the figure, the CU control unit 210 includes a CPU as a control center, a ROM storing programs and control data for operating the CPU, a RAM functioning as a work area for the CPU, and signals from peripheral devices. An input / output interface or the like is provided to maintain the consistency of the data.

  The CU control unit 210 is provided with a security board 215 for communicating with the payout control device 540 of the slot machine 500 while ensuring security. The security board 215 on the card unit 200 side and the payout control device 540 of the slot machine 500 are connected to be communicable via a connection unit communication cable (connection wiring). The security board 215 is provided with a communication control IC for controlling communication between the security board 215 and the payout control device 540, and a security chip for monitoring the security of the slot machine 500.

  Further, a bill discriminator (not shown) for discriminating the authenticity and type of the bill inserted into the cash slot 202 is provided inside the card unit 200, and the discrimination result output from this bill discriminator. The signal is input to the CU control unit 210. If the IR light emitting unit 204 (see FIG. 97) receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game store clerk, this light reception signal is also input to the CU control unit 210.

  Further, a card reader / writer (not shown) for reading / writing recorded information of the membership card inserted into the card slot 201 is provided inside the card unit 200, and the read information output from the card reader / writer is also provided. Input to the CU control unit 210. On the other hand, when data to be written on the inserted membership card is transmitted from the CU control unit 210 to the card reader / writer, the card reader / writer is set to write the data on the inserted membership card. Has been.

  The CU control unit 210 stores various game data of the player when the player is playing. Then, data such as card balance, points, medals, credits, and the like are output from the CU control unit 210 to the display control unit 213 and converted into display data by the display control unit 213. Here, the display control unit 213 controls various display contents in the second display device 513 on the card unit 200 side based on the control command output from the CU control unit 210. That is, the display data converted by the display control unit 213 is output to the second display device 513, and the output display data is displayed on the second display device 513 on the card unit 200 side. .

  Further, when the player operates the replay button 206, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 210. Further, when the player operates the lending button 207, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 210. Further, when the player operates the return button 208, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 210. Further, when the player operates the holding point button 209, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 210. As described above, the operation signal output when each button is operated is input to the CU control unit 210, respectively.

  The CU control unit 210 communicates with a third party management organization management apparatus 321 installed outside via a third party management organization relay apparatus 321 that is a communication control apparatus with the third party management organization 320. A communication control unit 211 is provided for this purpose. In addition, the communication control unit 211 communicates with the game store management device 300 installed in the game store via the external information terminal board 212 provided in the card unit 200.

  The CU control unit 210 uses the communication control unit 211 via the external information terminal board 212, the card balance use information that can specify the amount of use of the card balance, the point use information that can specify the number of points used, and the medal use Game store side management of information related to gaming machines including information on the use of stored medals that can be used to identify the number of used medals, as well as various types of game information such as the aforementioned betting number information, internal winning information, and game status information. Transmit to device 300. As for the slot machine 500, as with the configuration related to various information transmissions in the pachinko machine 10, the information related to the gaming machine received by the gaming store management device 300 is a predetermined one that the gaming store wants to manage. It is possible to select and set information.

  Further, all of the information related to the gaming machine is also transmitted to an external third party management organization 320 (corresponding to an external management device) via the third party management organization relay apparatus 310. The third-party management organization 320 performs overall management based on the transmitted various information, and further receives various information received from the operation agency 330 (corresponding to the amusement facility management means) as necessary. Configured to transmit. Note that the details of the selection or flow of these pieces of information are substantially the same as those in the case of the pachinko machine 10 described above, and a duplicate description is omitted.

  Next, a modified example of the above-described game management system of FIG. 98 will be described with reference to FIG. In the game management system shown in FIG. 98 described above, the card unit 200 communicates with the game store management device 300 from the communication control unit 211 via the external information terminal board 212. For example, this transmission route (in FIG. 99) The card unit 200 is not connected to the third party management institution relay device 310 via the communication control unit 211, but is connected to the game store side. A variety of information may be transmitted to the management apparatus 300 (indicated by a two-dot broken line in FIG. 99). This is the same configuration as the system applied to the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG.

  Next, setting analysis in the operation agency company 330 which is a gaming facility (amusement store) management means for managing a gaming store (facility) in which the slot machine 500 is installed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram in which a history screen is displayed on a display display of a management server (amusement facility management means) in the operation agency company 330. Here, in the management server (game facility management means) of the operation agency 330, a database for storing and managing information related to games output from the card unit 200 (originally the slot machine 500) is constructed, and the history is As a form of the format shown in FIG. 100, it can be displayed and output on a history screen of a display.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (a), on the history screen, the history of various information can be browsed in time series for each model or setting of each slot machine 500 received within the range of the period designated in the “date designation” column. It becomes. That is, on the history screen, the number of the same type of slot machines 500 belonging to the same setting and the slot machine 500 for each setting are output for each type of the slot machine 500 and for each setting 1 to 6 by the setting device 570. As game information, totals of information such as out, safe, difference ball, appearance rate, number of BBs, number of RBs, and machine split are displayed.

  The operation agency 330 can analyze various types of information related to information and present various information related to the management of the amusement store and give specific instructions. For example, as shown in FIG. 100 (b), as data relating to the entire gaming machine, by analyzing the ratio of the settings 1 to 6 by the setting device 570 for each slot machine 500, there is unevenness in the settings, and in particular setting 2 It is possible to determine the situation of uneven distribution and to advise the game store or facility about the fact.

The background of the present embodiment described above (including modifications) will be described below.
In the above-described encapsulated pachinko machine 10 or slot machine 500, all the games are completed in the gaming machine. Therefore, a lot of information regarding the number of game balls in addition to the gaming information as in a normal gaming machine, The specifications output via the unit 200 become standard, and with the adoption of such a sealed game machine, various management devices on the side that receives a lot of information will be forced to respond variously. .

  Until now, the information output from gaming machines is received and managed each time, so rather than collecting the information that you want to manage, much information sent from gaming machines as information to be managed is uniform. It came to manage. For this reason, some amusement stores receive information other than the information that they want to manage (more than the information that they want to manage), and there is no degree of freedom in their management form, and it is possible to identify information that is really necessary to be managed. It was difficult.

  In particular, if you try to meet the specifications of the enclosed game machines that are currently under consideration, there will be a need to drastically change or replace the game management system. It was very likely. For example, in the specifications of encapsulated gaming machines currently under consideration, much information output from the gaming machines is almost common among different models, and in addition, model-specific information can be output. In addition, provision of a spare terminal is also under consideration.

  Therefore, more gaming information and ball number related information will be output from gaming machines, and the current management system will have to be changed drastically. For example, it is assumed that very complicated work is required.

  In addition, if the gaming machine installed in the amusement store is a slot machine, setting in consideration of the profit balance is very difficult even in the amusement store, and such work is not possible for a specific employee with some knowledge and experience. Only a member could do it. Furthermore, even for a specific employee, the setting work often depends on intuition, and there are problems such as inability to perform accurate management, and there is also a problem that the work efficiency is not good.

In addition, if it is an enclosed game machine, the configuration of a replenishment device in an island facility or an external polishing device relating to circulation of game media in a current game store is not required. For this reason, the space restrictions at the installation location are small, and it is thought that there will be a degree of freedom in installation. Therefore, there are several small game shops or facilities other than the game shops such as stations, airports, hotels, etc. Operation becomes possible. In such a case, it is possible that knowledge about the gaming machine is still poor.
Therefore, if a large amount of information is outsourced to an external operation agency, and even management that is difficult even in general amusement stores such as setting management of slot machines can be entrusted, it will lead to the spread of enclosed game machines even more. .

  Further, when the information managed by the game store management device (hall computer) in the game store is output from the game store management device 300 to an external third party management organization, There is a possibility that cheating is performed by operating the management device. In other words, it is not possible to deny fraudulent acts by employees, such as information collected by the game management device, or by modifying the collected information and dressing part of sales, and prevent such fraud Therefore, the construction of a system capable of accurately managing and collecting a large amount of information has been demanded.

And the game management system which concerns on a present Example can solve the above various problems. According to the configuration of the present embodiment described above (including modifications), the following inventive concept is derived. Below, it demonstrates in order.
[1] A gaming machine capable of giving a gaming value acquired by a player as a gaming score, a gaming device connected to the gaming machine in a one-to-one relationship and communicating with the gaming machine, and the gaming machine A game management system comprising: a game management device communicably connected to the game device; and an external management device communicably connected to the game device via a predetermined medium,
The gaming machine and the gaming device are configured to be able to send and receive information about gaming machines,
The gaming device includes information output means capable of outputting information about the gaming machine received from the gaming machine to the gaming management device and the external management device,
The information output means includes
The game management device is configured to be capable of outputting predetermined information selected from information related to the gaming machine received from the gaming machine,
A game management system configured to be able to output all of the information related to the gaming machine received from the gaming machine to the external management device.

  Thereby, it is possible to provide a game management system having a very high degree of freedom in the management mode regarding information relating to gaming machines. In other words, the amusement store management device 300 of the amusement store can select information to be managed for each amusement store from among a lot of information relating to the gaming machine output from the pachinko machine 10, and can be managed by the amusement store. It is possible to easily collect information that matches the form (management style).

  In addition, at an amusement store, it is possible to make a significant economic burden without being forced to make extra equipment investment such as a major system change or replacement every time the model is changed. Furthermore, it is possible for the third party management organization 320 to accurately manage and manage all information related to gaming machines, thereby facilitating the discovery of unauthorized operation of information and preventing unauthorized acts. it can.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[2] The information on the gaming machine includes information on fraud that has occurred in the gaming machine,
The game management system characterized in that the predetermined information output to the game management device by the information output means includes information on the fraud.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[3] The game management system, characterized in that the game management device comprises a management device side selection means capable of selecting the predetermined information.
As a result, the predetermined information to be output to the game store management device 300 can be selected by the game store management device 300 itself.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[4] The game management system, wherein the game device includes a game device selection unit capable of selecting the predetermined information.
Thereby, the predetermined information to be output to the game store management device 300 can be selected by the card unit 200 separately from the game store management device 300. Of course, the game store management device 300 may also be able to select them.

Furthermore, an inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[5] The information output means includes:
For the gaming management device, it is possible to output predetermined information selected from information regarding gaming machines received from the gaming machine via the predetermined medium connected to the external management device. A game management system characterized by being configured.
As a result, the predetermined information selected from the information relating to the gaming machine is not limited to a form that is directly output from the information output means of the card unit 200 to the gaming store management device 300, but is connected to the external management device. The present invention can also be applied to the case where it is indirectly output via the third-party management organization relay device 310 or the like, which is the predetermined medium.

Next, another next inventive concept is derived from the configuration of the above-described embodiment (including the modification).
[11] A gaming machine capable of giving a gaming value acquired by a player as a gaming score as a gaming score, a gaming device connected to the gaming machine in a one-to-one correspondence with the gaming machine, and the gaming machine A gaming management device that is communicably connected to the gaming device, an external management device that is communicably connected to the gaming device via a predetermined medium, and a gaming machine based on information from the external management device A gaming facility management system capable of managing an installed facility, and a gaming management system comprising:
The gaming machine and the gaming device are configured to be able to send and receive information about gaming machines,
The gaming device includes information output means capable of outputting information about the gaming machine received from the gaming machine to the gaming management device and the external management device,
The information output means includes
The game management device is configured to be capable of outputting predetermined information selected from information related to the gaming machine received from the gaming machine,
The external management device is configured to be able to output all the information related to the gaming machine received from the gaming machine,
The external management device is configured to be capable of transmitting information related to the gaming machine to the gaming facility management means,
The gaming facility management system is capable of managing a facility in which the gaming machine is installed based on information about the gaming machine transmitted from the external management device.

  According to such a game management system, in addition to the effects described with respect to the game management system described in [1] above, the present invention relates not only to a game store but also to various facilities where game machines are installed, particularly for slot machine setting work. Even if knowledge is scarce, appropriate management can be performed by requesting management from the operation agency company 330 which is a gaming facility management means having specialized knowledge. In addition, coupled with the trend toward space saving in all enclosed game machines, the game machines can be further spread.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[12] The gaming management device is configured to be able to select information relating to the gaming machine received from the gaming device from information relating to the gaming machine received by the gaming device from the gaming machine,
The gaming facility management means comprises management information instruction means capable of giving an instruction about information relating to the gaming machine to be selected in the gaming apparatus as the facility management.

An inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[13] The information related to the gaming machine output from the gaming device to the external management device includes information related to fraud that has occurred in the gaming machine,
The external management device is configured to be capable of transmitting information relating to the fraud output from the gaming device to the gaming facility management means,
The gaming facility management means, wherein the gaming facility management means is capable of giving an instruction regarding management of a facility where the gaming machine is installed, based on the information on fraud.

Furthermore, an inventive concept subordinate to the inventive concept is expressed as follows.
[14] The information output means includes:
For the gaming management device, it is possible to output predetermined information selected from information regarding gaming machines received from the gaming machine via the predetermined medium connected to the external management device. A game management system characterized by being configured.

  The embodiments of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the scope of the present invention. included. For example, in the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine is mainly described as the encapsulated type, but the invention is not necessarily limited to the enclosing type game machine.

Further, the card unit 200 is provided separately from the pachinko machine 10, but all or part of the card unit 200 is built in the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 and at least a part of the card unit 200 are connected. You may comprise so that it may become one.
In the embodiment described above, the game management device is configured as the game store management device 300. However, the game management device may be distributed to other devices, or may be provided in other devices. .

  In addition, the setting of the tax rate for the pachinko machine 10 and the slot machine 500 may be performed uniformly by the third party management organization 320. The setting here may be performed for each game store or facility at the same time, or may be set individually for each game store or facility.

  The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  The game management system according to the present invention is a general game store where a large number of game machines are installed, or a small game shop that can operate only a few machines, and a station where game machines can be installed in other than game stores. When an enclosed game machine is adopted in an airport, hotel, etc., it can be widely applied as its management system.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Game management system 10 ... Pachinko machine 54 ... Game control device 80 ... Dispensing control device 200 ... Card unit 300 ... Game store side management device 310 ... Third party management organization relay device 320 ... Third party management organization 330 ... Operation agency Company 340 ... Machine maker 500 ... Slot machine

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of giving a gaming value acquired by a player as a gaming score, a gaming device connected to the gaming machine in a one-to-one relationship and communicating with the gaming machine, and the gaming device; A game management system comprising: a game management device communicably connected; an external management device communicably connected to the game device; and a prize exchange device communicably connected to the external management device Because
The gaming device includes information output means capable of outputting information about the gaming machine received from the gaming machine to the gaming management device and the external management device,
The information output means includes
The game management device is configured to be capable of outputting predetermined information selected from information related to the gaming machine received from the gaming machine,
The external management device is configured to be able to output all the information related to the gaming machine received from the gaming machine,
The game management system, wherein the prize exchange device is capable of outputting prize related information related to a prize exchange process for exchanging a game value acquired by the player to a predetermined prize to the external management device.